681718

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Manual

562
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/764
Next page
Online User's Guide
DCP-L8410CDW
MFC-L8690CDW
MFC-L8900CDW
MFC-L9570CDW
© 2017 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Before You Use Your Brother Machine ............................................................................................... 1
Definitions of Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 3
Important Note ............................................................................................................................................... 4
Introduction to Your Brother Machine................................................................................................. 5
Before Using Your Machine ........................................................................................................................... 6
Control Panel Overview ................................................................................................................................. 7
Touchscreen LCD Overview........................................................................................................................... 8
How to Navigate the touchscreen LCD ........................................................................................................ 15
Settings Screen Overview............................................................................................................................ 18
Setting the Main Home Screen .................................................................................................................... 19
Customisation of Your Machine ................................................................................................................... 20
Access Brother Utilities (Windows®) ............................................................................................................ 21
Uninstall the Brother Software and Drivers (Windows®) .................................................................... 23
Paper Handling.................................................................................................................................... 24
Load Paper................................................................................................................................................... 25
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 26
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) .................................................................... 30
Paper Settings.............................................................................................................................................. 39
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................ 40
Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing ............................................................................................. 41
Change the Check Paper Size Setting............................................................................................... 42
Recommended Print Media.......................................................................................................................... 43
Load Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 44
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ............................................................. 45
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass............................................................................................. 47
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas ........................................................................................................... 48
Using Special Paper..................................................................................................................................... 49
Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 50
Print from Your Computer (Windows®) ........................................................................................................ 51
Print a Document (Windows®)............................................................................................................ 52
Print Settings (Windows®) .................................................................................................................. 54
Secure Print (Windows®).................................................................................................................... 58
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows®) .................................................................................. 59
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation)
(Windows®) ........................................................................................................................................ 61
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows®) ................................................ 62
Print from Your Computer (Mac) .................................................................................................................. 63
Print a Document (Mac) ..................................................................................................................... 64
Print Options (Mac) ............................................................................................................................ 65
Secure Print (Mac) ............................................................................................................................. 71
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ language emulation)
(Mac) .................................................................................................................................................. 72
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac) .......................................................... 73
Home > Table of Contents
i
Cancel a Print Job........................................................................................................................................ 75
Test Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 76
Scan...................................................................................................................................................... 77
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine ............................................................................... 78
Scan Photos and Graphics................................................................................................................. 79
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File .................................................................................. 81
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive......................................................................................... 83
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) .................................................................................................. 85
Scan to Email Attachment .................................................................................................................. 87
Send Scanned Data to an Email Server............................................................................................. 89
Scan to FTP ....................................................................................................................................... 91
Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) .................................................................................................................. 96
Scan to Network (Windows®) ........................................................................................................... 104
Scan to SharePoint®........................................................................................................................ 110
Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10) ........ 115
Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)..................................................... 119
Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac) .............................................................. 123
Configure Certificate for Signed PDF ............................................................................................... 127
Disable Scanning from Your Computer ............................................................................................ 128
Scan from Your Computer (Windows®)...................................................................................................... 129
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) ..................................................................... 130
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)............................................................... 147
Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows® Applications .................................... 163
Scan Using Windows® Photo Gallery or Windows® Fax and Scan ................................................. 168
Scan from Your Computer (Mac)................................................................................................................ 171
Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) ................................................................................................... 172
Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)........................................................................... 187
TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac) ........................................................................................................... 188
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management......................................................................... 190
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management................................................................ 191
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management .................................................... 192
Copy ................................................................................................................................................... 193
Copy a Document ...................................................................................................................................... 194
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images ............................................................................................................ 196
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature ................................................................................. 197
Sort Copies ................................................................................................................................................ 199
Copy an ID Card ........................................................................................................................................ 200
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy) ...................................................................................... 201
Copy Options ............................................................................................................................................. 203
Fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 205
Send a Fax................................................................................................................................................. 206
Send a Fax ....................................................................................................................................... 207
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF.................................................................................................... 209
Send a Fax Manually........................................................................................................................ 210
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation ........................................................................................ 211
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) .................................................... 212
Home > Table of Contents
ii
Send a Fax in Real Time .................................................................................................................. 215
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)................................................................................ 216
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax......................................................................................................... 217
Cancel a Fax in Progress ................................................................................................................. 220
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax.................................................................................................... 221
Fax Options ...................................................................................................................................... 222
Receive a Fax ............................................................................................................................................ 223
Receive Mode Settings .................................................................................................................... 224
Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options .......................................................................................... 234
Remote Fax Retrieval....................................................................................................................... 241
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................... 246
Voice Operations .............................................................................................................................. 247
Store Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 249
Set up Groups for Broadcasting ....................................................................................................... 253
Combine Address Book Numbers ................................................................................................... 257
Telephone Services and External Devices................................................................................................. 258
Use BT Call Sign .............................................................................................................................. 259
Set the Telephone Line Type............................................................................................................ 261
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)................................................................................... 263
External and Extension Telephones ................................................................................................. 266
Multi-line Connections (PBX) ........................................................................................................... 273
Fax Reports................................................................................................................................................ 274
Print a Transmission Verification Report .......................................................................................... 275
Print a Fax Journal ........................................................................................................................... 276
PC-FAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 277
PC-FAX for Windows® ..................................................................................................................... 278
PC-FAX for Mac .............................................................................................................................. 303
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive .................................................................................... 306
Compatible USB Flash Drives.................................................................................................................... 307
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage......................... 308
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows®) ..................................................................................... 310
Network ...............................................................................................................................................311
Supported Basic Network Features ........................................................................................................... 312
Network Management Software and Utilities ............................................................................................. 313
Learn about Network Management Software and Utilities ............................................................... 314
Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network .................................... 315
Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network................................................... 316
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network.............................................................................. 317
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).................................................................................................................................. 318
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).................................................................................................................................. 319
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard322
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast ........................ 324
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network .......................................................... 326
Use Wi-Fi Direct®............................................................................................................................. 329
Advanced Network Features...................................................................................................................... 338
Home > Table of Contents
iii
Print the Network Configuration Report............................................................................................ 339
Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based Management............................................. 340
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) ..................................................... 343
I-Fax Options.................................................................................................................................... 358
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature................................................................................................ 363
Print the WLAN Report..................................................................................................................... 367
Configure and Operate LDAP Search .............................................................................................. 370
Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management ..................................... 373
Technical Information for Advanced Users................................................................................................. 377
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) ............................................................................................ 378
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings......................................................................... 380
Security .............................................................................................................................................. 381
Lock the Machine Settings ......................................................................................................................... 382
Setting Lock Overview...................................................................................................................... 383
Network Security Features......................................................................................................................... 388
Before Using Network Security Features ......................................................................................... 389
Secure Function Lock 3.0................................................................................................................. 390
Use Active Directory® Authentication ............................................................................................... 397
Use LDAP Authentication................................................................................................................. 402
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS............................................................... 406
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec .................................................................... 439
Send or Receive an Email Securely................................................................................................. 457
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network ............................................... 463
Store Print Log to Network ............................................................................................................... 468
Mobile/Web Connect......................................................................................................................... 474
Brother Web Connect................................................................................................................................. 475
Brother Web Connect Overview....................................................................................................... 476
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect............................................................................ 477
Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect...................................................................................... 479
Set Up Brother Web Connect........................................................................................................... 483
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect............................................................. 492
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect ......................................................... 493
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail ........................................................................................................ 496
Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your Documents Using Brother Web Connect ................. 499
NotePrint and NoteScan................................................................................................................... 504
Google Cloud Print..................................................................................................................................... 509
Google Cloud Print Overview ........................................................................................................... 510
Before Using Google Cloud Print ..................................................................................................... 511
Print from Google Chrome™ or Chrome OS™................................................................................. 515
Print from Google Drive™ for Mobile ................................................................................................ 516
Print from Gmail™ Webmail Service for Mobile................................................................................ 517
AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 518
AirPrint Overview.............................................................................................................................. 519
Before Using AirPrint........................................................................................................................ 520
Print Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 523
Scan Using AirPrint .......................................................................................................................... 527
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models).................................................................................. 530
Home > Table of Contents
iv
Mobile Printing for Windows®.................................................................................................................... 533
Mopria® Print Service................................................................................................................................. 534
Brother iPrint&Scan.................................................................................................................................... 535
Near-Field Communication (NFC).............................................................................................................. 536
Register an External IC Card Reader............................................................................................... 537
ControlCenter .................................................................................................................................... 538
ControlCenter4 (Windows®)....................................................................................................................... 539
Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4 (Windows®) .......................................................... 540
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) ..................................................................... 542
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)............................................................... 543
Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows®) ..................................................... 544
Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)..................................... 546
ControlCenter2 (Mac)................................................................................................................................. 548
Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) ................................................................................................... 549
Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) ............................................................... 550
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 552
Error and Maintenance Messages ............................................................................................................. 553
Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report ..................................................................................... 559
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature .............................................................. 563
Document Jams ......................................................................................................................................... 565
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit ............................................................................ 566
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover .......................................................................... 567
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF ...................................................................... 568
Paper Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 569
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray ...................................................................................................... 570
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 571
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine .................................................................................. 573
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine .............................................................................................. 575
Paper is Jammed underneath the Paper Tray.................................................................................. 578
Printing Problems....................................................................................................................................... 580
Improve the Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 583
Telephone and Fax Problems .................................................................................................................... 589
Set Dial Tone Detection.................................................................................................................... 592
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems ............................................. 593
Network Problems...................................................................................................................................... 594
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 595
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®) .................................................................... 597
Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings? ........................................................... 598
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration........................................................ 599
My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network............................. 601
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly ................................................... 603
Google Cloud Print Problems..................................................................................................................... 604
AirPrint Problems ....................................................................................................................................... 605
Other Problems .......................................................................................................................................... 606
Check the Machine Information ................................................................................................................. 608
Reset Your Brother Machine ...................................................................................................................... 609
Home > Table of Contents
v
Reset Functions Overview ............................................................................................................... 610
Routine Maintenance .........................................................................................................................611
Replace Supplies ....................................................................................................................................... 612
Replace the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 614
Replace the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 617
Replace the Belt Unit........................................................................................................................ 621
Replace the Waste Toner Box .......................................................................................................... 624
Clean the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 628
Clean the Scanner............................................................................................................................ 630
Clean the Laser Scanner Windows .................................................................................................. 631
Clean the Touchscreen LCD ............................................................................................................ 634
Clean the Corona Wires ................................................................................................................... 635
Clean the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................... 637
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers ...................................................................................................... 642
Calibrate Colour Output ............................................................................................................................. 643
Reset the Machine's Calibration Settings......................................................................................... 644
Correct Colour Print Alignment (Colour Registration) ................................................................................ 645
Check the Remaining Part Life .................................................................................................................. 646
Pack and Ship Your Brother Machine ........................................................................................................ 647
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................................... 649
Machine Settings............................................................................................................................... 650
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel ..................................................................................... 651
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) ............................................................................. 652
General Settings............................................................................................................................... 653
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut..................................................................................... 669
Print Reports .................................................................................................................................... 673
Settings and Features Tables........................................................................................................... 676
Change Machine Settings from Your Computer......................................................................................... 726
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management ............................................................ 727
Change the Machine Settings Using Remote Setup ........................................................................ 731
Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 742
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 743
How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine .............................................................................................. 750
Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................... 751
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life ...................................................................................... 753
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 754
Information Regarding Recycled Paper ..................................................................................................... 755
Brother Numbers........................................................................................................................................ 756
Home > Table of Contents
vi
Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine
Before You Use Your Brother Machine
•Definitions of Notes
•Trademarks
•Important Note
1
Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Definitions of Notes
Definitions of Notes
We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide:
WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
NOTE NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special
conditions of use.
Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts.
Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform.
Bold Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen.
Italics Italicised style emphasises an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Courier New Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
•Before You Use Your Brother Machine
2
Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Trademarks
Trademarks
BROTHER is either a trademark or a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, SharePoint, Internet Explorer, Outlook, PowerPoint, Excel, Active
Directory, OneNote and OneDrive are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Apple, Mac, Safari, iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States
and other countries.
AirPrint and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Nuance and PaperPort are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates
in the United States and/or other countries.
PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Alliance and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and Wi-Fi Protected Setup logo are trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
Flickr is a registered trademark of Yahoo! Inc.
Android, Gmail, Google Cloud Print, Google Drive, Google Chrome, Chrome OS and Google Play are
trademarks of Google Inc. Use of these trademarks is subject to Google Permissions.
Mopria® is a registered trademark and a service mark of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other
countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Evernote is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license.
The Bluetooth word mark is owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Brother Industries,
Ltd. is under license.
WordPerfect is a registered trademark of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the United States
and/or other countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its
proprietary programs.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents
and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
Related Information
•Before You Use Your Brother Machine
3
Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Important Note
Important Note
• Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and
power regulations of that country.
• Not all models are available in all countries.
• Windows® 10 in this document represents Windows® 10 Home, Windows® 10 Pro, Windows® 10 Education
and Windows® 10 Enterprise.
• Windows Server® 2008 in this document represents Windows Server® 2008 and Windows Server® 2008 R2.
• The screens in this User's Guide are for illustration purposes only and may differ from the actual screens.
• Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows® 7 and macOS v10.10.5 Screens
on your computer may vary depending on your operating system.
• The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
• This documentation is for both MFC and DCP models. Read 'XXX-XXXX' as 'MFC/DCP-XXXX' (where XXXX
is the name of your model).
• Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions.
Related Information
•Before You Use Your Brother Machine
4
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine
Introduction to Your Brother Machine
•Before Using Your Machine
•Control Panel Overview
•Touchscreen LCD Overview
•How to Navigate the touchscreen LCD
•Settings Screen Overview
•Setting the Main Home Screen
•Customisation of Your Machine
•Access Brother Utilities (Windows®)
5
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Before Using Your Machine
Before Using Your Machine
Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following:
• Make sure you have installed the Brother software and drivers.
• For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure.
Simultaneous printing, scanning and faxing
Your machine can print from your computer while sending or receiving a fax into memory or while scanning a
document into the computer. Fax sending will not be stopped during printing from your computer. However, when
the machine is copying or receiving a fax on paper, it pauses the printing operation, and then continues printing
when copying or fax receiving has finished.
DCP models do not support the fax feature.
Firewall (Windows®)
If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, network scan, or PC-FAX, you
may need to configure the firewall settings. If you are using the Windows® Firewall and you installed the drivers
using the steps in the installer, the necessary firewall settings have been already set. If you are using any other
personal firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
6
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Control Panel Overview
Control Panel Overview
The control panel may vary depending on your model.
1 2 3 4 5
6
1. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Access menus and options by pressing them on the touchscreen.
2. Menu Buttons
(Back)
Press to go back to the previous menu.
(Home)
Press to return to the Main Home screen.
(Cancel)
Press to cancel an operation.
3. Dial Pad (Numerical buttons)
Press the Numerical buttons to dial telephone or fax numbers and to enter the number of copies.
4. LED Power Indicator
The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status.
5. Power On/Off
• Turn the machine on by pressing .
• Turn the machine off by pressing and holding down . The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few
seconds before going off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is always available.
6. Near Field Communication (NFC) Reader (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
You can use card authentication by touching the IC card to the NFC Reader on the control panel.
If your Android™ device supports the NFC feature, you can print from your device or scan documents to your
device in the same way.
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
7
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Touchscreen LCD Overview
Touchscreen LCD Overview
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
You can select from two types of screens to set as the Main Home screen: Home screens and Shortcuts
screens. When a Home screen is displayed, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the other Home screens.
The Main Home screen displays the machine's status when the machine is idle. When displayed, this screen
indicates that your machine is ready for the next command.
If Active Directory® Authentication or LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel is locked.
The available features vary depending on your model.
Home screen: Screen 1
The Home screens provide access to features, such as Fax, Copy and Scan.
Home screen: Screen 2
8
Home screen: Screen 3
Shortcuts screen
Create Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning and using Web
Connect.
Eight Shortcuts tabs are available with six Shortcuts on each Shortcuts tab. A total of 48 Shortcuts are
available.
1. Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
2. Modes
• [Fax]
Press to access Fax mode.
• [Copy]
Press to access Copy mode.
• [Scan]
Press to access Scan mode.
• [Secure Print]
Press to access the [Secure Print] option.
9
• [Web]
Press to connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
• [Apps]
Press to connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
• [USB]
Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options.
• [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.
3. (Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
4. (Settings)
Press to access the [Settings] menu.
If Setting Lock has been turned on, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the machine to
change settings.
5. or (Wireless Status)
Press to configure wireless settings.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.
0 Max
Wireless LAN Disabled
6. [Shortcuts]
Press to access the [Shortcuts] screen.
7. (Home screen)
Press to access the Home screens.
New Fax
When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears at the
top of the screen.
10
Warning icon
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area to
view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen.
NOTE
This product adopts the font of ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO.,LTD.
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Your machine has eight tabbed screens (referred to as Home screens). Each Home screen can hold up to eight
icons which can be used for functions, machine settings and shortcuts. A total of 64 icons can be placed on the
Home screens as needed.
The Main Home screen can be selected from the Home screens.
Use the [Admin Settings] menu to names on the tabs and rearrange the icons.
1. Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
This area is also used to display error or maintenance messages.
11
2. (Wired LAN Status)
Press to configure the Wired LAN settings.
The icon displays the current wired network status.
Wired LAN Disabled
(Grey)
Wired LAN Enabled
(White)
No cable connection or Wireless LAN connected
3. or (Wireless Status)
Press to configure wireless settings.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.
0 Max
Wireless LAN Disabled
4. (Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
5. (Admin Settings)
Press to access the [Admin Settings] menu.
6. Function Icons, Setting Icons and Shortcut Icons
The following descriptions explain basic icons and features. The available features vary depending on your
model.
• [All Settings]
Press to access the machine's settings menu.
• [Fax]
Press to access Fax mode.
• [Copy]
Press to access Copy mode.
• [Scan]
Press to access Scan mode.
• [Secure Print]
Press to access the [Secure Print] option.
• [USB]
Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options.
• [Web]
Press to connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
• [Apps]
Press to connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
12
• [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.
• (Shortcuts)
Press to access the created Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying,
scanning and using Web Connect.
7. Tabs Scroll Buttons
Press to display and access all the tabs.
8. Home Tabs
Press to display the screen for the Home.
New Fax
When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears at the
top of the screen.
13
Warning icon
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area to
view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen.
NOTE
This product adopts the font of ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO.,LTD.
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
•Customisation of Your Machine
14
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > How to Navigate the touchscreen LCD
How to Navigate the touchscreen LCD
Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, swipe left, right, up, down or
press d c or a b on the LCD to scroll through them.
The following steps explain how to change a machine setting. In this example, the LCD Backlight setting is
changed from [Light] to [Med].
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
NOTE
DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning on the machine. Doing this
may cause an error.
1. Press [Settings].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip this step.
2. Press [All Settings].
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press [General
Setup].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [LCD Settings] option, and then press [LCD
Settings].
15
5. Press [Backlight].
6. Press [Med].
16
7. Press .
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
17
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Settings Screen Overview
Settings Screen Overview
Related Models: DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
Press to view the current machine status on the LCD.
Use the Settings menu to access all of your Brother machine's settings.
The available features vary depending on your model.
1. Toner
• Displays the remaining toner life.
• Press to access the [Toner] menu.
2. Network
• Press to set up a network connection.
• A four level indicator on the screen displays the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless
connection.
3. Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
Press to access the [Date & Time] menu.
4. Screen Settings
Press to access the [Screen Settings] menu.
5. All Settings
Press to access a menu of all machine settings.
6. Tray Setting
Press to access the [Tray Setting] menu.
7. Wi-Fi Direct
Press to set up a Wi-Fi Direct network connection.
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
18
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Setting the Main Home Screen
Setting the Main Home Screen
Related Models: DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
Set the Main Home screen to either [Home Screen 1], [Home Screen 2], [Home Screen 3],
[Shortcuts 1], [Shortcuts 2], [Shortcuts 3], [Shortcuts 4], [Shortcuts 5], [Shortcuts 6],
[Shortcuts 7] or [Shortcuts 8].
When the machine is idle or you press , the touchscreen will return to the screen you set.
1. Press [Settings] > [Screen Settings] > [Main Home Screen].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the screen settings, and then press the setting you want.
3. Press .
The machine will go to your chosen screen.
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
19
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Customisation of Your Machine
Customisation of Your Machine
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When you press , the machine displays the [Admin Settings] menu. To restrict access to this menu,
you can set an administrator password to protect it.
This password is the same as the administrator password for Web Based Management.
The [Admin Settings] menu allows you to customise Home screen names and the arrangement of icons on
the screens.
The [Home Screen Settings] menu and the [Other Screen Settings] menu provide the following
functions:
• Renaming Home screen tabs
• Adding, removing and repositioning icons on Home screens
• Setting your Main Home screen
• Selecting screen background colour
• Changing the default functions for the Copy screen and the Scan screen
The [Admin Settings] menu allows you to manage permissions and restrictions.
The [Restriction Management] menu provides the following functions:
• User Restriction
- Secure Function Lock
- Active Directory Authentication
- LDAP Authentication
• Setting Lock (detailed settings are available.)
For more information, see Related Information. Network Security Features and Lock the Machine Settings.
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
•Touchscreen LCD Overview
•Network Security Features
•Lock the Machine Settings
20
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows®)
Access Brother Utilities (Windows®)
Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on
your computer.
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows® 7)
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• (Windows® 8)
Tap or click (Brother Utilities) either on the Start screen or the desktop.
• (Windows® 8.1)
Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are using a touch-
based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen).
When the Apps screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities).
• (Windows® 10)
Click Brother > Brother Utilities.
2. Select your machine (where XXXX is the name of your model).
3. Choose the operation you want to use.
21
Related Information
•Introduction to Your Brother Machine
•Uninstall the Brother Software and Drivers (Windows®)
22
Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows®) > Uninstall the Brother
Software and Drivers (Windows®)
Uninstall the Brother Software and Drivers (Windows®)
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows® 7)
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• (Windows® 8)
Tap or click (Brother Utilities) either on the Start screen or the desktop.
• (Windows® 8.1)
Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are using a touch-
based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen).
When the Apps screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities).
• (Windows® 10)
Click Brother > Brother Utilities.
2. Click the drop-down list, and then select your model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left
navigation bar, and then click Uninstall.
Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers.
Related Information
•Access Brother Utilities (Windows®)
23
Home > Paper Handling
Paper Handling
•Load Paper
•Paper Settings
•Recommended Print Media
•Load Documents
•Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
•Using Special Paper
24
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper
Load Paper
•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
25
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•Load Paper in the Paper Tray
•Printing Problems
•Error and Maintenance Messages
26
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray
Load Paper in the Paper Tray
• If the Check Size setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message appears
on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type. Change the paper size and paper
type settings if needed, following the LCD instructions.
• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings in the machine, or on your computer.
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Press and slide the paper guides to fit the paper.
Press the green release levers to slide the paper guides.
3. Fan the stack of paper well.
4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related
Information: Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray.
27
5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
7. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the output tray.
Related Information
•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
28
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray > Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper
Using the Paper Tray
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause
the paper to jam or misfeed.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face down
• top edge toward the front of the paper tray
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face up
• bottom edge toward the front of the paper tray
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
•Load Paper in the Paper Tray
29
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
You can load letterhead, coloured paper, thin paper, thick paper, recycled paper, bond paper, labels, glossy
paper, up to 50 sheets of plain paper, or up to ten envelopes in the MP tray.
•Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
•Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
•Printing Problems
•Error and Maintenance Messages
30
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings in the machine, or on your computer.
• Plain Paper
• Letterhead
• Coloured Paper
• Thin Paper
• Thick Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond
• Glossy Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
2
1
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
31
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
• Place the paper's leading edge (top of paper) between the and b arrows (2).
• When using glossy paper, load only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.
• When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related
Information: Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray.
2
Related Information
•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray
32
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted
Paper Using the MP Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper
Using the MP Tray
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause
the paper to jam or misfeed.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face up
• top edge first
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face down
• bottom edge first
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
•Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
33
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
When the back cover (face up output tray) is pulled down, the machine has a straight paper path from the MP
tray through to the back of the machine. Use this paper feed and output method when you print on labels.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings in the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
2
1
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
34
1
2
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
• Place the paper's leading edge (top of paper) between the and b arrows (2).
6. Change your print preferences in the Print screen before sending the print job from your computer.
7. Send your print job to the machine.
8. Close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
35
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
You can load up to ten envelopes in the MP tray.
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings in the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. Pull down the two grey levers, one on the left side and one on the right side, as shown in the illustration.
3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
4. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
36
2
1
5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using.
6. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
2
1
• Load up to 10 envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are
below the maximum paper mark (1). Loading more than 10 envelopes may cause paper jams.
• Place the paper's leading edge (top of paper) between the and b arrows (2).
7. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box before sending the print job from your computer.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
8. Send your print job to the machine.
37
9. When you have finished printing, return the two grey levers you adjusted in the earlier step back to their
original positions.
10. Close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
38
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings
Paper Settings
•Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
•Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing
•Change the Check Paper Size Setting
39
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
When you change the size and type of the paper you load in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the LCD at the same time.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper
Type].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want.
4. Press .
5. Press [Paper Size].
6. Press the option you want.
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want.
8. Press .
Related Information
•Paper Settings
40
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing
Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing
Change the default tray the machine will use for printing copies, received faxes, and print jobs from your
computer.
DCP models do not support the fax feature.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Tray Use: Copy], [Tray Use: Fax], or [Tray Use:
Print] option, and then press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the option you want, and then press it. For example, when you
select the [MP>T1] option, the machine pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, and then from Tray 1.
4. Press .
• When you make a copy using the ADF and give priority to multiple trays, the machine looks for the tray
with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray.
• When you make a copy using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray
even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.
• (MFC models) Use the following sizes of paper for printing faxes: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio or Mexico
Legal. When an appropriate size is not in any of the trays, the machine stores received faxes and
[Size Mismatch] appears on the touchscreen.
• (MFC models) If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s memory, [No Paper]
appears on the touchscreen. Load paper in the empty tray.
Related Information
•Paper Settings
41
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Size Setting
Change the Check Paper Size Setting
When you turn on your machine's Check Size setting, the machine displays a message when you remove a
paper tray or load paper using the MP tray, asking if you changed the paper size and paper type.
The default setting is On.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check
Size].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Paper Settings
42
Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media
Recommended Print Media
To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table.
Paper Type Item
Plain Paper Xerox Premier TCF 80 g/m2
Xerox Business 80 g/m2
Recycled Paper Steinbeis Evolution White 80 g/m2
Labels Avery laser label L7163
Envelopes Antalis River series (DL)
Glossy Paper Xerox Colotech+ Gloss Coated 120 g/m2
Related Information
•Paper Handling
43
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents
Load Documents
You can send a fax, make copies and scan from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) and from the scanner
glass.
•Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
•Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
44
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF when copying or scanning multiple-page, standard-sized documents.
• The ADF can hold the following pages and feed each sheet individually:
- (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
Up to 50 sheets
- (MFC-L8900CDW)
Up to 70 sheets
- (MFC-L9570CDW)
Up to 80 sheets
• Use standard 80 g/m2 paper.
• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written in ink are completely dry.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, pasted, or taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper, or fabric.
• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
Document Sizes Supported
Length: 147.3 to 355.6 mm
Width: 105 to 215.9 mm
Weight: 64 to 90 g/m2
1. Unfold the ADF document output support flap.
2. Fan the pages well.
3. Stagger the pages of your document and load it face up and top edge first, into the ADF as shown in the
illustration.
45
4. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document.
Related Information
•Load Documents
46
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Use the scanner glass to fax, copy, or scan one page at a time.
Document Sizes Supported
Length:
• (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
Up to 300 mm
• (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Up to 355.6 mm
Width: Up to 215.9 mm
Weight: Up to 2 kg
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Place the document on the scanner glass face down.
3. Place the corner of the page in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
4. Close the document cover.
If the document is a book or is thick, gently press on the document cover.
Related Information
•Load Documents
47
Home > Paper Handling > Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
The measurements in the table below show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas from the edges of the
most commonly-used paper sizes. These measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the
application you are using.
1
3
24
Do not attempt to scan, copy, or print into these areas; your output will not reflect anything in these areas.
Usage Document Size Top (1)
Bottom (3)
Left (2)
Right (4)
Fax (Sending) Letter, Legal 3 mm 4 mm
A4 3 mm (ADF)
1 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3 mm
Copy 1Letter, Legal 4 mm 4 mm
A4 4 mm 3 mm
Scan Letter 3 mm 3 mm
A4 3 mm 3 mm
Legal 3 mm 3 mm
Print Letter, Legal 4.2 mm 4.2 mm
A4 4.2 mm 4.2 mm
Related Information
•Paper Handling
1a 1 in 1 copy and 100% document size copy
48
Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper
Using Special Paper
Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance.
• DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.
• If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit
degraded performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct
sunlight and heat.
IMPORTANT
Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped
• that is coated or has a chemical finish
• that is damaged, creased or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• with letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not
covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
Related Information
•Paper Handling
49
Home > Print
Print
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•Cancel a Print Job
•Test Print
50
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Print a Document (Windows®)
•Print Settings (Windows®)
•Secure Print (Windows®)
•Change the Default Print Settings (Windows®)
•Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language
Emulation) (Windows®)
•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows®)
51
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Print a Document (Windows®)
Print a Document (Windows®)
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or
preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size.
5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the
application.
6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field.
7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using.
8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets,
click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options.
9. Change other printer settings if needed.
10. Click OK.
11. Complete your print operation.
52
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Print Settings (Windows®)
53
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Print Settings (Windows®)
Print Settings (Windows®)
Basic Tab
1. Paper Size
Select the size of the paper you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a
custom paper size.
2. Orientation
Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
3. Copies
Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field.
Collate
Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is
selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of
copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of
copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed.
4. Media Type
Select the type of media you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts
its print settings according to the selected media type.
54
5. Print Quality
Select the print resolution you want. Because print quality and speed are related, the higher the quality, the
longer it will take to print the document.
6. Colour / Mono
Select the Colour/Mono settings to use.
NOTE
• The machine’s colour sensor is very sensitive and may perceive faded black text or an off-white
background as colour. If you know that your document is black and white and you want to conserve
colour toner, select Mono mode.
• If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour
document, the print job cannot be completed. Cancel your print job and select to start the print job
again in Mono mode, as long as Black toner is available.
7. Document Type
Select the type of document you want to print.
Settings button
Specify advanced settings, such as colour mode and other settings.
Colour Mode
Select the colour mode to suit your preference.
Import
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings. When you have finished
adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, import those settings as a print
configuration file. Use the Export option to create a print configuration file from the current settings.
Export
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings. When you have finished
adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, export those settings as a print
configuration file. Use the Import option to load a previously exported configuration file.
Improve Grey Colour
Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Enhance Black Printing
If a black graphic does not print correctly, select this setting.
Improve Pattern Printing
Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the fills
and patterns you see on your computer screen.
8. Multiple Page
Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on
multiple sheets.
Page Order
Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Border Line
Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
9. 2-sided / Booklet
Select this option to print on both sides of the paper or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided
printing.
55
2-sided Settings button
Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each
orientation.
10. Paper Source
Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.
First Page
Select the paper source to use for printing the first page.
Other Pages
Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages.
Advanced Tab
1. Scaling
Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document.
Fit to Paper Size
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select
this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list.
Free
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a
value into the field.
56
2. Reverse Print
Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.
3. Use Watermark
Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset
watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created.
4. Header-Footer Print
Select this option to print the date, time and PC login user name on the document.
5. Toner Save Mode
Select this feature to conserve toner by using less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are
still legible.
6. Secure Print
This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on the
machine's control panel.
7. Administrator
This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions.
8. User Authentication
This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user.
9. Other Print Options button
Improve Print Output
Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.
TrueType Mode
Mode
Select how the fonts are processed for printing.
Use Printer TrueType Fonts(Available only for certain models)
Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing.
Eco settings
Select this option to reduce printing noise.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Print a Document (Windows®)
57
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Secure Print (Windows®)
Secure Print (Windows®)
Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on
the machine's control panel.
• The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn off the machine.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or
preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print check box.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
You must set a separate password for each document.
7. Type the User Name and Job Name in the text field, if needed.
8. Click OK, to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK.
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,
and then press [Secure Print].
12. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.
The LCD displays the list of secured jobs for your name.
13. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
14. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].
15. Enter the number of copies you want.
16. Press [Start].
The machine prints the data.
After you have printed the secured data, it will be cleared from the machine's memory.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
58
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows®)
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows®)
When you change an application's print settings, the changes only apply to documents printed with that
application. To change print settings for all Windows® applications, you must configure the printer driver
properties.
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows Server® 2008
Click (Start) > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2
Click (Start) > Devices and Printers.
• For Windows® 8
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows® 10 and Windows Server® 2016
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers.
• For Windows Server® 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server® 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX icon (where XXXX is your model name), and then select Printer
properties. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.
3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences... or Preferences... button.
The printer driver dialog box appears.
• To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab.
• To change the printer port, click the Ports tab.
4. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults for all of your Windows® programs.
5. Click OK.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows®)
59
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Change the Default Print Settings
(Windows®) > Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows®)
Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows®)
Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and serial number.
The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the
Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps:
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows Server® 2008
Click (Start) > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2
Click (Start) > Devices and Printers.
• For Windows® 8
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows® 10 and Windows Server® 2016
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers.
• For Windows Server® 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server® 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX icon (where XXXX is your model name), and then select Printer
properties. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Click the Auto Detect button.
The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions:
• The machine power switch is off.
• The machine is in a network shared environment.
• The cable is not connected to the machine correctly.
Related Information
•Change the Default Print Settings (Windows®)
60
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer
Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation) (Windows®)
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™
Language Emulation) (Windows®)
The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript® data more clearly.
To install the PS driver (BR-Script3 printer driver), launch the Brother installation disc, select Custom in the
Select Machine section, and then select the PS Driver check box.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX BR-Script3 (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing
properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Layout, Paper/Quality, or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings.
Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced... button to change advanced print
settings.
4. Click OK.
5. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
61
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows®) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your
Computer (Windows®)
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows®)
The Status Monitor utility is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more devices,
allowing you to get immediate notification of errors.
• Do one of the following:
- Double-click the icon in the task tray.
- (Windows® 7)
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left
navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.
- (Windows® 8)
Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.
- (Windows® 8.1)
Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are using a touch-
based device, swipe up from bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen). When the Apps
screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your
model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status
Monitor.
- (Windows® 10)
Click Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left
navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.
Troubleshooting
Click the Troubleshooting button to access the troubleshooting website.
Looking for replacement supplies?
Click the Looking for replacement supplies? button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Printing Problems
•Calibrate Colour Output
62
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac)
Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•Print a Document (Mac)
•Print Options (Mac)
•Secure Print (Mac)
•Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ language
emulation) (Mac)
•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)
63
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print a Document (Mac)
Print a Document (Mac)
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
2. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.
3. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name).
4. Type the number of copies you want in the Copies field.
5. Click the Paper Size pop-up menu, and then select your paper size.
6. Select the Orientation option that matches the way you want the document to print.
7. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select Print Settings.
The Print Settings options appear.
8. Click the Media Type pop-up menu, and then select the type of paper you are using.
9. Change other printer settings, if needed.
10. Click Print.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•Print Options (Mac)
64
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print Options (Mac)
Print Options (Mac)
Page Setup
1. Paper Size
Select the size of the paper you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a
custom paper size.
2. Orientation
Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
3. Scale
Type a value into the field to enlarge or reduce the pages in your document to fit the selected paper size.
65
Layout
1. Pages per Sheet
Select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.
2. Layout Direction
Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
3. Border
Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
4. Two-Sided
Select whether to print on both sides of the paper.
5. Reverse page orientation
Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.
6. Flip horizontally
Select this option to reverse the printed image on the page horizontally from left to right.
66
Paper Handling
1. Collate pages
Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is
selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of copies
you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of copies chosen
before the next page of the document is printed.
2. Pages to Print
Select which pages you want to print (even pages or odd pages).
3. Page Order
Select the page order.
4. Scale to fit paper size
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the pages in your document to fit the selected paper size.
5. Destination Paper Size
Select the paper size to print on.
6. Scale down only
Select this option if you want to reduce the pages in your document when they are too large for the selected
paper size. If this option is selected and the document is formatted for a paper size that is smaller than the
paper size you are using, the document will be printed at its original size.
67
Print Settings
1. Media Type
Select the type of media you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts
its print settings according to the selected media type.
2. Print Quality
Select the print resolution you want. Because print quality and speed are related, the higher the quality, the
longer it will take to print the document.
3. Color / Mono
Select the Colour/Mono settings to use.
NOTE
• The machine’s colour sensor is very sensitive and may perceive faded black text or an off-white
background as colour. If you know that your document is black and white and you want to conserve
colour toner, select Mono mode.
• If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour
document, the print job cannot be completed. Cancel your print job and select to start the print job
again in Mono mode, as long as Black toner is available.
4. Paper Source
Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.
5. Advanced
Toner Save Mode
Select this feature to conserve toner by using less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but
are still legible.
Improve Print Output
Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.
Quiet Mode
Select this option to reduce printing noise.
68
Other Print Options
Skip Blank Page
Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from
printing.
Color Settings
1. Color Mode
Select the colour mode to suit your preference.
2. Advanced Color Settings
Click the disclosure triangle to select the Colour Enhancement feature. This feature analyses your image to
improve its sharpness, white balance and colour density. This process may take several minutes depending
on the size of the image and the specifications of your computer.
69
Secure Print
1. Secure Print
This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on the
machine's control panel.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•Print a Document (Mac)
70
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Secure Print (Mac)
Secure Print (Mac)
Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on
the machine's control panel.
• The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn off the machine.
1. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.
2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name).
3. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select the Secure Print option. The Secure Print options
appear.
4. Select the Secure Print check box.
5. Type your user name, job name and a four-digit password.
6. Click Print.
7. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,
and then press [Secure Print].
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.
The LCD displays the list of secured jobs for your name.
9. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
10. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].
11. Enter the number of copies you want.
12. Press [Start].
After you have printed the secured data, it will be cleared from the machine's memory.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Mac)
71
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver
(PostScript® 3™ language emulation) (Mac)
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™
language emulation) (Mac)
The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript® data more clearly.
• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to download
the PS driver (BR-Script3 printer driver).
• Make sure you have added the BR-Script3 printer driver from Print & Scan or Printers & Scanners in the
System Preferences list on your Mac.
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
2. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.
3. Select your machine.
4. Type the number of copies you want in the Copies field.
5. Click the Paper Size pop-up menu, and then select your paper size.
6. Select the Orientation option that matches the way you want the document to print.
7. Click the print options pop-up menu, and then click Printer Features.
The Printer Features options appear.
8. Click the Print Quality pop-up menu, and then select the print quality.
9. Click the Media Type pop-up menu, and then select the type of paper you are using.
10. Select the Auto, Color, or Mono option for the Color / Mono print setting.
11. Change other printer settings, if needed.
12. Click Print.
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Mac)
72
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer
(Mac)
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)
The Status Monitor utility is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of a device, allowing you to get
immediate notification of error messages, such as paper empty or paper jam, at preset update intervals. You can
also access Web Based Management.
1. Click the System Preferences menu, select Print & Scan or Printers & Scanners, and then select your
machine.
2. Click the Options & Supplies button.
3. Click the Utility tab, and then click the Open Printer Utility button.
Status Monitor starts.
Troubleshooting
Click the Troubleshooting button to access the troubleshooting website.
Visit the Genuine Supplies website
Click the Visit the Genuine Supplies website button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.
Updating the machine's status
To view the latest machine status while the Status Monitor window is open, click the icon. You can
set the interval at which the software updates machine status information. Click Brother Status Monitor in
the menu bar, and then select Preferences.
Web Based Management (Network Connection Only)
Access the Web Based Management System by clicking the machine icon on the Status Monitor screen.
You can use a standard Web Browser to manage your machine using HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer
Protocol).
73
Related Information
•Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•Printing Problems
•Calibrate Colour Output
74
Home > Print > Cancel a Print Job
Cancel a Print Job
1. Press .
To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold for about four seconds.
Related Information
•Print
•Printing Problems
75
Home > Print > Test Print
Test Print
If there are problems with print quality, follow these instructions to do a test print:
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Options] > [Test Print].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Print
•Improve the Print Quality
76
Home > Scan
Scan
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Scan from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
•Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
77
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Scan Photos and Graphics
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
•Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
•Scan to Email Attachment
•Send Scanned Data to an Email Server
•Scan to FTP
•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
•Scan to Network (Windows®)
•Scan to SharePoint®
•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows®
10)
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Configure Certificate for Signed PDF
•Disable Scanning from Your Computer
78
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan Photos and Graphics
Scan Photos and Graphics
Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to Image] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's ControlCenter software installed must be connected to
the machine.
5. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Long Edge
79
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Short Edge
6. Select the scan settings you want to change:
•[Resolution]
•[File Type]
•[Scan Type]
•[Document Size]
•[Scan Settings]
•[Brightness]
•[Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
•[ADF Auto Deskew]
•[Skip Blank Page]
•[Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
7. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)
80
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as
a PDF File
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to File] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's ControlCenter software installed must be connected to
the machine.
5. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Long Edge
81
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Short Edge
6. Select the scan settings you want to change:
•[Resolution]
•[File Type]
•[Scan Type]
•[Document Size]
•[Scan Settings]
•[Brightness]
•[Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
•[ADF Auto Deskew]
•[Skip Blank Page]
•[Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
7. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)
82
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Save Scanned Data to a USB
Flash Drive
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Scan documents directly to a USB flash drive.
1. Load your document.
2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.
The LCD automatically changes.
3. Press [Scan to USB].
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the button you want to change. Follow the
machine's instructions.
- To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]
option, and then press [Yes].
- To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].
• Press [Start] to start scanning without changing additional settings.
5. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Long Edge
2-sided Scan: Short Edge
6. Select the scan settings you want to change:
•[Resolution]
•[File Type]
•[Scan Type]
•[Document Size]
•[Brightness]
•[Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
•[File Name]
•[File Name Style]
•[File Size]
•[ADF Auto Deskew]
83
•[Skip Blank Page]
•[Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
•[Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
7. Press [Start].
(MFC-L9570CDW)
If the machine prompts you to select the USB host, make your selection.
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
IMPORTANT
The LCD displays a message while reading the data. DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the USB
flash drive from the machine while it is reading the data. You could lose your data or damage the USB
flash drive.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
84
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to an Editable Text File
(OCR)
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using optical character recognition (OCR)
technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.
• The Scan to OCR feature is available for certain languages.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to OCR] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's ControlCenter software installed must be connected to
the machine.
5. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Long Edge
85
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Short Edge
6. Select the scan settings you want to change:
•[Resolution]
•[File Type]
•[Scan Type]
•[Document Size]
•[Scan Settings]
•[Brightness]
•[Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
•[ADF Auto Deskew]
•[Skip Blank Page]
•[Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
7. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)
86
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Email Attachment
Scan to Email Attachment
Send a scanned document as an email attachment.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.
• The Scan to Email feature does not support Webmail services. Use the Scan to Image or Scan to File
feature to scan a document or a picture, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.
The machine scans to your default email client.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to E-mail] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's ControlCenter software installed must be connected to
the machine.
5. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Long Edge
87
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Short Edge
6. Select the scan settings you want to change:
•[Resolution]
•[File Type]
•[Scan Type]
•[Document Size]
•[Scan Settings]
•[Brightness]
•[Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
•[ADF Auto Deskew]
•[Skip Blank Page]
•[Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
7. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)
88
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Send Scanned Data to an Email
Server
Send Scanned Data to an Email Server
Send scanned data from your Brother machine directly to your email server, for delivery to an email recipient
without using a computer.
• (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
To use this function, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com to update your machine's firmware or the program in your machine.
• To send scanned data to an email server, you must configure your machine to communicate with your
network and mail server. You can configure these items from the machine's control panel, Web Based
Management, Remote Setup, or BRAdmin Professional.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to E-mail Server] .
• If you registered your email address with your user ID, the [to My E-mail] option appears when you
log on to the machine using Secure Function Lock, Active Directory® Authentication, or LDAP
Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your email address, press [to My E-mail]. When your email address
appears on the LCD, press [OK].
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, click the Scan tab, and then click the Scan to E-
mail Server menu in the left navigation bar. In the Send to My E-mail field, select On.
3. Do one of the following to enter the destination email address:
• To enter the email address manually, press [Manual], and then enter the email address using the
keyboard on the LCD. When finished, press [OK].
• If the email address is stored in the machine's address book, press [Address Book], and then select
the email address.
Press [OK].
4. Confirm the email address, and then press [Next].
5. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the button you want to change. Follow the
machine's instructions.
- To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]
option, and then press [Yes].
- To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].
• Press [Start] to start scanning without changing additional settings.
6. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Long Edge
89
Option Description
2-sided Scan: Short Edge
7. Select the scan settings you want to change:
•[Resolution]
•[File Type]
•[Scan Type]
•[Document Size]
•[Brightness]
•[Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
•[File Name]
•[File Name Style]
•[File Size]
•[ADF Auto Deskew]
•[Skip Blank Page]
•[Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
•[Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
(This function may not be available depending on your machine conditions.)
8. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
90
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to FTP
Scan to FTP
Scan documents directly to an FTP server when you need to share the scanned information. For added
convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to FTP destinations.
•Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
•Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
91
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to FTP > Set up a Scan to
FTP Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to an FTP location.
We recommend Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 for Windows® and Safari 9 for Mac. Make sure that
JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.
4. Select the FTP option, and then click Submit.
92
5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The
machine will display this name on the LCD.
8. In the Host Address field, type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the
IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
9. Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default for this setting is port 21. In
most cases this setting does not need to be changed.
10. In the Username field, type a user name (up to 32 characters) that has permission to write data to the FTP
server.
11. In the Password field, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in
the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
93
12. To scan securely using SSL/TLS communication, set the SSL/TLS option. Change the CA Certificate
setting, if needed.
13. In the Store Directory field, type the path to the folder on the FTP server where you want to send your
scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (see example).
14. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or
from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you
select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
15. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
16. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If
you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
17. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary
to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
18. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.
19. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this
feature to remove the background colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
20. Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration.
The default setting is on. In most cases this setting does not need to be changed.
21. Click Submit.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Related Information
•Scan to FTP
94
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to FTP > Upload Scanned
Data to an FTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
Share scanned information by saving it to your FTP server.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP] .
3. The server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Select the profile you want. If
the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality
or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan to FTP
95
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
Scan documents directly to an SFTP server, a secure version of an FTP server. For added convenience,
configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SFTP destinations.
•Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
•Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
•Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
•Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
•Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
96
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) > Set up
a Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to an SFTP location.
We recommend Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 for Windows® and Safari 9 for Mac. Make sure that
JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.
4. Select the SFTP option, and then click Submit.
97
5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The
machine will display this name on the LCD.
8. In the Host Address field, type the Host Address (for example: sftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the
IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
9. In the Username field, type the user name (up to 32 characters) that has permission to write data to the
SFTP server.
10. In the Auth. Method field, select Password or Public Key.
11. Do one of the following:
• When you select Password, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you
typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
98
• When you select Public Key, select the authentication type from the Client Key Pair drop-down list.
12. Select the authentication type from the Server Public Key drop-down list.
13. In the Store Directory field, type the path to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to send your
scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (see example).
14. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or
from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you
select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
15. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
16. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If
you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
17. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary
to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
18. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.
19. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this
feature to remove the background colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
20. You can change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default for this setting is port
22. In most cases this setting does not need to be changed.
21. Click Submit.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Related Information
•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
99
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP
(SFTP) > Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Client Key Pair in the left navigation bar.
7. Click Create New Client Key Pair.
8. In the Client Key Pair Name field, type the name (up to 20 characters) you want.
9. Click the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list, and then select the algorithm you want.
10. Click Submit.
The client key pair is created and saved in your machine's memory. The client key pair name and public key
algorithm will be displayed in the Client Key Pair List.
Related Information
•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
100
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) > Export
a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Client Key Pair in the left navigation bar.
7. Click Export Public Key shown with Client Key Pair List.
8. Click Submit.
9. Specify the location where you want to save the file.
The client key pair is exported to your computer.
Related Information
•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
101
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) > Import
a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Server Public Key in the left navigation bar.
7. Click Import Server Public Key.
8. Specify the file that you want to import.
9. Click Submit.
The server public key is imported to your machine.
Related Information
•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
102
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP
(SFTP) > Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP] .
3. The server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Select the profile you want. If
the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality
or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)
103
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network (Windows®)
Scan to Network (Windows®)
Scan documents directly to a CIFS server on your local network. For added convenience, you can configure
different profiles to save your favourite Scan to Network destinations.
•Set up a Scan to Network Profile
•Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
104
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network
(Windows®) > Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to a folder on a CIFS server.
We recommend Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 for Windows® and Safari 9 for Mac. Make sure that JavaScript
and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.
4. Select the Network option, and then click Submit.
105
5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
7. To send the data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, in the Send to My Folder field, select On.
8. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The
machine will display this name on the LCD.
9. In the Network Folder Path field, type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to send your
scanned data.
10. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or
from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you
select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
106
11. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
12. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If
you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
13. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary
to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
14. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.
15. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this
feature to remove the background colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
16. To PIN-protect this profile, in the Use PIN for Authentication field, select On.
17. If you selected On for the Use PIN for Authentication field, type a four-digit PIN in the PIN Code field.
18. To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2 from the Auth. Method menu.
19. In the Username field, type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the folder
specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one
of the following styles:
user@domain
domain\user
20. In the Password field, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in
the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
21. To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, in the Kerberos Server Address field, type the Kerberos
Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
22. Click Submit.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
23. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone
correctly on the control panel for all authentication methods. The time must match the time used by the
Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
Related Information
•Scan to Network (Windows®)
•Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
107
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network
(Windows®) > Set up a Scan to Network Profile > Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Make sure the date and time and the time zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the
control panel, so the machine's time matches the time being used by the server providing authentication.
Ignore step 1, if you already have a Web Based Management window open.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Administrator tab.
3. Click the Date&Time menu in the left navigation bar.
4. In the Date fields, enter the date.
5. Select the clock type from the Clock Type field (available only for some countries).
6. In the Time fields, enter the time.
7. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list, for example,
the time zone for Eastern time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
8. In the Auto Daylight field, click On to set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time. It
will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn (available only for some
countries).
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Set up a Scan to Network Profile
108
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network
(Windows®) > Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to Network] .
• If you registered your user ID, the [to My Folder] option appears when you log on to the machine
using Active Directory® Authentication or LDAP Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, press [to My Folder].
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, click the Scan tab, and then click the Scan to FTP/
SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar. In the Send to My Folder field, select On.
3. The server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Select the profile you want. If
the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality
or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan to Network (Windows®)
109
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SharePoint®
Scan to SharePoint®
Scan documents directly to a SharePoint® server when you need to share the scanned information. For added
convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SharePoint® destinations.
•Set up a Scan to SharePoint® Profile
•Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint® Server
110
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SharePoint® > Set up a
Scan to SharePoint® Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint® Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint® Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to a SharePoint® location.
We recommend Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 for Windows® and Safari 9 for Mac. Make sure that
JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.
4. Select the SharePoint option, and then click Submit.
111
5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The
machine will display this name on the LCD.
8. In the SharePoint Site Address field, Copy and Paste the full destination address shown in the address bar
of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or
the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
9. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or
from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you
select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
112
10. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
11. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If
you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
12. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary
to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
13. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.
14. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this
feature to remove the background colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
15. To PIN-protect this profile, in the Use PIN for Authentication field, select On.
16. If you selected On for the Use PIN for Authentication field, type a four-digit PIN in the PIN Code field.
17. To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or Basic from the Auth. Method menu.
If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected automatically.
18. In the Username field, type the user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the
folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user
name in one of the following styles:
user@domain
domain\user
19. In the Password field, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in
the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
20. To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, in the Kerberos Server Address field, type the Kerberos
Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
21. Click Submit.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Related Information
•Scan to SharePoint®
113
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SharePoint® > Upload
Scanned Data to a SharePoint® Server
Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint® Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to SharePoint].
3. The server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Select the profile you want. If
the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality
or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•Scan to SharePoint®
114
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on
Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8
and Windows® 10)
The Web Services protocol enables Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10 users to scan using a Brother
machine on the network. You must install the driver via Web Services.
•Use Web Services to Install Drivers Used for Scanning (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and
Windows® 10)
•Scan Using Web Services from the Brother Machine (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and
Windows® 10)
•Configure Scan Settings for Web Services
115
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on
Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10) > Use Web Services to Install Drivers Used for
Scanning (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
Use Web Services to Install Drivers Used for Scanning (Windows® 7,
Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
Use Web Services to monitor printers on the network.
• Make sure you have installed the Brother software and drivers.
• Verify that the host computer and the Brother machine are on the same subnet, or that the router is
correctly configured to pass data between the two devices.
• You must configure the IP address on your Brother machine before you configure this setting.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > Control Panel > Network and Internet > View network computers and devices.
The machine's Web Services Name appears with the printer icon.
Right-click the machine you want to install.
• Windows® 8
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings >
Change PC settings > Devices > Add a device.
The machine's Web Services Name appears.
• Windows® 8.1
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings >
Change PC settings > PC and devices > Devices > Add a device.
The machine's Web Services Name appears.
• Windows® 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• The Web Services Name for the Brother machine is your model name and the MAC Address (Ethernet
Address) of your machine (for example, Brother MFC-XXXX (model name) [XXXXXXXXXXXX] (MAC
Address / Ethernet Address)).
• Windows® 8/Windows® 10
Move your mouse over the machine name to display the machine's information.
2. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click Install in the displayed menu.
• Windows® 8/Windows® 10
Select the machine you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
To uninstall drivers, click Uninstall or (Remove device).
Related Information
•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
116
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on
Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10) > Scan Using Web Services from the Brother
Machine (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
Scan Using Web Services from the Brother Machine (Windows® 7,
Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
If you have installed the driver for scanning via Web Services, you can access the Web Services scanning menu
on your Brother machine's LCD.
Certain characters in the messages displayed on the LCD may be replaced with spaces if the language
settings of your OS and your Brother machine are different.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [WS Scan].
3. Select the type of scan.
4. Select the computer name you want to send data.
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning.
If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows® Fax and Scan or Windows® Photo
Gallery from the list.
Related Information
•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
117
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on
Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10) > Configure Scan Settings for Web Services
Configure Scan Settings for Web Services
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > Devices and Printers.
• Windows® 8
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers.
• Windows® 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers.
2. Right-click the machine icon, and then select Scan profiles.... The Scan Profiles dialog box appears.
3. Select the scan profile you want to use.
4. Make sure the scanner selected in the Scanner list is a Brother machine that supports Web Services for
scanning, and then click the Set as Default button.
5. Click Edit....
The Edit Default Profile dialog box appears.
6. Select the Source, Paper size, Color format, File type, Resolution (DPI), Brightness and Contrast
settings.
7. Click the Save Profile button.
These settings will be applied when you scan using the Web Services protocol.
If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows® Fax and Scan or Windows® Photo
Gallery from the list.
Related Information
•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows® 7, Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
118
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Change Scan Button Settings from
ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
3. Click the Device Scan Settings button.
The Device Scan Settings dialog box appears.
4. Click the tab for the Scan to action you want to change (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File).
5. Change the settings as needed.
6. Click OK.
119
Each tab represents one of the scanning destinations, as outlined in the table below.
Change your Scan to settings by clicking on the corresponding tab and customising the setting you want.
Tab Name Corresponding Feature
Image Scan to Image
OCR Scan to OCR
E-mail Scan to Email
File Scan to File
Settings Applicable Features
Image OCR E-mail File
File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Target Application Yes Yes - -
OCR Language - Yes - -
File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes
Destination Folder or Scan Location Yes Yes Yes Yes
Show Save As Window - - - Yes
Show Folder - - - Yes
File Size Priority Yes - Yes Yes
Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes
Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes
Brightness Yes Yes Yes Yes
Contrast Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes
Advanced Settings Yes Yes Yes Yes
Default Yes Yes Yes Yes
File Type
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.
Target Application
Select the destination application from the drop-down list.
OCR Language
Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.
File Name
Click Change to change the file name's prefix.
Destination Folder
Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.
Scan Location
Select the Folder or SharePoint radio button to specify the destination where you want to save your scanned
documents.
Show Save As Window
Select this option to specify the scanned image's destination every time you scan.
120
Show Folder
Select this option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.
File Size Priority
Adjust the data compression ratio of the scanned image. Change the file size by moving the File Size Priority
slider to the right or left.
Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
•Auto
Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate colour depth for the
document.
•Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
•Grey (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey appearance.)
•True Grey
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
•24bit Colour
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size drop-down list.
• If you select the 1 to 2 (A4) option, the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.
Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark,
set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value into the field to set the
Brightness level.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value
into the field to set the Contrast level.
ID Card Scan
Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
•Remove Background Colour
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
•Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
•Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
121
•Display Scanning Results
Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.
•ADF Auto Deskew
When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document
automatically.
Default
Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Scan Photos and Graphics
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
•Scan to Email Attachment
122
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Change Scan Button Settings from
ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)
1. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
2. Hold the control key on your keyboard and click the scan destination (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) whose
settings you want to change.
3. Click the Device Button tab.
The settings for the scan destination that you selected appear.
The following example shows the Scan to Image settings.
123
Each tab corresponds to a scan feature, as described below.
These settings can be changed.
Button Name Corresponding Feature
Image Scan to Image
OCR Scan to OCR
E-mail Scan to Email
File Scan to File
Settings Applicable Features
Image OCR E-mail File
Target Application/E-mail Application Yes Yes Yes -
File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
File size Yes - Yes Yes
OCR Language - Yes - -
Destination File Path Yes Yes Yes -
File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes
Insert Date in File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes
Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes Yes
Show Folder - - - Yes
Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes
Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes
Advanced Settings Yes Yes Yes Yes
Restore Defaults Yes Yes Yes Yes
Target Application/E-mail Application
Select which application is used to open scanned data. Only applications installed on your computer can be
selected.
•Add
Add an application to the pop-up menu.
Type the application name in the Application Name field (up to 30 characters) and select your
preferred application by clicking the Browse button. Select the File Type option from the pop-up menu.
•Delete
Delete an application you have added to the pop-up menu.
Select the application from the Application Name pop-up menu, and then click Delete.
File Type
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.
File size
Change the file size by moving the File size slider to the right or left.
OCR Language
Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.
Destination File Path
Click the Change button to change the prefix of the file name and the path of the destination folder.
124
File Name
Type a prefix for your file name, if needed.
Insert Date in File Name
Automatically insert the date in the file name of the scanned image.
Destination Folder
Click Browse to select the folder where you would like to save your scanned document.
Show Folder
Select the Show Folder option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.
Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution pop-up menu. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
•Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
•Gray (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey appearance.)
•True Gray
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
•24bit Color
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
•Auto
Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate colour depth for the
document.
Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size pop-up menu.
• If you select the 1 to 2 (A4) option, the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.
ID Card Scan
Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
•Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is
too dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again.
•Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasise
dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas.
•ADF Auto Deskew
When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document
automatically.
•Remove Background Color
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more recognisable. When you use
this function, select from three settings: high, medium, and low.
125
(Available only for the Auto, True Gray and 24bit Color options)
•Skip Blank Page
Remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.
•Display Scanning Results
Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.
•Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
Restore Defaults
Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
•Scan Photos and Graphics
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
•Scan to Email Attachment
126
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Configure Certificate for Signed
PDF
Configure Certificate for Signed PDF
If you select Signed PDF for Scan to USB, Scan to Email server, Scan to FTP, Scan to SFTP, Scan to Network or
Scan to SharePoint® features, you must configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management.
To use Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine and your computer.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Administrator tab.
3. Click the Signed PDF menu in the left navigation bar.
The Signed PDF configuration dialog box appears.
4. Click the Select the Certificate drop-down list, and then select the certificate.
5. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
127
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Disable Scanning from Your
Computer
Disable Scanning from Your Computer
You can disable the ability to scan from your computer. Set the pull scan setting using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan from PC menu in the left navigation bar.
4. In the Pull Scan field, click Disabled.
5. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine
128
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®)
Scan from Your Computer (Windows®)
There are several ways you can use your computer to scan photos and documents on your Brother machine.
Use the software applications provided by Brother, or use your favourite scanning application.
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows® Applications
•Scan Using Windows® Photo Gallery or Windows® Fax and Scan
129
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®)
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Use ControlCenter4 Home Mode to access your machine's main features.
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
130
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Select the Document Type.
5. Change the document's Scan Size, if needed.
6. Click (Scan).
The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.
7. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.
8. Crop the scanned image, if needed.
9. Do one of the following:
• Click (Save) to save scanned data.
• Click (Print) to print scanned data.
• Click (Open with an Application) to open scanned data in another application.
• Click (Send E-mail) to attach scanned data to an email.
• Click (OCR) to convert your scanned document to an editable text file. (available only for certain
models)
131
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Select Document Type Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Change Scan Size Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Crop a Scanned Image Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Print Scanned Data Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Scan to an Application Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
132
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Select Document Type Using
ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Select Document Type Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
• Select the Document Type option that matches the type of original you want to scan.
Option Description
Photo 600 x 600 dpi 24bit Colour
Text and Graph 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Colour
Monochrome Text 200 x 200 dpi Black & White
Custom 300 x 300 dpi (24bit Colour as default) Select the scan settings you want from the
Custom Settings button.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Custom Scan Settings (Windows®)
133
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Select Document Type Using
ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Custom Scan Settings (Windows®)
Custom Scan Settings (Windows®)
Select Custom in the Document Type list to change advanced scan settings.
• Select Custom, and then click the Custom Settings button.
The Custom Scan Settings dialog box appears.
You can change the following settings:
Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory
and transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
-Auto
Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate colour depth for the
document.
-Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
-Grey (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey
appearance.)
-True Grey
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
-24bit Colour
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8
million colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
134
Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too
dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value into the field to
set the Brightness level.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises
dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a
value into the field to set the Contrast level.
Continuous Scanning
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select either continue scanning or
finish.
2-sided Scanning
Select this check box to scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan
feature, you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the layout
of your original, to make sure the data file you create appears correctly.
(MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
ID Card Scan
Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
-Remove Bleed-through / Pattern
•Remove Background Colour
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
-Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
-Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
-Display Scanning Results
Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.
-ADF Auto Deskew
When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document
automatically.
Related Information
•Select Document Type Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
135
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Change Scan Size Using
ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Change Scan Size Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
For faster scan speeds, select the exact size of your document from the Scan Size drop-down menu.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
136
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Crop a Scanned Image Using
ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Crop a Scanned Image Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
The crop tool on the Image Editing Toolbar lets you trim unwanted areas from your scanned image. Use the
Zoom In and Zoom Out tools to help view the image to be cropped.
Image Editing Toolbar
1. Restart
Cancels all the edits applied to the selected image. The edited image returns to its original state.
2. Fit to Window
Displays the scanned image so that the entire image fits in the window.
3. Zoom In
Zooms in on the scanned image.
4. Zoom Out
Zooms out of the scanned image.
5. Crop and Edit
Removes the outer parts of the image. Click the Crop and Edit button, and then change the frame to contain
the area you want to keep after cropping.
6. Page Counter
Indicates the page number of the scanned page currently shown in the image viewer. To display a different
page, select the desired page number from the drop-down page number list.
If you have scanned multiple pages, you can see the next or previous scanned page by clicking the left or
right arrow buttons in the preview window.
1. Scan a document.
2. Click (Crop and Edit) to edit the scanned image.
The Crop and Edit - ControlCenter4 window appears.
137
a. Expands the scanned image so that the entire image fits in the window.
b. Zooms in on the image.
c. Zooms out of the image.
d. Rotates the image counter-clockwise 90 degrees.
e. Rotates the image clockwise 90 degrees.
f. Click and drag the frame to adjust the area to be cropped.
3. Click OK.
The edited image appears in the image viewer.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
138
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Print Scanned Data Using
ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Print Scanned Data Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Scan a document on your Brother machine, and then print copies using the printer driver features that are
available in ControlCenter4.
1. Scan a document.
2. Click Print.
a
c
b
a. Shows which images are currently selected.
b. Click the Properties button to change specific printer settings.
c. Select the Paper Size, Media Type and Layout options. The current settings are enclosed in a blue
square.
3. Configure the print settings, and then click the Start Printing button.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
139
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®) > Scan to an Application Using
ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Scan to an Application Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
The Open with an Application button lets you scan an image directly into your graphics application for editing.
Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Select the Document Type.
5. Change the size of your document, if needed.
6. Click (Scan).
The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.
7. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.
8. Crop the scanned image, if needed.
9. Click the Open with an Application button.
10. Select the application from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The image opens in the application you have selected.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
140
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4
Home Mode (Windows®)
Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Select the Document Type.
5. Change the size of your document, if needed.
6. Click (Scan).
The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.
7. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.
8. Click Save.
The Save dialog box appears.
9. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select a PDF file.
141
To save the document as a password-protected PDF, select Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) or Secure
PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) from the File Type drop-down list, click , and then type the password.
10. To change the file name, click the Change button, if needed.
11. Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.
12. Click OK.
The scanned document is saved to the destination folder as a PDF.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
142
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4
Home Mode (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load documents in the ADF.
To scan both sides of a document automatically, you must use the ADF, not the flatbed scanner glass.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Under Document Type, select Custom, and then click the Custom Settings button.
The Custom Scan Settings dialog box appears.
5. Select the 2-sided Scanning check box.
6. Select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the Original layout.
7. Configure other Custom Scan Settings, if needed.
8. Click OK.
9. Click (Scan).
The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.
10. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.
11. Do one of the following:
143
• Click (Save) to save scanned data.
• Click (Print) to print scanned data.
• Click (Open with an Application) to open scanned data in another application.
• Click (Send E-mail) to attach scanned data to an email.
• Click (OCR) to convert your scanned document to an editable text file. (available only for certain
models)
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
144
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Settings Applicable Features
Open with an Application OCR Send E-mail Save
File Type - Yes Yes Yes
Target Application Yes Yes - -
OCR Language - Yes - -
File Name - - - Yes
Scan Location - - - Yes
Show Folder - - - Yes
File Size Priority - - Yes Yes
File Type
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.
For Send E-mail and Save
•Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
•JPEG (*.jpg) (recommended for most users when scanning pictures)
•TIFF Single-Page (*.tif)
•TIFF Multi-Page (*.tif)
•Portable Network Graphics (*.png)
•PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•PDF/A Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•PDF/A Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•High Compression PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•High Compression PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
•Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•Secure PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
•XML Paper Specification (*.xps) (the XML Paper Specification is available for Windows® 7, Windows® 8
and Windows® 10, and when using applications that support XML Paper Specification files)
•Microsoft Office Word (*.docx) (Available only for certain models)
•Microsoft Office PowerPoint (*.pptx) (Available only for certain models)
•Microsoft Office Excel (*.xlsx)(Available only for certain models)
For OCR
•HTML 3.2 (*.htm)
•HTML 4.0 (*.htm)
•Microsoft Excel 2003, XP (*.xls)
•RTF Word 2000 (*.rtf)
•WordPad (*.rtf)
•WordPerfect 9, 10 (*.wpd)
•Text (*.txt)
•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
145
•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
Target Application
Select the destination application from the drop-down list.
OCR Language
Set the optical character recognition (OCR) language to match the language of the scanned document's text.
File Name
Click Change to change the file name's prefix.
Scan Location
Select the Folder or SharePoint radio button to specify the destination where you want to save your scanned
documents.
Show Folder
Select this option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.
File Size Priority
Adjust the data compression ratio of the scanned image. Change the file size by moving the File Size Priority
slider to the right or left.
Custom Settings
Select the Custom option, click the Custom Settings button, and then change settings.
Scan Size
Select the exact size of your document from the Scan Size drop-down menu.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
146
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode gives you more control over the details of your machine's features and allows
you to customise one-button scan actions.
•Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
147
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.
Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Click the Image button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
148
5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination folder, resolution and colour, if needed.
• To change the file name, click Change.
• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.
• To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.
6. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning. The image opens in the application you have selected.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
149
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4
Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.
Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
150
4. Click the File button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
5. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select a PDF file.
To save the document as a password-protected PDF, select Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) or Secure
PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) from the File Type drop-down list, click , and then type the password.
6. Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.
7. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, resolution and colour, if needed.
To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.
8. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning. The file is saved in the folder you selected.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
151
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4
Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load documents in the ADF.
To scan both sides of a document automatically, you must use the ADF, not the flatbed scanner glass.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Click the button for the setting you want to change (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File).
The scan settings dialog box appears.
5. Select the 2-sided Scanning check box.
6. Select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the Original layout.
7. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination folder, resolution and colour, if needed.
• To change the file name, click Change.
• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.
8. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning.
You have now changed the default settings for your selected Scan to action. These settings will be used the next
time one of the scan options (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) is selected for this action.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
152
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Place an ID card on the scanner glass.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
153
4. Click the File button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
5. Select the ID Card Scan check box.
The instruction dialog box appears.
6. Read the instructions on the screen, and then click OK.
7. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, scan location, resolution and colour, if needed.
8. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning one side of the identification card.
9. After the machine has scanned one side, turn over the identification card, and then click Continue to scan
the other side.
10. Click Finish.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
154
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Send a scanned document as an email attachment.
• Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
• The Scan to Email feature does not support Webmail services. Use the Scan to Image or Scan to File
feature to scan a document or a picture, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.
The machine scans to your default email client.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Click the E-mail button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
155
5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination folder, resolution and colour, if needed.
• To change the file name, click Change.
• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.
• To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.
6. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning. Your default email application opens and the scanned image is attached to a
new, blank email message.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
156
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced
Mode (Windows®)
Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using optical character recognition (OCR)
technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.
• Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Load your document.
2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
3. Click the Scan tab.
4. Click the OCR button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
157
5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination folder, resolution and colour, if needed.
• To change the file name, click Change.
• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.
• To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.
6. Click Scan.
The machine scans the document, converts it to editable text, and then sends it to your default word
processing application.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
158
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®) > Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Settings Applicable Features
Image OCR E-mail File
File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Target Application Yes Yes - -
OCR Language - Yes - -
File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes
Scan Location or Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes Yes
Show Folder - - - Yes
Show Save As Window - - - Yes
File Size Priority Yes - Yes Yes
PreScan Yes Yes Yes Yes
Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes
Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes
Brightness Yes Yes Yes Yes
Contrast Yes Yes Yes Yes
Continuous Scanning Yes Yes Yes Yes
2-sided Scanning Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes
Advanced Settings Yes Yes Yes Yes
Default Yes Yes Yes Yes
File Type
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.
For Image, Email and File
•Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
•JPEG (*.jpg) (recommended for most users when scanning pictures)
•TIFF Single-Page (*.tif)
•TIFF Multi-Page (*.tif)
•Portable Network Graphics (*.png)
•PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•PDF/A Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•PDF/A Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)
•High Compression PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•High Compression PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
•Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•Secure PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
159
•XML Paper Specification (*.xps) (the XML Paper Specification is available for Windows® 7, Windows® 8
and Windows® 10, and when using applications that support XML Paper Specification files)
For Email and File
•Microsoft Office Word (*.docx) (Available only for certain models)
•Microsoft Office PowerPoint (*.pptx) (Available only for certain models)
•Microsoft Office Excel (*.xlsx)(Available only for certain models)
For OCR
•HTML 3.2 (*.htm)
•HTML 4.0 (*.htm)
•Microsoft Excel 2003, XP (*.xls)
•RTF Word 2000 (*.rtf)
•WordPad (*.rtf)
•WordPerfect 9, 10 (*.wpd)
•Text (*.txt)
•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)
•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)
Target Application
Select the destination application from the drop-down list.
OCR Language
Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.
File Name
Click Change to change the file name's prefix.
Scan Location
Select the Folder or SharePoint radio button to specify the destination where you want to save your scanned
documents.
Destination Folder
Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.
Show Folder
Select this option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.
Show Save As Window
Select this option to specify the scanned image's destination every time you scan.
File Size Priority
Adjust the data compression ratio of the scanned image. Change the file size by moving the File Size Priority
slider to the right or left.
PreScan
Select PreScan to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.
Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
•Auto
Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate colour depth for the
document.
160
•Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
•Grey (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey appearance.)
•True Grey
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
•24bit Colour
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size drop-down list.
• If you select the 1 to 2 (A4) option, the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.
Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark,
set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value into the field to set the
Brightness level.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value
into the field to set the Contrast level.
Continuous Scanning
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select either continue scanning or finish.
2-sided Scanning
Select this check box to scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature,
you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the layout of your
original, to make sure the data file you create appears correctly.
(MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
ID Card Scan
Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
•Remove Bleed-through / Pattern
-Remove Background Colour
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
•Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
•Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
•Display Scanning Results
Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.
•ADF Auto Deskew
When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document
automatically.
161
Default
Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
162
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other
Windows® Applications
Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows®
Applications
You can use the Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE application for scanning.
• To download the Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE application, click (Brother Utilities), select Do More in
the left navigation bar, and then click PaperPort.
• Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE supports Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1 and Windows® 10.
• For detailed instructions on using each application, click the application's Help menu, and then click
Getting Started Guide in the Help ribbon.
The instructions for scanning in these steps are for PaperPort™ 14SE. For other Windows® applications,
the steps will be similar. PaperPort™ 14SE supports both TWAIN and WIA drivers; the TWAIN driver
(recommended) is used in these steps.
1. Load your document.
2. Start PaperPort™ 14SE.
Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Using your computer, click (Start) > All Programs > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.
• Windows® 8
Click (PaperPort).
• Windows® 10
Click Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.
3. Click the Desktop menu, and then click Scan Settings in the Desktop ribbon.
The Scan or Get Photo panel appears on the left side of the screen.
4. From the available Scanners list, select TWAIN: TW-Brother XXX-XXXX or TWAIN: TW-Brother XXX-XXXX
LAN (where MFC-XXXX is the model name of your machine). To use the WIA driver, select the Brother driver
that has "WIA" as the prefix.
5. Select the Display scanner dialog box check box in the Scan or Get Photo panel.
6. Click Scan.
The Scanner Setup dialog box appears.
163
7. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.
8. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size.
To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.
You cannot use PreScan to preview an image.
9. Click PreScan if you want to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.
10. Click Start.
The machine starts scanning.
Related Information
•Scan from Your Computer (Windows®)
•TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows®)
164
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other
Windows® Applications > TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows®)
TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows®)
• Note that the item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.
• The Contrast option is available only when selecting the Grey (Error Diffusion), True Grey, or 24bit
Colour options from the Scan Type settings.
1. Scan
Select the Photo, Web, or Text option depending on the type of document you want to scan.
Scan (Image Type) Resolution Scan Type
Photo Use for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Colour
Web Use for attaching the scanned
image to web pages.
100 x 100 dpi 24bit Colour
Text Use for scanning text
documents.
200 x 200 dpi Black & White
2. Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
3. Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
•Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
•Grey (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey
appearance.)
•True Grey
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
•24bit Colour
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
165
4. Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.
If you select Custom, the Custom Document Size dialog box appears and you can specify the document
size.
5. Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too
dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set
the brightness level.
6. Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value
in the field to set the contrast level.
7. 2-sided Scanning
Scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature, you must select the
Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option from the 2-sided Scanning drop-down list, so when you
turn the pages, they are facing the way you want.
(MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
8. Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
•Paper
-Auto Deskew
Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned from the ADF.
-Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
•Enhancement
-Background Processing
•Remove Bleed-through / Pattern
Prevent bleed-through.
•Remove Background Colour
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
-Colour Drop
Select a colour to remove from the scanned image.
-Boldface Formatting
166
Emphasise the characters of the original by making them bold.
-Blurred Character Correction
Correct the broken or incomplete characters of the original to make them easier to read.
-Edge Emphasis
Make the characters of the original sharper.
-Reduce Noise
Improve and enhance the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise
option is available when selecting the 24bit Colour option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or
600 x 600 dpi scan resolution.
•Paper Handling
-Edge Fill
Fill in the edges on four sides of the scanned image using the selected colour and range.
-Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
-Continuous scan
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select either continue scanning or
finish.
Related Information
•Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows® Applications
167
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using Windows® Photo Gallery or
Windows® Fax and Scan
Scan Using Windows® Photo Gallery or Windows® Fax and Scan
Windows® Photo Gallery or Windows® Fax and Scan applications are other options that you can use for
scanning.
• These applications use the WIA scanner driver.
• If you want to crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning the document, you must scan using the scanner
glass (also called the flatbed).
1. Load your document.
2. Launch your scanning application. Do one of the following:
• (Windows® Photo Gallery)
Click File > Import from Camera or Scanner.
• (Windows® Fax and Scan)
Click File > New > Scan.
3. Select the scanner you want to use.
4. Click Import or OK.
The New Scan dialog box appears.
5. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.
The scanner resolution can be set to a maximum of 1200 dpi. If you want to scan at higher resolutions, use
the Scanner Utility software of Brother Utilities.
If your machine supports 2-sided Scan and you want to scan both sides of your document, select Feeder
(Scan both sides) as Source.
6. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning the document.
Related Information
•Scan from Your Computer (Windows®)
•WIA Driver Settings (Windows®)
168
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows®) > Scan Using Windows® Photo Gallery or
Windows® Fax and Scan > WIA Driver Settings (Windows®)
WIA Driver Settings (Windows®)
Paper source
Select the Document Feeder or Flatbed option from the drop-down list.
Picture Type (Image Type)
Select Color picture, Grayscale picture, Black and white picture or text, or Custom Settings for the type
of document you want to scan.
To change advanced settings, click the Adjust the quality of the scanned picture link.
Page size
The Page size option is available if you select the Document Feeder as the Paper source option.
Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark,
set a higher brightness level and scan the document again.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value in
the field to set the contrast level.
Resolution (DPI)
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution (DPI) list. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
169
Related Information
•Scan Using Windows® Photo Gallery or Windows® Fax and Scan
170
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
There are several ways you can use your Mac to scan photos and documents on your Brother machine. Use the
software applications provided by Brother or your favourite scanning application.
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)
•TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac)
171
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Use Brother's ControlCenter software to scan photos and save them as JPEGs, PDFs, or other file formats.
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Settings for ControlCenter2 (Mac)
172
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Using
ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.
1. Load your document.
2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
3. Click the SCAN tab.
4. Click the Image button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
173
5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and colour, if
needed.
To change the file name or destination file path, click Change.
6. Click the Start Scanning button.
The machine starts scanning. The scanned image opens in the application you have selected.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
174
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Save Scanned
Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2
(Mac)
1. Load your document.
2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
3. Click the SCAN tab.
4. Click the File button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
175
5. Click the File Type pop-up menu, and then select a PDF file.
To save the document as a password-protected PDF, select Secure PDF (*.pdf) from the File Type pop-up
menu, type your password in the Password and Re-type Password fields, and then click OK.
6. Change the scan settings, such as file name, destination folder, resolution and colour, if needed.
7. Click the Start Scanning button.
The machine starts scanning. The file will be saved in the folder you selected.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
176
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Both Sides of
a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2
(Mac)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Load documents in the ADF.
To scan both sides of a document automatically, you must use the ADF, not the flatbed scanner glass.
2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
3. Click the SCAN tab.
4. Click the scan type button (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) you want to use.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
5. Select the 2-sided Scanning check box.
6. Select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the Original layout.
7. Configure other settings, if needed.
8. Click the Start Scanning button.
The machine starts scanning.
You have now changed the default settings for your selected Scan to action. These settings will be used the next
time this scan type (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) is clicked for this action.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
177
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Both Sides of
an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
1. Place an ID card on the scanner glass.
2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
3. Click the SCAN tab.
4. Click the File button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
178
5. Select the ID Card Scan check box.
The instruction dialog box appears.
6. Read the instructions on the screen, and then click OK.
7. Configure other settings, if needed.
8. Click the Start Scanning button.
The machine starts scanning one side of the identification card.
9. After the machine has scanned one side, turn over the identification card, and then click Continue to scan
the other side.
10. Click Finish.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
179
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan to Email
Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Send a scanned document as an email attachment.
The Scan to Email feature does not support Webmail services. Use the Scan to Image or Scan to File feature
to scan a document or a picture, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.
1. Load your document.
2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
3. Click the SCAN tab.
4. Click the E-mail button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
180
5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and colour, if
needed.
To change the file name or destination file path, click Change.
6. Click the Start Scanning button.
The machine starts scanning. Your default email application opens and the scanned image is attached to a
new, blank email.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
181
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan to an Editable
Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using optical character recognition (OCR)
technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.
•The Scan to OCR feature is available for certain languages.
1. Load your document.
2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
3. Click the SCAN tab.
4. Click the OCR button.
The scan settings dialog box appears.
182
5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and colour, if
needed.
To change the file name or destination file path, click Change.
6. Click the Start Scanning button.
The machine scans the document, converts it to editable text, and then sends it to your default word
processing application.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
183
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Settings for
ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan Settings for ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Settings Applicable Features
Image OCR E-mail File
Target Application/E-mail Application Yes Yes Yes -
File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
File size Yes - Yes Yes
OCR Language - Yes - -
Destination File Path Yes Yes Yes -
File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes
Insert Date in File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes
Show Save As window - - - Yes
Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes Yes
Show Folder - - - Yes
Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes
Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes
Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes
Continuous Scanning Yes Yes Yes Yes
2-sided Scanning Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes
Show Scanner Interface Yes Yes Yes Yes
Advanced Settings Yes Yes Yes Yes
Restore Defaults Yes Yes Yes Yes
Target Application/E-mail Application
Select which application is used to open scanned data. Only applications installed on your computer can be
selected.
•Add
Add an application to the pop-up menu.
Type the application name in the Application Name field (up to 30 characters) and select your
preferred application by clicking the Browse button. Select the File Type option from the pop-up menu.
•Delete
Delete an application you have added to the pop-up menu.
Select the application from the Application Name pop-up menu, and then click Delete.
File Type
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.
File size
Change the file size by moving the File size slider to the right or left.
OCR Language
Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.
Destination File Path
Click the Change button to change the prefix of the file name and the path of the destination folder.
184
File Name
Type a prefix for your file name, if needed.
Insert Date in File Name
Automatically insert the date in the file name of the scanned image.
Show Save As window
Select this option to specify the scanned image's destination every time you scan.
Destination Folder
Click Browse to select the folder where you would like to save your scanned document.
Show Folder
Select the Show Folder option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.
Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution pop-up menu. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
•Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
•Gray (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey appearance.)
•True Gray
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
•24bit Color
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
•Auto
Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate colour depth for the
document.
Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size pop-up menu.
• If you select the 1 to 2 (A4) option, the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.
Continuous Scanning
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select either continue scanning or finish.
2-sided Scanning
Select this check box to scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature,
you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the layout of your
original, to make sure the created data file appears correctly.
(MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
ID Card Scan
Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Show Scanner Interface
Select this check box to crop a portion of a scanned page after pre-scanning the document.
Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
185
•Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is
too dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again.
•Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasise
dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas.
•Remove Background Color
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more recognisable. When you use
this function, select from three settings: high, medium, and low.
(Available only for the Auto, True Gray and 24bit Color options)
•Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
•ADF Auto Deskew
When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document
automatically.
•Skip Blank Page
Remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.
•Display Scanning Results
Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.
Restore Defaults
Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.
Related Information
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
186
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)
Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant applications. For more information about the scanning procedure, see
the manual for your application.
1. Start your graphics application, and then select the scan operation.
The scanner setup dialog box appears.
2. Change the scan settings, such as Resolution, Scan Type, or Adjust Image, if needed.
3. Click the Document Size pop-up menu, and then select your document size.
4. Click the PreScan option to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.
• After you select a document size, adjust the scanning area by holding down the mouse button and
dragging your mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan.
• To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW):
Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.
You cannot adjust the scanning area.
You cannot use PreScan to preview an image.
5. Click Start.
The machine starts scanning.
Related Information
•Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
187
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac)
TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac)
5
1
2
3
6
4
• Item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.
• The Contrast setting is available only when selecting Gray (Error Diffusion), True Gray, or 24bit
Color from the Scan Type options.
1. Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution pop-up menu. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
2. Scan Type
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
•Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
•Gray (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey
images without using true grey dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a grey
appearance.)
•True Gray
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of grey.
•24bit Color
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
3. Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.
• If you select Custom, you can specify the document size.
188
4. Adjust Image
Click the Adjust Image button to adjust other image qualities.
Brightness
Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the
scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too
dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the box to
set the brightness.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises
dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a
value in the box to set the contrast.
Reduce Noise
Improve and enhance the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise option is
available when selecting the 24bit Color option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi
scan resolutions.
5. 2-sided Scanning
If you select this check box, the machine scans both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-
sided Scan feature, you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on
the layout of your original, to make sure the created data file appears correctly.
(Available only for certain models)
6. Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
Related Information
•Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
189
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
•Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management
•Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management
190
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan File Name Using
Web Based Management
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management
Set up a file name for scanned data using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan File Name menu in the left navigation bar.
4. Select the File Name Style from the drop-down list.
5. If you selected the option to include the date in File Name Style field, select the Date format from the drop-
down list.
6. In the Time fields, select On to include the time information in the file name.
7. In the Counter field, select Continuous or Reset after each job.
When you select Reset after each job, duplication of file names may occur.
8. If you want to create a user-defined file name prefix, type a file name in the user-defined fields of each scan
function.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, or * may cause a sending error.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
191
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan Job Email Report
Using Web Based Management
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management
When you scan a document, the machine will send a scan job email report automatically to the registered email
address.
1. Start your web browser.
Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP
address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2
No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then click .
2. Click the Scan tab.
3. Click the Scan Job e-mail report menu in the left navigation bar.
4. In the Administrator Address field, type the email address.
5. For the scan functions you want, select On to send a scan job email report.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
192
Home > Copy
Copy
•Copy a Document
•Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
•Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
•Sort Copies
•Copy an ID Card
•Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy)
•Copy Options
193
Home > Copy > Copy a Document
Copy a Document
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
2. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
3. Press [Copy].
The LCD displays:
194
4. Change the copy settings, if needed.
• (Number of copies)
Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways:
- Press or on the LCD.
- Press the numbers on the control panel.
•[Options]
Press to change the copy settings for the next copy only.
- When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
- After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as
Shortcut] button.
•[Quick Copy]
Press > to access the preset copy settings.
• Current setting indications
Press the following icons or display area to change these settings for the next copy only.
- [Enlarge/Reduce]
- [Density]
- [Tray Use]
- [2-sided Copy]
5. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start].
To stop copying, press .
Related Information
•Copy
195
Home > Copy > Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Select an enlargement or reduction ratio to resize your copied data.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Enlarge/Reduce].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options, and then press the option you want.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce], press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use.
• If you select [Custom(25-400%)], press (backspace) to erase the displayed percentage, or press
d to move the cursor, and then enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25] to [400].
Press [OK].
• If you selected [100%], go to the next step.
7. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
8. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start].
Related Information
•Copy
196
Home > Copy > Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
The N in 1 copy feature saves paper by copying two or four pages of your document onto one page of the copy.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Page Layout].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want.
Option Description
2in1(Portrait)
2in1(Landscape)
4in1(Portrait)
4in1(Landscape)
2in1(ID)
Use the scanner glass.
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
197
Related Information
•Copy
198
Home > Copy > Sort Copies
Sort Copies
Sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order they are fed, that is: 1, 2, 3, and so on.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Stack/Sort] > [Sort].
5. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
7. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
•Copy
199
Home > Copy > Copy an ID Card
Copy an ID Card
Use the [2 in 1 ID Copy] feature to copy both sides of an identification card onto one page, keeping the
original card size.
• You may copy an identification card only to the extent permitted under applicable laws. For more detailed
information, see the Product Safety Guide.
1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left)
2. Press [Copy].
3. Press [Options] > [Page Layout] > [2in1(ID)].
4. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
5. Enter the number of copies.
6. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start].
The machine scans one side of the identification card.
7. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.
8. Press [Continue] to scan the other side.
Related Information
•Copy
200
Home > Copy > Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy)
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy)
Reduce the amount of paper you use by copying onto both sides of the paper.
• You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start 2-sided copying.
• The layout of your original document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.
• To use the automatic 2-sided copy feature, you must load your document in the ADF.
• When you manually make 2 sided copies from a 2-sided document, use the scanner glass.
• Select A4 sized paper when using the 2‑sided copy option.
Portrait
2–sided to 2–sided
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
Landscape
2–sided to 2–sided
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1. Load your document.
201
NOTE
• For 2-sided scan models: Load your 2-sided document in the ADF. If you use the scanner glass for
your 2-sided document, select the [1-sided⇒2-sided] option.
• For 1-sided scan models: Load your 2-sided document to the scanner glass.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [2-sided Copy].
5. Do one of the following:
• To make 2-sided copies of a 2-sided document, press [2-sided⇒2-sided].
• To make 2-sided copies from a 1-sided document, follow these steps:
a. To change the layout options, press [Layout], and then press [Long Edge Flip] or [Short
Edge Flip].
b. Press [1-sided⇒2-sided].
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• For a 2-sided document, turn the sheet over along the long edge to scan the other side.
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
•Copy
202
Home > Copy > Copy Options
Copy Options
To change the Copy settings, press [Options].
Menu selections Options
Quality Select the copy quality for your type of document.
Enlarge/Reduce 100% -
Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the
next copy.
Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next
copy.
Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction
ratio.
Density Increase the density to make the text darker.
Decrease the density to make the text lighter.
Contrast Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.
Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.
Stack/Sort Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Stack
1
12
2
Sort
2
12
1
Page Layout Make N in 1 or 2 in 1 ID copies.
4 in1
203
Menu selections Options
2-sided Copy Select to copy on both sides of the paper.
1-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
2-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
The available options will vary depending on your model.
2-sided Copy Page Layout
(available for certain settings)
Select long edge binding or short edge binding.
Colour Adjust Change the default setting for colour saturation.
Remove Background Colour Select to remove the background colour of the document when copying.
Tray Use Select a paper tray for the next copy.
Save as Shortcut Add the current settings as a shortcut.
Related Information
•Copy
204
Home > Fax
Fax
•Send a Fax
•Receive a Fax
•Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
•Telephone Services and External Devices
•Fax Reports
•PC-FAX
205
Home > Fax > Send a Fax
Send a Fax
•Send a Fax
•Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
•Send a Fax Manually
•Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
•Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
•Send a Fax in Real Time
•Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
•Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
•Cancel a Fax in Progress
•Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
•Fax Options
206
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax
Send a Fax
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are faxing multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
2. Press [Fax].
3. Enter the fax number.
•Using the dial pad
Press the digits to enter the fax number.
•Using the Address Book
Press [Address Book], and then do one of the following:
- Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
207
- Press [Search], and then enter the name and press [OK]. Press the name you want to dial.
When finished, press [Apply].
•Using the call history
Press [Call History], and then press the [Outgoing Call] option.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the fax number you want, and then press it.
To send a fax, press [Apply].
4. Press [Fax Start].
The machine scans and sends the document.
If you placed the document on the scanner glass, follow the instructions in the table.
Option Description
Yes To scan the next page, press the Yes option, and then place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press OK to scan the page.
No After you have scanned the last page, press the No option.
The machine sends the document.
To stop faxing, press , and then press .
Related Information
•Send a Fax
208
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You must select a 2-sided scanning format before sending a 2-sided fax. Select either Long Edge or Short Edge,
depending on the layout of your document.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [2-sided Fax].
3. Do one of the following:
• If your document is flipped on the Long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option.
• If your document is flipped on the Short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option.
4. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
5. Enter the fax number.
6. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
•Send a Fax
209
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax Manually
Send a Fax Manually
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Manual fax transmission lets you hear the dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
3. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
4. Dial the fax number you want to call.
5. When you hear the fax tone, press [Fax Start].
• If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].
Related Information
•Send a Fax
210
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.
1. Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press the Start key before hanging up.
2. Load your document.
3. Press [Fax Start].
• If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].
4. Replace the handset of an external telephone.
Related Information
•Send a Fax
211
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use the Broadcasting feature to send the same fax to multiple fax numbers at the same time.
• The same broadcast can include Groups, Address Book numbers (One Touch Dial numbers and Speed
Dial numbers in some models) and up to 50 manually dialled numbers.
• Touchscreen LCD models
If you did not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to as many as
350 different numbers.
• Address Book numbers (One Touch Dial numbers and Speed Dial numbers in some models) must be
stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
• Group numbers must also be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
Group numbers include many stored Address Book numbers (One Touch Dial numbers and Speed Dial
numbers in some models) for easier dialling.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Broadcasting].
3. Press [Add Number].
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD.
Press [OK].
If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want
to add to the broadcast. Select the check boxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you
want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name, and then
press the number you want to add.
4. When finished, press [OK].
If your machine displays , press .
5. Press [Fax Start]. After the broadcast is finished, the machine will print a broadcast report to let you know
the results.
• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the
numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able
to use dual access and delayed fax.
• If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press to stop the job. If more than one page has
been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory.
Related Information
•Send a Fax
212
•Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
213
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) > Cancel a
Broadcast in Progress
Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
While broadcasting you can cancel the fax currently being sent or the whole broadcast job.
1. Press .
2. Press .
3. Do one of the following:
• To cancel the entire broadcast, press [Entire Broadcast].
• To cancel the current job, press the name or number being dialled on the LCD.
• To exit without cancelling, press .
Related Information
•Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
214
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax in Real Time
Send a Fax in Real Time
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When sending a fax, the machine scans the document into the memory before sending it. As soon as the
telephone line is free, the machine starts dialling and sending. If you want to send an important document
immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory, turn on [Real Time TX].
• If the memory is full and you are sending a fax from the ADF, the machine sends the document in real time
(even if [Real Time TX] is set to [Off]). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be
sent until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.
• If [Real Time TX] is set to on, the option to scan 2-sided documents is not available.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Real Time TX].
3. Press [On] or [Off].
4. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
5. Enter the fax number.
6. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
•Send a Fax
215
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can store up to 50 faxes in the machine's memory to be sent within the next twenty-four hour period.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax].
3. Press [On].
4. Press [Set Time].
5. Enter the time you want the fax to be sent (in 24-hour format), and then press [OK].
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
6. Press [OK].
If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return the fax sending screen.
7. Enter the fax number.
8. Press [Fax Start].
9. Press .
Related Information
•Send a Fax
216
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can add a cover page to the next fax or every outgoing fax.
• This feature will not work unless you have programmed your Station ID.
• Your cover page includes your Station ID, a comment, and the name stored in the Address Book, One
Touch Dial, or Speed Dial (in some models).
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup].
3. Press [On].
4. Press [Coverpage Note].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.
Press .
6. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Enter the fax number.
8. Press [Fax Start].
The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the
settings as the new default.
Related Information
•Send a Fax
•Compose Your Own Comments
•Use a Printed Cover Page
217
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Compose Your Own Comments
Compose Your Own Comments
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can set up two comments of your own.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Setting] >
[Coverpage Note].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [5.] or [6.] to store your own comment.
3. Enter your own comment using the LCD. Press [OK].
Press to choose numbers, letters or special characters.
If your machine displays , press .
4. Press .
Related Information
•Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
218
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Use a Printed Cover Page
Use a Printed Cover Page
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you want a printed cover page you can write on, print the sample page and attach it to your fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Setting] >
[Print Sample].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
The machine prints the sample cover page.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
219
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Cancel a Fax in Progress
Cancel a Fax in Progress
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press .
2. Press while the machine is dialling or sending a fax.
The LCD will display [Cancel Job?].
3. Press an option in the table to cancel or continue the fax job in progress.
Option Description
Yes The machine cancels sending the fax job.
No The machine exits from the process without cancelling the fax job.
Related Information
•Send a Fax
220
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can cancel a fax job before it is sent, by cancelling the fax job while it is stored and waiting in the memory.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remaining Jobs].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the waiting jobs, and then press the job you want to
cancel.
3. Press [Cancel].
4. Press [Yes] to confirm or press [No] to exit without cancelling.
5. When finished cancelling jobs, press .
Related Information
•Send a Fax
221
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Fax Options
Fax Options
To change fax-sending settings, press the [Options] button.
Option Description
Fax Resolution Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax
Resolution.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-sided scanning models)
Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Contrast Adjust the contrast.
If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast
may improve the fax quality.
Broadcasting Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the
same time.
Delayed Fax Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.
Real Time TX Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve
the scan from its memory.
Coverpage Setup Set the machine to automatically send a cover page that you have
pre-programmed.
Overseas Mode Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.
Glass Scan Size Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the
document.
Set New Default Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut].
Related Information
•Send a Fax
222
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax
Receive a Fax
•Receive Mode Settings
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
•Remote Fax Retrieval
223
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings
Receive Mode Settings
•Receive Modes Overview
•Choose the Correct Receive Mode
•Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
•Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
•Set Fax Detect
•Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
•Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
•Set the Fax Receive Stamp
•Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
224
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive Modes Overview
Receive Modes Overview
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Some receive modes answer automatically (Fax Only Mode and Fax/Tel Mode). You may want to change the
Ring Delay before using these modes.
Fax Only Mode
([Fax Only] in the machine's menu)
Fax Only Mode automatically answers every call as a fax.
Fax/Tel Mode
([Fax/Tel] in the machine's menu)
Fax/Tel Mode helps you manage incoming calls, by recognising whether they are fax or voice calls and
handling them in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the call. The F/T ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring
made by your machine.
Manual Mode
([Manual] in the machine's menu)
Manual Mode turns off all automatic answering operations unless you are using the BT Call Sign feature.
To receive a fax in Manual Mode lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine.
When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press the buttons in the table to receive a fax. Use the Fax
Detect feature to receive faxes when you have lifted a handset on the same line as the machine.
Applicable Models To receive the fax
All MFC models Fax Start and then Receive
External TAD Mode
([External TAD] in the machine's menu)
External TAD Mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls.
Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
225
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You must choose a Receive Mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you have on your
line.
By default, your machine will automatically receive any faxes that are sent to it. The diagram below will help you
select the correct mode.
Do you want to use the telephone feature of your machine (if available), an external
telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the same line as
the machine? No
Fax Only Mode
Yes
Are you using the voice message function of an external telephone answering
device? Yes
External TAD Mode
No
Do you want the machine to answer fax and telephone calls automatically?
Yes
Fax/Tel Mode
No
Manual Mode
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Receive Mode].
• If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings]
menu.
• (U.K. only) If you cannot change the [Receive Mode], make sure the BT Call Sign feature is set to
Off.
2. Press [Fax Only], [Fax/Tel], [External TAD], or [Manual].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
•Telephone and Fax Problems
226
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine
Answers (Ring Delay)
Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When somebody calls your machine, you will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set in
the Ring Delay option.
• The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in the Fax Only and
Fax/Tel Modes.
• If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, choose the maximum
number of rings.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Ring Delay].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the number of rings you want.
If you select [0], the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all (available only for
some countries).
3. Press .
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
•Telephone and Fax Problems
227
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel Mode, if the call is a fax, your machine will automatically receive it.
However, if it is a voice call, the machine will sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) for the time you set in the F/T
Ring Time option. When you hear the F/T ring, it means that a voice caller is on the line.
• The F/T Ring Time feature works when you set Fax/Tel Mode as the Receive Mode.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can
still answer the call on any telephone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [F/T Ring Time].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press how long you want the machine to ring to alert you that you have a voice call.
3. Press .
Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set
time.
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
228
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set Fax Detect
Set Fax Detect
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If Fax Detect is On: The machine receives a fax call automatically, even if you answer the call. When you
see [Receiving] on the LCD or when you hear “chirps” through the handset you are using, just replace
the handset. Your machine will do the rest.
If Fax Detect is Off: If you are at the machine and answer a fax call by lifting the handset, press the
buttons in the following table to receive the fax. If you answered at an extension or external telephone,
press *51.
Applicable Models To receive the fax
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW Fax Start and then Receive
• If this feature is set to [On], but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension
or external telephone handset, press the remote activation code *51.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set
Fax Detect to [Off].
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Detect].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
229
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you enable the auto reduction function, the machine reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on your paper.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the page size of the fax and your Paper Size setting.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Auto Reduction].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
230
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Your machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper when [2-sided] is set to [On].
• Use A4 size paper (60 to 105 g/m2) for this function.
• When 2-sided printing is enabled, incoming faxes are automatically reduced to fit the paper in the paper
tray.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [2-sided].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
231
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can set the machine to print the received date and time at the top centre of each received fax page.
• Make sure you have set the current date and time on the machine.
• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Rx Stamp].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
232
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone
Conversation
Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you are speaking on the telephone connected to your Brother machine and the other party is also speaking on
a telephone connected to his fax machine, at the end of the conversation, the other party can send you a fax
before you both hang up.
Your machine's ADF must be empty.
1. Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press the Start or Send key.
2. When you hear the CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press [Fax Start].
If the machine is in Automatic Redial, wait until it is finished and try again.
3. Press [Receive] to receive a fax.
4. Replace the external handset.
Related Information
•Receive Mode Settings
233
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
Use Memory Receive (Remote Fax) options to direct incoming faxes while you are away from the machine. You
can use only one Memory Receive option at a time.
Memory Receive (Remote Fax) can be set to:
• Fax Forwarding
• Fax Storage
• PC-Fax Receive
• Forward to Cloud
The machine forwards your received faxes to online services.
• Off
•Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
•Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
•Change Memory Receive Options
•Turn Off Memory Receive
•Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
•Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows® only)
234
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to
Another Machine
Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use the Fax Forwarding feature to automatically forward your incoming faxes to another machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax Forward].
3. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the forwarding fax number (up to 20 characters) using the LCD.
Press [OK].
To forward a fax using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want
your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
NOTE
• Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On],
the machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
4. Press .
Related Information
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
235
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Store Incoming Faxes in the
Machine's Memory
Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use the Fax Storage feature to store incoming faxes in the machine's memory. Retrieve your stored fax
messages from your fax machine when you are at another location using the Remote Retrieval commands. Your
machine will print a backup copy of each stored fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Fax Storage] option, and then press [Fax Storage].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
236
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Change Memory Receive
Options
Change Memory Receive Options
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If received faxes are in your machine's memory when you change the Remote Fax operations, the LCD will ask
you one of the following questions:
If received faxes have been printed automatically, the LCD displays [Erase all documents?]
• Do one of the following:
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be erased before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
If unprinted faxes are in the machine's memory, the LCD displays [Print all faxes?]
• Do one of the following:
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be printed before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be printed and the setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to [PC Fax Receive] from another
option ([Fax Forward] or [Fax Storage]).
• Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer if you are on a network, and then press [OK].
The LCD displays:
[Send Fax to PC?]
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be sent to your computer before the setting changes. You
will be asked if you want to turn on Backup Print.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
Related Information
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
237
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Turn Off Memory Receive
Turn Off Memory Receive
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Turn off Memory Receive if you do not want the machine to save or transfer incoming faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Off].
The LCD displays options if there are received faxes still in your machine's memory.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
238
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Print a Fax Stored in the
Machine's Memory
Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you select [Fax Storage], you can still print a fax from the memory when you are at your machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Print Document].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
Related Information
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
•Error and Maintenance Messages
239
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer
Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows® only)
Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer
(Windows® only)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature, automatically store incoming faxes to your machine's memory, and then
send them to your computer. Use your computer to view and store these faxes.
To transfer the received faxes to your computer you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on
your computer.
Even if you have turned off your computer (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive
and store your faxes in its memory.
When you start your computer and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to
your computer automatically.
If you selected [Backup Print: On], the machine will also print the fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [PC Fax Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [OK], and then following the LCD instruction.
• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive, you must install the MFL-Pro Suite software on your computer.
Make sure your computer is connected and turned on.
• PC-Fax Receive is not available for the Mac operating systems.
• If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in the memory, you can use this
setting to transfer your faxes to your computer.
3. Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer you want to receive faxes if you are on a network, and then
press [OK].
4. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off].
5. Press .
Related Information
•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options
240
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval
Remote Fax Retrieval
Use Remote Retrieval to call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine, and use a remote
access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages.
•Set a Remote Access Code
•Use Your Remote Access Code
•Forward Faxes Remotely
•Change the Fax Forwarding Number
241
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Set a Remote Access Code
Set a Remote Access Code
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Set a Remote Access Code to access and control your Brother machine even when you are away from it.
Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you must set up your own code. The factory
default code is the inactive code (---*).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remote Access].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter a three-digit code using the numbers [0] to [9], [*] or [#] using the LCD (the preset '*' cannot be
changed), and then press [OK].
• DO NOT use the same code used for your Remote Activation Code (*51) or Remote Deactivation Code
(#51).
• To make your code inactive, press and hold to restore the inactive setting (---*), and then press
[OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Remote Fax Retrieval
242
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Use Your Remote Access Code
Use Your Remote Access Code
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone.
2. When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *).
3. The machine signals if it has received messages:
• One long beep -- Fax messages
• No beeps -- No messages
4. When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command.
• The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command.
• The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command.
5. Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you are finished.
6. Hang up.
• If your machine is set to Manual mode and you want to use the remote retrieval features, wait for about
100 seconds after it starts ringing, and then enter the remote access code within 30 seconds.
• This function may not be available in some countries or supported by your local telephone company.
Related Information
•Remote Fax Retrieval
243
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Forward Faxes Remotely
Forward Faxes Remotely
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Call your Brother machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine to forward incoming faxes to another
machine.
You must turn on Fax Storage to use this feature.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2.
4. Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you
want your fax messages sent, followed by # # (up to 20 digits).
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print
your fax messages.
Related Information
•Remote Fax Retrieval
244
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can change your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4.
4. Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax
messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #.
You will hear one long beep.
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.
6. Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
Related Information
•Remote Fax Retrieval
245
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
•Voice Operations
•Store Fax Numbers
•Set up Groups for Broadcasting
•Combine Address Book Numbers
246
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations
Voice Operations
•Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode
247
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel
Receive Mode
Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (fast double-ring) to alert you to pick up a voice
call.
If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press the button in the following table to
answer:
Applicable Models To pick up voice call
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW Pickup
If you are at an extension telephone, lift the handset during the F/T Ring, and then press #51 between the fast
double-rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by
pressing *51.
Related Information
•Voice Operations
248
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers
Store Fax Numbers
•Store Address Book Numbers
•Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers
249
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers
Store Address Book Numbers
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Do the following steps:
a. Press [Edit].
b. Press [Add New Address].
c. Press [Name].
d. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK].
e. Press [Address].
f. Enter the fax or telephone number using the LCD (up to 20 digits), and then press [OK].
• To store an email address to use with Internet Fax or Scan to Email server, press and enter the
email address and press [OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to
Email server feature.)
g. Press [OK].
To store another Address Book number, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Store Fax Numbers
•Store Address Book Numbers from Outgoing Calls
250
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book
Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers from Outgoing Calls
Store Address Book Numbers from Outgoing Calls
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can store Address Book numbers from the Outgoing Call history.
1. Press [Fax] > [Call History] > [Outgoing Call].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
3. Press [Edit] > [Add to Address Book] > [Name].
To delete the number, press [Edit] > [Delete]. Press [Yes] to confirm.
4. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters).
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [OK] to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.
7. Press .
Related Information
•Store Address Book Numbers
251
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Change or Delete Address
Book Names or Numbers
Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit].
2. Do one of the following:
• Press [Change] to edit the names or fax or telephone numbers.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to change, and then press it.
- To change the name, press [Name]. Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and
then press [OK].
- To change the fax or telephone number, press [Address]. Enter the new fax or telephone number
(up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Press [OK] to finish.
How to enter text:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then
press .
Enter the new character.
• To delete numbers, press [Delete].
- Select the fax or telephone numbers you want to delete by pressing them to display a red check mark,
and then press [OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Store Fax Numbers
252
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting
Set up Groups for Broadcasting
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
A Group, which can be stored in the Address Book (One Touch Dial or Speed Dial in some models) allows you to
send the same fax message to many fax numbers.
First, you must store each fax number in the Address Book. Then you can include them as numbers in the
Group. Each Group uses up an Address Book (a One Touch Dial, or a Speed Dial in some models) number.
Applicable Models Maximum number of Group Maximum numbers in a large
Group
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/
MFC-L9570CDW
20 groups 299 numbers
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Do the following steps:
a. Press [Edit] > [Setup Groups] > [Name].
b. Enter the Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
c. Press [Add/Delete].
d. Add Address Book numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a red checkmark, and then press
[OK].
e. Read and confirm the displayed list of names and numbers you have chosen, and then press [OK] to
save your Group.
To store another Group for broadcasting, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
•Change a Broadcasting Group Name
•Delete a Broadcasting Group
•Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
253
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting > Change a
Broadcasting Group Name
Change a Broadcasting Group Name
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [Name].
4. Enter the new Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
How to change the stored name:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then
press .
Enter the new character.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press .
Related Information
•Set up Groups for Broadcasting
254
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting > Delete a
Broadcasting Group
Delete a Broadcasting Group
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Delete].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press .
Related Information
•Set up Groups for Broadcasting
255
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting > Add or Delete a
Broadcasting Group Member
Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Add/Delete] option, and then press [Add/Delete].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.
5. Do the following for each number you want to change:
• To add a number to the Group, press the check box of the number to add a check mark.
• To delete a number from the Group, press the check box of the number to remove the check mark.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press .
Related Information
•Set up Groups for Broadcasting
256
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Combine Address Book Numbers
Combine Address Book Numbers
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Sometimes you may want to choose from several long-distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary
depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of long-
distance carriers and credit card numbers as Address Book numbers.
You can store these long dialling sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate Address Book
numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialling using the dial pad.
For example: You might have stored '01632' and '960555' in your machine as shown in the following table.
Applicable Models '01632' stored in '960555' stored in
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/
MFC-L9570CDW
Address Book: Brother 1 Address Book: Brother 2
You can use them both to dial '01632-960555' by using the following procedure.
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1.
3. Press the number.
4. Press [Apply].
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Press [OK].
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2.
8. Press the number.
9. Press [Apply].
10. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will dial '01632-960555'.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For
example, to change the number to '01632-960556', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 01632) using
Address Book, press [Apply], and then press 960556 using the LCD.
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialling sequence, create a pause in the
number by pressing [Pause].
Related Information
•Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
257
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices
Telephone Services and External Devices
•Use BT Call Sign
•Set the Telephone Line Type
•External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
•External and Extension Telephones
•Multi-line Connections (PBX)
258
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign
Use BT Call Sign
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
This feature of the machine lets you use the BT Call Sign subscriber service which allows you to have at least
two separate telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone number has its own distinctive ringing
pattern, so you know which telephone number is ringing. This is one way you can have a separate telephone
number for your machine.
Your machine has a BT Call Sign compatible distinctive ringing function, allowing you to dedicate a second
telephone number (on the same telephone line) just for receiving faxes.
• This feature is available only in the U.K.
• You can switch BT Call Sign Off temporarily, then turn it back on. When you get a new fax number,
make sure you reset this function. This machine will automatically answer incoming calls that use your
new fax number.
• When you set the BT Call Sign feature to On, the receive mode is set to [Manual] automatically.
[Manual] mode will not respond to incoming telephone calls, since the number you use for telephone
calls will use the normal ring pattern.
Related Information
•Telephone Services and External Devices
•Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign
259
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign > Enable the Machine to Work
with BT Call Sign
Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
• This feature is available only in the U.K.
• This feature will only work with your external phone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [BT Call Sign].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
If you turn off BT Call Sign, the receive mode stays in Manual mode. You will need to set the receive mode again.
Related Information
•Use BT Call Sign
260
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type
Set the Telephone Line Type
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you are connecting the machine to a line that features PBX or ISDN to send and receive faxes, you must select
a Telephone Line Type that matches your line's features.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Phone Line Set].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Normal], [PBX], or [ISDN].
3. If you selected [PBX], do the following steps:
a. Press [On] or [Always].
• If you select [On], the machine dials a prefix number before the fax number only when [R] is pressed.
• If you select [Always], the machine always dials a prefix number before the fax number.
b. Press [Dial Prefix].
c. Enter the prefix number using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Use the numbers 0 to 9, #, * and !. You cannot use ! with any other numbers or characters.
4. Press .
Related Information
•Telephone Services and External Devices
•PBX and TRANSFER
261
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type > PBX and
TRANSFER
PBX and TRANSFER
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
The machine's [Phone Line Set] default setting is [Normal], which lets the machine connect to a standard
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) line. However, many offices use a central telephone system or
Private Branch Exchange (PBX). Your machine can be connected to most types of PBX. The machine's recall
feature supports timed break recall only (TBR). TBR will work with most PBX systems allowing you to gain
access to an outside line, or transfer calls to another extension. To use this feature, press the button in the table.
Applicable Models To use the machine's recall feature
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW R
Program a press of the button in the table as part of a number stored in the Address Book (One Touch Dial
and Speed Dial in some models). When programming the Address Book number (One Touch Dial number
and Speed Dial number in some models), press the button first (the LCD displays ‘!’), then enter the
telephone number. This avoids having to press the button each time before you dial from the Address Book
(One Touch Dial or Speed Dial). Your Telephone Line Type must be set to PBX on the machine to use this
programming.
Related Information
•Set the Telephone Line Type
262
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can connect an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the
TAD answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine. If it
hears them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice
message and the LCD will show [Telephone].
The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend setting it to two rings). This is because your
machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your
external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.
1
1
(Example for U.K.)
1 TAD
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line.
If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.
Related Information
•Telephone Services and External Devices
•Connect an External TAD
•Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
263
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering
Device) > Connect an External TAD
Connect an External TAD
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Set your external TAD to one or two rings. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.)
2. Record an outgoing message on your external TAD.
3. Set the TAD to answer calls.
4. Set the Receive Mode on your machine to [External TAD].
Related Information
•External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
264
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering
Device) > Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for fax
tones.
2. Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
3. End your 20-second message by giving your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual faxes. For
example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”
NOTE
We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5 second silence because the machine cannot hear
fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving
faxes, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.
Related Information
•External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
265
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones
External and Extension Telephones
•Connect an External or Extension Telephone
•Operation from External and Extension Telephones
•Use Extension Telephones
•If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
•Use the Remote Codes
266
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Connect
an External or Extension Telephone
Connect an External or Extension Telephone
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.
1
2
(Example for U.K.)
1 Extension telephone
2 External telephone
Please make sure you use an external telephone with a cable no more than three metres long.
Related Information
•External and Extension Telephones
267
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Operation
from External and Extension Telephones
Operation from External and Extension Telephones
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you answer a fax call at an extension or an external telephone, you can make your machine take the call by
using the Remote Activation Code. When you press the Remote Activation Code *51, the machine starts to
receive the fax.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an
extension telephone by pressing the Remote Deactivation Code #51.
If you answer a call and no one is on the line:
You should assume that you’re receiving a manual fax.
Press *51 and wait for the chirp or until the LCD displays [Receiving], and then hang up.
You can also use the Fax Detect feature to make your machine automatically take the call.
Related Information
•External and Extension Telephones
268
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use
Extension Telephones
Use Extension Telephones
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Your premises may already be wired with parallel extension telephones, or you may plan to add extension
telephones to your line, as well as your machine. While the simplest arrangement is a straightforward parallel
connection, there are some problems with this. The most obvious is inadvertent interruption of a fax transmission
caused by someone picking up an extension telephone to make an outgoing call. Also, the remote activation
code feature may not operate reliably in such a simple configuration.
This machine may also be set to make a delayed transmission (i.e. a transmission at a preset time). This preset
job may coincide with someone picking up an extension handset.
These problems can easily be eliminated, if you arrange modification of your extension wiring circuit, such that
extension devices are connected “downstream” of your machine in a master/slave configuration (see figure 2). In
this configuration the machine can always detect whether a telephone is in use. Thus it will not attempt to seize
the line during that time. This is known as “telephone off-hook detection.”
The inadvisable configuration is shown in figure 1, and the recommended master/slave configuration is shown in
figure 2.
This new connection configuration can be arranged by contacting BT, Kingston upon Hull Telecommunications,
your PBX maintainer or a qualified telephone installation company as appropriate. Simply explained, the
extension telephone circuit should be terminated on a normal modular plug (BT 431A style), which in turn should
be put into the modular socket of the white “T”-shaped connector provided as part of the line cord assembly.
Inadvisable connection of extension sockets (Figure 1.)
FAX
1 2
1
3
1. Extension socket
2. Master socket
3. Incoming line
Recommended connection of extension sockets (Figure 2.)
FAX
1123
1. Extension socket
2. Master socket
3. Incoming line
The fax machine must be plugged into the master socket.
These telephones are now connected as external devices, because they are connected to the fax machine
via the T-connector.
Related Information
•External and Extension Telephones
269
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > If You Use
a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the telephone line cord and you typically carry the
cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you must go to the machine so you can press [Pickup] or Tel/R to transfer
the call to the cordless handset.
Related Information
•External and Extension Telephones
270
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes
Use the Remote Codes
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Remote Activation Code
If you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing
the Remote Activation Code *51. Wait for the chirping sounds, and then replace the handset.
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing the
buttons in the following table:
Applicable Models To make the machine receive the fax
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW Fax Start and then Receive
Remote Deactivation Code
If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) after
the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing
#51 (make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and fast double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the
external telephone by pressing the button in the following table:
Applicable Models To pick up voice call
MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW Pickup
Related Information
•External and Extension Telephones
•Change the Remote Codes
271
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes > Change the Remote Codes
Change the Remote Codes
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
The preset Remote Activation Code is *51. The preset Remote Deactivation Code is #51. If you are always
disconnected when accessing your External TAD remotely, try changing the three-digit remote codes using the
numbers 0-9, *, #.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Remote Codes].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• To change the Remote Activation Code, press [Act.Code]. Enter the new code, and then press [OK].
• To change the Remote Deactivation Code, press [Deact.Code]. Enter the new code, and then press
[OK].
• If you do not want to change the Codes, go to the next step.
• To turn off (or turn on) the Remote Codes, press [Remote Codes], and then press [Off] (or [On]).
3. Press .
Related Information
•Use the Remote Codes
272
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
We suggest you ask the company that installed your PBX to connect your machine. If you have a multi line
system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the
machine being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls will be answered by
a switchboard operator we recommend setting the Receive Mode to [Manual].
We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate correctly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX.
Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX.
Related Information
•Telephone Services and External Devices
273
Home > Fax > Fax Reports
Fax Reports
The Transmission Verification Report and the Fax Journal are available to confirm the results of fax transmission.
•Print a Transmission Verification Report
•Print a Fax Journal
274
Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Transmission Verification Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving
party's name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent,
and whether or not the transmission was successful.
There are several settings available for the Transmission Verification Report:
On Prints a report after every fax you send.
On (+Image) Prints a report after every fax you send.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Error only Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Error only is the factory setting.
Error only (+Image) Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off Your Brother machine does not print any reports after sending faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [XMIT Report].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
If you select [On (+Image)] or [Error only (+Image)], the image will not appear on the Transmission
Verification Report if Real Time Transmission is set to [On].
3. Press .
If the transmission is successful, OK appears next to RESULT on the Transmission Verification Report. If the
transmission is not successful, NG appears next to RESULT.
Related Information
•Fax Reports
275
Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Fax Journal
Print a Fax Journal
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can set the machine to print a Fax Journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7
days).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Journal Period] >
[Journal Period].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select an interval, and then press it.
• Every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all reception and transmission log
data from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 log data before the time you
selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If
you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the log data from the
memory.
• Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 reception and transmission log data.
3. If you selected every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, press [Time] and enter the time to start printing (in 24-
hour format) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. (For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
4. If you selected [Every 7 Days], press [Day].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Every Monday], [Every Tuesday], [Every
Wednesday], [Every Thursday], [Every Friday], [Every Saturday] or [Every Sunday] option,
and then press the first day of the 7-day countdown.
6. Press .
Related Information
•Fax Reports
276
Home > Fax > PC-FAX
PC-FAX
•PC-FAX for Windows®
•PC-FAX for Mac
277
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows®
PC-FAX for Windows®
•PC-FAX Overview (Windows®)
•Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows®)
•Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
278
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®)
PC-FAX Overview (Windows®)
Reduce paper consumption and save time by using Brother's PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from your
machine.
•Configure PC-FAX (Windows®)
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
279
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure PC-FAX
(Windows®)
Configure PC-FAX (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Before sending faxes using PC-FAX, personalise the send options in each tab of the PC-FAX Setup dialog box.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending.
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending.
The PC-FAX Setup dialog box appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click the User Information tab, and then type your user information in the fields.
Each Microsoft® account can have its own customised User Information screen for custom fax headers
and cover pages.
• Click the Sending tab, and then type the number needed to access an outside line (if needed) in the
Outside line access field. Select the Include header check box to include the header information.
• Click the Address Book tab, and then select the address book you want to use for PC-FAX from the
Select Address Book drop-down list.
3. Click OK.
280
Related Information
•PC-FAX Overview (Windows®)
281
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®)
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
Add, edit and delete members and groups to personalise your Brother Address Book.
•Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
•Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
•Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
•Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
•Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
•Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
282
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®) > Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Add new people and their fax information to the PC-Fax Address Book if you want to send a fax using Brother
PC-Fax software.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
2. Click .
The Address Book Member Setup dialog box appears.
283
3. Type the member's information in the corresponding fields. Only the Name field is required.
4. Click OK.
Related Information
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
284
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®) > Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Create a group to broadcast the same PC-FAX to several recipients at one time.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
2. Click .
The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears.
285
3. Type the name of the new group in the Group Name field.
4. In the Available Names field, select each name you want to include in the group, and then click Add >>.
Members added to the group appear in the Group Members box.
5. When finished, click OK.
Each group can contain up to 50 members.
Related Information
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
286
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®) > Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book
(Windows®)
Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book
(Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
2. Select the member or group you want to edit.
3. Click (Properties).
4. Change the member or group information.
5. Click OK.
Related Information
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
287
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®) > Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
2. Select the member or group you want to delete.
3. Click (Delete).
4. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
Related Information
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
288
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®) > Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can export the Address Book as an ASCII text file (*.csv), a vCard (an electronic business card), or Remote
Setup Dial Data and save it on your computer.
• You cannot export the group settings when you export the Address Book data.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
2. Click the File menu, and then select Export.
3. Select one of the following:
•Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 4.
•vCard
You must select the member you want to export from your address book before selecting this option.
Browse to the folder where you want to save the vCard, type the vCard name in the File name field,
and then click Save.
•Remote Setup Dial Data
Browse to the folder where you want to save the data, type the file name in the File name field, and
then click Save.
4. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to export, and then click Add >>.
289
Select and add the items in the order you want them listed.
5. If you are exporting to an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to
separate the data fields.
6. Click OK.
7. Browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save the data, type the file name, and then click
Save.
Related Information
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
290
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > PC-FAX Overview (Windows®) > Configure your PC-
Fax Address Book (Windows®) > Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can import ASCII text files (*.csv), vCards (electronic business cards), or Remote Setup Dial Data into your
Address Book.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
2. Click the File menu, and then select Import.
3. Select one of the following:
•Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 4.
•vCard
Go to step 7.
•Remote Setup Dial Data
Go to step 7.
4. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to import, and then click Add >>.
291
You must select and add fields from the Available Items list in the same order they are listed in the import
text file.
5. If you are importing an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to
separate the data fields.
6. Click OK.
7. Browse to the folder where you want to import the data, type the file name, and then click Open.
Related Information
•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows®)
292
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows®)
Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
PC-FAX supports only monochrome faxes. A monochrome fax will be sent even if the original data is colour
and the receiving fax machine supports colour faxes.
1. Create a file in any application on your computer.
2. Select the print command in your application.
3. Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then complete your print operation.
The BrotherPC-FAX dialog box appears.
4. Type a fax number using one of the following methods:
• Click the numbers on the dial pad to type the number, and then click Add Send Address.
If you select the Dial Restriction check box, a confirmation dialog box will appear for you to re-type the fax
number using the keyboard. This feature helps to prevent transmissions to the wrong destination.
• Click the Address Book button, and then select a member or group from the Address Book.
If you make a mistake, click All Clear to delete all entries.
5. To include a cover page, select the Add Cover Page check box. You can also click to create or edit a
cover page.
6. Click Start to send the fax.
• To cancel the fax, click Cancel.
• To redial a number, click Redial to show the last five fax numbers, select a number, and then click Start.
Related Information
•PC-FAX for Windows®
293
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
Use Brother's PC-FAX software to receive faxes on your computer, screen them and print only those faxes you
want.
•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®)
294
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
> Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®)
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Brother's PC-FAX Receive software lets you view and store faxes on your computer. It is automatically installed
when you install the Brother software and drivers and works on locally- or network-connected machines.
• PC-FAX Receive supports only monochrome faxes.
When you turn off your computer, your machine will continue to receive and store faxes in your Brother
machine's memory. The machine's LCD will display the number of stored faxes received. When you start this
application, the software will transfer all received faxes to your computer at once. You can enable the Backup
Print option if you want the machine to print a copy of the fax before the fax is sent to your computer, or before
the computer is switched off. You can configure the Backup Print settings from your Brother machine.
Related Information
•Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
•Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows®)
•View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows®)
295
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
> Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®) > Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer
(Windows®)
Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
We recommend selecting the Start PC-FAX Receive on computer startup check box so that the software
runs automatically and can transfer any faxes upon computer startup.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Receive.
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.
2. Confirm the message and click Yes.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears. The (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon also appears in your
computer task tray.
Related Information
•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®)
•Set Up Your Computer for PC-FAX Receiving (Windows®)
•Add Your Brother Machine to PC-FAX Receiving (Windows®)
296
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
> Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®) > Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer
(Windows®) > Set Up Your Computer for PC-FAX Receiving (Windows®)
Set Up Your Computer for PC-FAX Receiving (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click Settings.
3. Configure these options as needed:
Preferences
Configure to start PC-FAX Receive automatically when you start Windows®.
Save
Configure the path to save PC-FAX files and select the received document format.
Upload to
Configure the path to the SharePoint® server and select the option to upload automatically or manually
(available only for Administrators).
Device
Select the Brother machine that you want to receive PC-FAX.
Lock (available only for Administrators)
Restrict users who do not have administrator privileges from configuring the settings options shown above.
4. Click OK.
297
Related Information
•Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows®)
298
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
> Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®) > Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer
(Windows®) > Add Your Brother Machine to PC-FAX Receiving (Windows®)
Add Your Brother Machine to PC-FAX Receiving (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
• If you installed the machine following the instructions for a network user, then the machine should already
be configured for your network.
1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click Device > Add.
4. Select the appropriate connection method.
Select your machine from the automatic search results below.
Connected Brother machines will be displayed. Select a device from the list. Click OK.
Specify your machine by IP address
Type the machine's IP address in the IP Address field, and then click OK.
299
5. To change the computer name that will appear on the machine's LCD, type the new name in the Enter your
PC display name (Max 15 Characters) field.
6. Click OK.
Related Information
•Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows®)
300
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows® > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows®)
> Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®) > View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows®)
View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Receiving Status
Icon Indicated Status
Standby mode
No unread messages
Receiving messages
Messages received
Unread messages
1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click any faxes in the list to view them.
3. When finished, click in the right top corner of the window to close it.
301
Even after closing the window, PC-FAX Receive is active and the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready) ) icon will
remain in your computer task tray. To close PC-FAX Receive, click the icon in the computer task tray and
click Close.
Related Information
•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows®)
302
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Mac
PC-FAX for Mac
Use Brother's PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from your Mac without printing them. This feature helps
reduce your paper consumption and save time.
•Send Faxes from Your Application (Mac)
303
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Mac > Send Faxes from Your Application (Mac)
Send Faxes from Your Application (Mac)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
PC-FAX supports only monochrome faxes. A monochrome fax will be sent even if the original data is colour and
the receiving fax machine supports colour faxes.
1. Create a document in a Mac application.
2. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.
3. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select the Send Fax option.
4. Click the Output pop-up menu, and then select the Facsimile option.
5. Type a fax number in the Input Fax Number field, and then click Add.
The fax number is displayed in the Destination Fax Numbers field.
304
To send a fax to more than one number, click the Add button after entering the first fax number and type
the next fax number. The destination fax numbers will be listed in the Destination Fax Numbers field.
6. Click Print to send the fax.
Related Information
•PC-FAX for Mac
305
Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
You can print photos directly from digital camera media or a USB flash drive.
Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN.
•Compatible USB Flash Drives
•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
•Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows®)
306
Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Compatible USB Flash Drives
Compatible USB Flash Drives
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives and digital cameras that use the USB mass storage
standard. Other USB devices are not supported.
Compatible USB Flash Drives
USB Class USB Mass Storage Class
USB Mass Storage Sub Class SCSI or SFF-8070i
Transfer protocol Bulk transfer Only
Format 1 FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT
Sector size Max. 4096 Byte
Encryption Encrypted devices are not supported.
Related Information
•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
1NTFS format is not supported.
307
Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital
Camera Supporting Mass Storage
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting
Mass Storage
• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.
• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash
drive to the USB direct interface.
USB port location (Front View)
USB port location (Back View)
The back view illustration shows the MFC-L9570CDW.
1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface. The touchscreen will
automatically display the USB menu to confirm the USB flash drive or digital camera is correctly connected.
• If an error occurs, the USB menu will not appear on the touchscreen.
• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the touchscreen does not display any information even if
you connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press the touchscreen to wake up the
machine.
• If your machine has been set to Secure Function Lock On, you may not be able to access Direct Print.
• (MFC-L9570CDW) If the machine prompts you to choose the USB port, select it on the touchscreen.
2. Press [Direct Print].
3. Swipe up or down, or press a or b to display the file you want to print, and then select the file.
308
To print an index of the files, press [Index Print] on the touchscreen. Press [Mono Start] or
[Colour Start] to print the data.
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press [Print Settings]. Go to the next step.
• If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Mono Start] or
[Colour Start].
5. Select the print settings you want to change:
•[Paper Type]
•[Paper Size]
•[Multiple Page]
•[Orientation]
•[2-sided]
•[Collate]
•[Tray Use]
•[Print Quality]
•[PDF Option]
Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.
6. Press [OK].
7. Enter the number of copies you want.
8. Press [Mono Start] or [Colour Start] to print the data.
9. Press .
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine
has finished printing.
Related Information
•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
309
Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows®)
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows®)
These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option.
3. Complete your print operation.
4. Enter the required information to save the file.
If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to
save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn).
If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive.
Related Information
•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
310
Home > Network
Network
•Supported Basic Network Features
•Network Management Software and Utilities
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
•Advanced Network Features
•Technical Information for Advanced Users
311
Home > Network > Supported Basic Network Features
Supported Basic Network Features
The print server supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which
network features and connections are supported by each operating system.
Operating Systems Windows® 7
Windows® 8
Windows® 10
Windows Server®
2008/2012/2012 R2/2016
macOS v10.10.5
macOS v10.11.x
macOS v10.12
Printing Yes Yes Yes
Scanning Yes Yes
PC Fax Send (Available only
for certain models)
Yes Yes
PC Fax Receive (Available
only for certain models)
Yes
BRAdmin Light Yes Yes
BRAdmin Professional Yes Yes
Web Based Management Yes Yes Yes
Remote Setup (Available only
for certain models)
Yes Yes
Status Monitor Yes Yes
Driver Deployment Wizard Yes Yes
Vertical Pairing (Available only
for certain models)
Yes
• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
download the latest version of Brother's BRAdmin Light.
• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
download the latest version of Brother's BRAdmin Professional utility.
Related Information
•Network
312
Home > Network > Network Management Software and Utilities
Network Management Software and Utilities
Configure and change your Brother machine's network settings using a management utility.
•Learn about Network Management Software and Utilities
•Change Machine Settings from Your Computer
•Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
313
Home > Network > Network Management Software and Utilities > Learn about Network Management
Software and Utilities
Learn about Network Management Software and Utilities
Web Based Management
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS). Type your
machine's IP address into your web browser to access and change your print server settings.
BRAdmin Light (Windows®)
BRAdmin Light is a utility for the initial setup of Brother network-connected devices. This utility can search for
Brother products on your network, view the status and configure the basic network settings, such as IP address.
Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to download
BRAdmin Light.
• If using Windows® Firewall, or the firewall function of an anti-spyware or antivirus application,
temporarily disable them. When you are sure you can print, configure the software settings following the
instructions.
BRAdmin Professional (Windows®)
BRAdmin Professional is a utility for more advanced management of network-connected Brother devices. This
utility can search for Brother products on your network and view the device status from an easy-to-read
Windows® Explorer-style screen that changes colour to identify the status of each device. You can configure
network and device settings, and update device firmware from a Windows® computer on your LAN. BRAdmin
Professional can also log activity of Brother devices on your network and export the log data. For users who want
to monitor locally-connected machines, install the Print Auditor Client software on the client computer. This utility
allows you to use BRAdmin Professional to monitor machines that are connected to a client computer via the
USB interface.
• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
download the latest version of Brother's BRAdmin Professional utility.
• Node name: The node name appears in the current BRAdmin Professional window. The default node
name is "BRNxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wired network or "BRWxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wireless network (where
"xxxxxxxxxxxx" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet address).
• If using Windows® Firewall, or the firewall function of an anti-spyware or antivirus application,
temporarily disable them. When you are sure you can print, configure the software settings following the
instructions.
Remote Setup (Windows® and Mac) (Available only for certain models)
Remote Setup is a program for configuring many machine and network settings from either a Windows® or a
Mac application. When you start this application, the settings on your machine are automatically downloaded to
your computer and displayed on your computer screen. If you change the settings, you can upload them directly
to the machine.
This utility can be used with either a USB or a network connection.
Related Information
•Network Management Software and Utilities
314
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network
To connect your machine to your wireless network, we recommend using the Brother installation disc.
•Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™ (WPS)
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS)
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel
Setup Wizard
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
•Use Wi-Fi Direct®
315
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following:
• If you are using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password.
• To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place the Brother machine as close to
the wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between
the two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your
documents.
Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and
applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics,
you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB
for the fastest throughput speed.
• Although the Brother machine can be used in both a wired and wireless network (supported models only),
only one connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct
connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used
at the same time.
If you do not know the security information, please consult the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or your Internet provider.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
316
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network
1. Turn on your computer and insert the Brother installation disc into your computer.
• For Windows®, follow these instructions:
• For Mac, click Driver Download to go to the Brother Solutions Center. Follow the on-screen instructions
to install printer drivers.
2. The opening screen appears automatically.
Choose your language, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
If the Brother screen does not appear, do the following:
• (Windows® 7)
Go to Computer. Double-click the CD/DVD icon, and then double-click start.exe.
• (Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
Click the (File Explorer) icon on the taskbar, and then go to Computer (This PC). Double-click the
CD/DVD icon, and then double-click start.exe.
• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes.
3. Choose Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi), and then click Next.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you have completed the wireless setup, the installer program walks you through installing the drivers and
software necessary for operating your device. Click Next in the installation dialog box and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
317
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from
your machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings.
Routers or access points that support WPS are marked with this symbol:
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [WPS].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then
press [OK].], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your
machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your
wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your
device, insert the Brother installation disc into your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
318
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method
of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Method to configure your wireless network settings.
The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance®. By submitting a PIN
created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up
the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the
instructions provided with your wireless access point/router.
Type A
Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as the Registrar:
1
Type B
Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as the Registrar:
319
2
Routers or access points that support WPS are marked with this symbol:
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [WPS w/ PIN Code].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
4. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device
you are using as the Registrar. (For example: http://192.168.1.2)
5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page will differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more
information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows® 7, Windows® 8, or Windows® 10 computer as a Registrar, complete the
following steps:
6. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > Devices and Printers > Add a device.
• Windows® 8
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings >
Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers > Add a device.
320
• Windows® 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• To use a Windows® 7, Windows® 8, or Windows® 10 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to
your network in advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN
access point/router.
• If you use Windows® 7, Windows® 8, or Windows® 10 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver
after the wireless configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the full driver and
software package, use the Brother installation disc.
7. Select your machine and click Next.
8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next.
9. (Windows® 7) Select your network, and then click Next.
10. Click Close.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your
device, insert the Brother installation disc into your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
321
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's
Control Panel Setup Wizard
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, however your Brother machine
supports the use of the first WEP key only.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother customer service, make sure you have
your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key ready. We cannot assist you in locating this information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue the wireless setup.
How can I find this information?
a. Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
b. The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
c. If you do not know the security information, please consult the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or your Interner provider.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs.
If a list of SSIDs is displayed, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to
connect, and then press the SSID.
5. Press [OK].
6. Do one of the following:
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
When you have entered all the characters, press [OK].
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
322
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your
device, insert the Brother installation disc into your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
323
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not
Broadcast
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Communication Mode Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
Infrastructure Open System NONE -
WEP
Shared Key WEP
WPA/WPA2-PSK AES
TKIP
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Communication Mode Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
Infrastructure WPA2-PSK AES 12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine
supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a
or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Infrastructure] when instructed.
7. Select the Authentication Method.
8. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press the Encryption type [None] or [WEP].
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK] option, press the Encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
Enter the WPA key, and then press [OK].
• Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
9. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
324
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your
device, insert the Brother installation disc into your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
•I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
325
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless
Network > Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Communication
Mode
Authentication
Method
Encryption Mode User ID Password
Infrastructure LEAP CKIP
EAP-FAST/NONE AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/MS-
CHAPv2
AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/GTC AES
TKIP
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
PEAP/GTC AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-
CHAP
AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-
CHAPv2
AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/PAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TLS AES -
TKIP -
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Communication
Mode
Authentication
Method
Encryption Mode User ID Password
Infrastructure EAP-FAST/MS-
CHAPv2
AES Brother 12345678
326
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate
issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client
certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate
name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing
down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the
common name of the server certificate.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a
or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Infrastructure] when instructed.
7. Select the Authentication Method.
8. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [LEAP] option, enter the user ID, and then press [OK]. Enter the Password, and then
press [OK].
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, select the Inner Authentication method
[NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [GTC] or [PAP].
Depending on your Authentication method, the Inner Authentication method selections differ.
Select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID and password (if
required), and then press [OK] for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID and Password, and then press [OK] for each option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
The machine will display a list of available Client Certificates, and then select the certificate.
Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK]
for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK].
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].
9. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your
device, insert the Brother installation disc into your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network
327
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
328
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct®
Use Wi-Fi Direct®
•Print or Scan from Your Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
329
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Print or Scan from Your Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct
Print or Scan from Your Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance®. It allows you to
configure a secured wireless network between your Brother machine and a mobile device, such as an Android™
device, Windows® device, iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad, without using an access point. Wi-Fi Direct supports
wireless network configuration using the one-push or PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). You can
also configure a wireless network by manually setting an SSID and password. Your Brother machine's Wi-Fi
Direct feature supports WPA2™ security with AES encryption.
2
1
1. Mobile device
2. Your Brother machine
• Although the Brother machine can be used in both a wired and wireless network, only one connection
method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct connection, or
a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used at the
same time.
• The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner (G/O). When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the G/O serves as an access point.
Related Information
•Use Wi-Fi Direct®
330
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings from your machine's control panel.
•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS)
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
(WPS)
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
331
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
The following instructions offer five methods for configuring your Brother machine in a wireless network
environment. Select the method you prefer for your environment:
Check your mobile device for configuration.
1. Does your mobile device support Wi-Fi Direct?
Option Description
Yes Go to Step 2
No Go to Step 3
2. Does your mobile device support one-push configuration for Wi-Fi Direct?
Option Description
Yes See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-
Push Method.
No See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN
Method.
3. Does your mobile device support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)?
Option Description
Yes Go to Step 4
No See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually.
4. Does your mobile device support one-push configuration for Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)?
Option Description
Yes See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-
Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
No See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
To use Brother iPrint&Scan functionality in a Wi-Fi Direct network configured by one-push configuration using Wi-
Fi Direct or by PIN Method configuration using Wi-Fi Direct, the device you use to configure Wi-Fi Direct must be
running Android™ 4.0 or greater.
Related Information
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
332
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-
Push Method
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method
If your mobile device supports Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi Direct network:
When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi
Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.
Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Activate Wi-Fi Direct on your mobile device (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) when
[Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears on the machine's
LCD. Press [OK] on your machine.
This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .
3. Do one of the following:
• When your Brother machine is the Group Owner (G/O), connect your mobile device to the machine
directly.
• When your Brother machine is not the G/O, it displays available device names with which to configure a
Wi-Fi Direct network. Select the mobile device you want to connect to. Search for available devices again
by pressing [Rescan].
4. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. The Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan contains information on
printing from or scanning to your mobile device. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions
Center at support.brother.com to see the guide.
Related Information
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
333
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-
Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method of Wi-
Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
If your mobile device supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi
Direct network:
When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi
Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.
Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Owner].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On].
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [Push Button] option. Press [Push Button].
4. Activate your mobile device's WPS one-push configuration method (see your mobile device's user's guide for
instructions) when [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears on
the machine's LCD. Press [OK] on your Brother machine.
This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .
5. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. The Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan contains information on
printing from or scanning to your mobile device. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions
Center at support.brother.com to see the guide.
Related Information
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
334
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN
Method
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method
If your mobile device supports the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi Direct
network:
When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi
Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.
Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [PIN Code].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Activate Wi-Fi Direct on your mobile device (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) when
[Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears on the machine's
LCD. Press [OK] on your machine.
This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .
3. Do one of the following:
• When your Brother machine is the Group Owner (G/O), it will wait for a connection request from your
mobile device. When [PIN Code] appears, enter the PIN displayed on your mobile device in the
machine. Press [OK] to complete the setup.
If the PIN is displayed on your Brother machine, enter the PIN in your mobile device.
• When your Brother machine is not the G/O, it displays available device names with which to configure a
Wi-Fi Direct network. Select the mobile device you want to connect to. Search for available devices again
by pressing [Rescan].
4. Do one of the following:
• Press [Display PIN Code] to display the PIN on your machine and enter the PIN in your mobile
device. Go to the next step.
• Press [Input PIN Code] to enter the PIN displayed on your mobile device in the machine, and then
press [OK]. Go to the next step.
If your mobile device does not display a PIN, press on your Brother machine. Go back to the first
step and try again.
5. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. The Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan contains information on
printing from or scanning to your mobile device. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions
Center at support.brother.com to see the guide.
Related Information
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
335
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™ (WPS)
If your mobile device supports the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS), follow these steps to configure
a Wi-Fi Direct network:
When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi
Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.
Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Owner].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On].
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [PIN Code] option. Press [PIN Code].
4. When [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears, activate your
mobile device's WPS PIN configuration method (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) and
then press [OK] on your Brother machine.
This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .
5. The machine will wait for a connection request from your mobile device. When [PIN Code] appears, enter
the PIN displayed on your mobile device in to the machine. Press [OK].
6. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. The Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan contains information on
printing from or scanning to your mobile device. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions
Center at support.brother.com to see the guide.
Related Information
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
336
Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use
Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct or WPS, you must configure a Wi-Fi Direct network manually.
When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi
Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.
Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. The machine will display the SSID name and Password for two minutes. Go to your mobile device's wireless
network settings screen, select the SSID name, and then enter the password.
3. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed
the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. The Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan contains information on
printing from or scanning to your mobile device. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions
Center at support.brother.com to see the guide.
Related Information
•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview
337
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features
Advanced Network Features
•Print the Network Configuration Report
•Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based Management
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•I-Fax Options
•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
•Print the WLAN Report
•Configure and Operate LDAP Search
•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
338
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Print the Network Configuration Report
Print the Network Configuration Report
The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings.
• Node Name: The Node Name appears on the current Network Configuration Report. The default Node
Name is "BRNxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wired network or "BRWxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wireless network (where
"xxxxxxxxxxxx" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.)
• If the [IP Address] on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try
printing it again.
• You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC
Address on the report, for example:
- IP address: 192.168.0.5
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
- Node name: BRN000ca0000499
- MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Advanced Network Features
•Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?
•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®)
•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
•Access Web Based Management
•Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
339
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based
Management
Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based Management
Use Web Based Management to configure your Brother machine to connect with your mail server.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
6. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the Status is Enabled.
340
341
7. Select the mail server you want to configure.
8. Enter the necessary settings for the mail server.
If you select the IMAP4 option, you must enter the full path of the mail folder using single byte characters
only, and then enter "Inbox" for the root mail folder.
9. When finished, click Submit.
The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.
10. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.
Related Information
•Advanced Network Features
342
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax)
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Before using I-Fax, configure your Brother machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You can
configure these items using the machine's control panel, Web Based Management, Remote setup, or BRAdmin
Professional. Make sure the following items are configured on your machine:
• IP address (If you are already using your machine on your network, the machine's IP address has been
configured correctly.)
• Email address
• SMTP, POP3, IMAP4 server address/port/Authentication method/Encryption method/Server Certificate
Verification
• Mailbox name and password
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
•Advanced Network Features
•Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
•Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Poll the Server Manually
•How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax
•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
•Relay Broadcast
•I-Fax Options
343
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
With Internet Fax (I-Fax), you can send and receive fax documents using the Internet as the transport
mechanism. Documents are transmitted in email messages as attached TIFF-F files. Your computer can send
and receive documents as long as it has an application that can generate and view TIFF-F files. You can use any
TIFF-F viewer application. Documents sent via the machine will be converted into a TIFF‑F format automatically.
If you want to send and receive messages to and from your machine, your computer's email application must
support Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME).
2
4
4
4
3
3
1
1. Sender
2. Internet
3. Receiver
4. Email server
• I-Fax supports sending and receiving documents in Letter or A4 format and in monochrome only.
• (MFC-L8690CDW)
To use this function, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com to update your machine's firmware or the program in your machine.
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
344
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
I-Fax communication on a LAN is very similar to communication via email; however, it is different from fax
communication using standard phone lines. The following is important information for using I-Fax:
• Factors such as the receiver's location, structure of the LAN and how busy the circuit (such as the Internet) is
may cause the system to take a longer time than usual to send an error mail.
• When sending confidential documents, we recommend using standard phone lines instead of the Internet
(due to its low level of security).
• If the receiver's mail system is not MIME-compatible, you cannot use I-Fax to send documents. If possible,
find out in advance, and note that some servers will not send an error reply.
• If a document is too large to send via I-Fax, it may not reach the receiver.
• You cannot change the font or size of the text in any Internet mail you receive.
Related Information
•Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
345
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Before sending your I-Fax, use the control panel, Web Based Management, or Remote Setup to configure the
following optional items:
•E-mail Subject
•E-mail Message
•Size Limit
•Request Delivery Notification (Send)
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
346
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Sending an I-Fax is like sending a normal fax. Make sure that your recipient's information is saved in your email
address book, and load the document you want to I-Fax into your Brother machine.
• If the computer to which you want to send a document is not running Windows Server® 2008/2012/2012
R2/2016, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, or Windows® 10, ask the computer's owner to install software that
can view TIFF files.
• To send multiple pages, use the ADF.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If Fax Preview is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If Fax Preview is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the fax settings. When the setting you want appears, press
it and select your preference. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is
displayed.)
5. Do one of the following:
• Press , and then enter the email address using the touchscreen.
• Press [Address Book], select the email address of your recipient, and then press [Apply].
6. Press [Fax Start].
The machine starts scanning. After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the recipient via your SMTP
server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing during scanning.
7. Press .
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
347
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When your Brother machine receives an incoming I-Fax, it will print the I-Fax automatically. To receive an I-
Fax, we recommend using the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional
items:
•Auto Polling
•Polling Frequency
•Print Mail Header
•Delete/Read Receive Error Mail
•Send Delivery Notification (Receive)
There are two ways you can receive email messages:
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving at regular intervals
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving, manually initiated
When using POP3/IMAP4 receiving, the machine polls your email server to receive data. Polling can occur at set
intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the email server every ten minutes) or you can
manually poll the server.
348
• If your machine starts to receive email data, the LCD displays [Receiving].The email will be printed
automatically.
• If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's
memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is reloaded in the paper tray.
• When the machine's Temporary Fax Backup Function is turned on, received data will be stored for a
certain period of time.
• If the received mail is not in a plain text format, or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the error
message "ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED" will be printed.
• If the received mail is too large, the error message "E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE" will be printed.
• If Delete/Read Receive Error Mail is On (default), then the error mail will be deleted from the email
server automatically.
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax
•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
349
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Poll the Server Manually
Poll the Server Manually
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Manual Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes] to confirm.
3. The LCD displays [Receiving] and your machine will print the data from the email server.
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
350
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax
How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
When your computer receives an I-Fax, you will receive an email in your email application. The incoming I-Fax is
attached to an email message that notifies you in its Subject line that your email server has received an I-Fax.
You can either wait for your Brother machine to poll the email server, or you can manually poll the email server to
receive the incoming data.
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
351
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use Brother's I-Fax feature to forward email or standard fax messages to another computer, to a fax machine, or
to another I-Fax machine. Enable the Forwarding feature using your machine's control panel.
To enable forwarding using your machine's control panel :
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] >
[Fax Forward].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the recipient's fax number or email address using the touchscreen.
3. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the forwarding fax number (up to 20 characters) using the LCD.
Press [OK].
• Press [Address Book].
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want
your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
4. Select the file type you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] to print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.
5. Press .
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
•Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
352
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Relay Broadcast
Relay Broadcast
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
A Relay Broadcast is when your Brother machine receives a message over the Internet and then relays it to
another fax machine using conventional telephone lines. If you must fax a document over a long distance or
abroad, use the Relay Broadcast Function to save the communication fee.
2
33
1
1. The Internet
2. Telephone line
3. Email server
Use the Brother machine's control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following items:
•Relay Broadcast Function
Set the Relay Broadcast Function to On.
•Relay Domain
Configure your machine's domain name on the machine that will broadcast the document to the conventional
fax machine. If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the trusted
domain name (the portion of the name after the "@" sign) at the machine. Use care in selecting a trusted
domain: any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a relay broadcast. You can register up to ten
domain names.
•Relay Broadcast Report
Specify whether or not you want a report to print after the machine completes the relay broadcast.
353
Related Information
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
•Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
354
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Relay Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send email from your machine to a conventional fax machine.
FAX@brother.com UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789
1
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
r
1. The Internet
In this example, your machine's email address is FAX@brother.com and you want to send a document from your
machine to a standard fax machine in England with the email address UKFAX@brother.co.uk, and you want your
machine to send the document using a conventional telephone line.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If Fax Preview is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If Fax Preview is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Broadcasting] option.
5. Press [Broadcasting].
6. Press [Add Number].
7. You can add email addresses to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and press , enter the email address and press [OK].
• Press [Add from Address book]. Press the check box of the email address you want to add to the
broadcast. After you have selected all the email addresses you want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Enter the name and press [OK]. The search results will be
displayed. Press the name and then press the email address you want to add to the broadcast.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and phone number:
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
E-mail address
Fax Phone Number
The word "fax#" must be
included with the phone
number inside the parenthesis.
After you have entered all of the fax numbers, press [OK].
355
If your machine displays , press .
8. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
•Relay Broadcast
356
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax
(I-Fax) > Relay Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send email from your computer to a conventional fax machine.
Some email applications do not support sending an email to multiple fax numbers. If your email application
cannot support multiple fax numbers, you can relay to only one fax machine at a time.
1
UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
1. The Internet
If you are sending an email to a conventional fax machine, the method of entering the fax machine's fax number
will vary, depending on the mail application you are using.
1. In your email application, create a new mail message and type the email address of the relay machine and
fax number of the first fax machine in the "TO" box.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and fax number:
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
E-mail address
Fax Phone Number
The word "fax#" must be
included with the phone
number inside the parenthesis.
For Microsoft® Outlook®, the address information must be entered into the address book as follows:
Name: fax#123456789
Email address: UKFAX@brother.co.uk
2. Type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the second fax machine in the "TO" box.
3. Send the email.
Related Information
•Relay Broadcast
357
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options
I-Fax Options
•Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
•I-Fax Error Mail
•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
358
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
• Verification Mail for sending allows you to request notification from the receiving station where your I-Fax or
email was received and processed.
• Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after
successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or email.
To use this feature, set the [Notification] options in the [Setup Mail RX] and [Setup Mail TX]
options of your Brother machine's control panel menu.
Related Information
•I-Fax Options
•Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
•Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
359
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification
Mail > Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail TX] >
[Notification].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Select [On] or [Off] to enable or disable the Send Notification feature.
When Send Notification is On, the fax includes an additional field, named Message Disposition Notification
(MDN), that contains message delivery information. By default, Send Notification is set to Off.
Your fax recipient's machine must support the MDN field in order to send a notification report.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
360
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification
Mail > Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail RX] >
[Notification].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the three possible settings:
Option Description
Receive
Notification On
When Receive Notification is On, a template is sent back to the sender to indicate
successful reception and processing of the message.
These templates depend on the operation requested by the sender.
Example:
SUCCESS: Received From <Mail Address>
Receive
Notification MDN
When Receive Notification is MDN, a report to indicate successful reception and
processing is sent back to the sender if the originating station sent a request
confirmation to the MDN (Message Disposition Notification) field.
Receive
Notification Off
When Receive Notification is Off, all forms of receive notification are disabled and no
message is sent back to the sender regardless of the request.
• To send TX Verification Mail, the Sender must configure these settings:
- Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail TX] to [On].
- Switch [Header] in [Setup Mail RX] to [All] or [Subject+From+To].
• To receive TX Verification Mail, the Receiver must configure these settings:
- Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail RX] to [On].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
361
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > I-Fax Error Mail
I-Fax Error Mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If there is a delivery error while sending an I-Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the Brother
machine and the error message will be printed.
If there is an error while receiving an I-Fax, an error message will be printed, for example, "The message being
sent to the machine was not in a TIFF format."
To receive the error mail and have it print on your machine, in [Setup Mail RX], switch the [Header] option
to [All] or to [Subject+From+To].
Related Information
•I-Fax Options
362
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW: standard, MFC-L8690CDW: available as a download
The Fax to Server feature allows the machine to scan a document and send it over the network to a separate fax
server. The document will then be sent from the server as fax data to the destination fax number over standard
phone lines. When the Fax to Server feature is set to On, all automatic fax transmissions from the machine will
be sent to the fax server for fax transmission.
You can send a fax directly from the machine using the manual fax feature when the Send to Server feature is
on.
(MFC-L8690CDW)
To use this function, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com
to update your machine's firmware or the program in your machine.
Related Information
•Advanced Network Features
•Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
•Enable Fax to Server
•Operate Fax to Server
363
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Before Sending a
Fax to the Fax Server
Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW:standard, MFC-L8690CDW: available as a download
To send a document to the fax server, the correct syntax for that server must be used. The destination fax
number must be sent with a prefix and a suffix that match the parameters used by the fax server. In most cases,
the syntax for the prefix is “fax=” and the syntax for the suffix would be the domain name of the fax server email
gateway. The suffix must also include the “@” symbol at the beginning of the suffix. The prefix and the suffix
information must be stored in the machine before you can use the Fax to server function. Destination fax
numbers can be saved in the address book or entered using the dial pad (up to 40-digit numbers). For example:
if you wanted to send a document to a destination fax number of 123-555-0001, use the following syntax:
Your fax server application must support an email gateway.
Related Information
•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
364
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Enable Fax to
Server
Enable Fax to Server
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW:standard, MFC-L8690CDW: available as a download
• Store the prefix/suffix address for the fax server in your Brother machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Fax to Server].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax to Server].
3. Press [On].
4. Press [Prefix].
5. Enter the prefix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Suffix].
7. Enter the suffix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
8. Press .
Related Information
•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
365
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Operate Fax to
Server
Operate Fax to Server
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Place the document in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
2. Enter the fax number.
3. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will send the message over a TCP/IP network to the fax server.
Related Information
•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
366
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Print the WLAN Report
Print the WLAN Report
The WLAN Report reflects your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code
on the printed report.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
3. Press .
If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one
minute and then try to print the report again.
Related Information
•Advanced Network Features
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network
•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
367
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error
Codes
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see
the corresponding instructions in the table:
Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-01 The wireless setting is not activated, change the wireless setting to ON.
If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it and change the wireless setting of
your machine to ON.
TS-02 The wireless access point/router cannot be detected.
1. Check the following two points:
• Unplug the power to your wireless access point/router, wait for 10 seconds, and then plug
it back in.
• If your WLAN access point/router is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC
address of the Brother machine is allowed in the filter.
2. If you manually entered the SSID and security information (SSID/authentication method/
encryption method/Network Key), the information may be incorrect.
Reconfirm the SSID and security information and re-enter the correct information as
necessary.
This device does not support a 5 GHz SSID/ESSID and you must select a 2.4 GHz SSID/
ESSID. Make sure the access point/router is set to 2.4 GHz or 2.4 GHz/5 GHz mixed mode.
TS-03 The wireless network and security setting you entered may be incorrect. Reconfirm the wireless
network settings.
If you do not know this information, ask your network administrator.
TS-04 The Authentication/Encryption methods used by the selected wireless access point/router are
not supported by your machine.
Change the authentication and encryption method of the wireless access point/router. Your
machine supports the following authentication methods:
• WPA-Personal
TKIP or AES
• WPA2-Personal
TKIP or AES
• Open
WEP or None (without encryption)
• Shared key
WEP
If your problem is not solved, the SSID or network settings you entered may be incorrect.
Confirm the wireless network settings.
TS-05 The security information (SSID/Network Key) is incorrect.
Confirm the wireless security information (Authentication method/Encryption method/Network
Key).
TS-06 The machine cannot detect a WLAN access point/router that has WPS enabled.
Confirm the wireless security information (Authentication method/Encryption method/Network
Key).
TS-07 The machine cannot detect a WLAN access point/router that has WPS enabled.
If you want to connect with WPS, you must operate both your machine and the WLAN access
point/router. Confirm the connection method for WPS on WLAN access point/router and try
starting again.
If you do not know how to operate your WLAN access point/router using WPS, see the
documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the manufacturer of your
WLAN access point/router or ask your network administrator.
368
Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-08 Two or more WLAN access points that have WPS enabled are detected.
• Confirm that only one WLAN access point/router within range has the WPS method active
and try again.
• Try starting again after few minutes in order to avoid effects from other access points.
Related Information
•Print the WLAN Report
•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network
•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
(WPS)
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
369
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW: standard, DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW: available as a download
The LDAP feature allows you to search for information, such as fax numbers and email addresses, on your
server. When you use the Fax, I-Fax, or Scan to Email server feature, you can use the LDAP search to find fax
numbers or email addresses.
• The LDAP feature does not support simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, or Korean.
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
• The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS.
• (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
To use this function, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com to update your machine's firmware or the program in your machine.
Related Information
•Advanced Network Features
•Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
•Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
370
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Change LDAP
Configuration Using Web Based Management
Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
Use Web Based Management to configure your LDAP settings in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select the LDAP check box, and then click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
8. On your computer, in Web Based Management's Address Book tab, select LDAP in the left navigation bar.
•LDAP Search
•LDAP Server Address
•Port (The default port number is 389.)
•Search Root
•Authentication
•Username
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
•Password
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
- If the LDAP server supports Kerberos authentication, we recommend selecting Kerberos for the
Authentication settings. It provides strong authentication between the LDAP server and your machine.
- You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
•Kerberos Server Address
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
•Timeout for LDAP
•Attribute of Name (Search Key)
•Attribute of E-mail
•Attribute of Fax Number
9. When finished, click Submit. Make sure the Status field reads OK.
Related Information
•Configure and Operate LDAP Search
•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
371
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Perform an
LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
After you configure LDAP settings, you can use the LDAP search feature to find fax numbers or email addresses
to use for:
• Sending a Fax (not available for DCP models)
• Sending an Internet Fax (I-Fax) (not available for DCP models)
• Scanning to Email Server
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
• The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS.
• You may need to use Kerberos Authentication or Simple Authentication to connect to your LDAP server,
depending on the security policy set by your network administrator.
• You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
1. Press to search.
2. Enter the initial characters for your search using the LCD.
3. Press [OK].
The LDAP search result will be shown on the LCD; the icon appears before the fax number (local) or
the email (local) address book search results.
• If there is no match on the server or the email (local) address book, the LCD displays [Results cannot
be found.] for about 60 seconds.
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the name you want.
5. Press the name.
To view the details of the name, press [Detail].
6. If the result includes more than one fax number or email address, the machine will prompt you to select just
one. Press [Apply]. Do one of the following:
• If you are sending a fax or an I-Fax, press [Fax Start].
• If you are scanning to the Email Server, load your document, press [Next], and then press [Start].
Related Information
•Configure and Operate LDAP Search
•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
372
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web
Based Management
Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronize the time used by the machine for
authentication with the SNTP time server. (This is not the time displayed on the machine's LCD.) You can
automatically or manually synchronize the machine's time with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided
by the SNTP time server.
•Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
•Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
•Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
•Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
373
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web
Based Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure date and time to synchronize the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click Date&Time in the left navigation bar.
Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For
example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
6. Verify the Time Zone settings.
7. Select the Synchronize with SNTP server check box.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
374
Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web
Based Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronize the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by
the SNTP time server.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select the SNTP check box to activate the settings.
7. Click Submit.
8. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
9. Next to the SNTP check box, click Advanced Settings and follow the instructions below:
Option Description
Status Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled.
Synchronization Status Confirm the latest synchronization status.
SNTP Server Method Select AUTO or STATIC.
•AUTO
If you have a DHCP server in your network, the SNTP server will obtain
the address from that server automatically.
•STATIC
Type the address you want to use.
375
Option Description
Primary SNTP Server
Address
Secondary SNTP Server
Address
Type the server address (up to 64 characters).
The secondary SNTP server address is used as a backup to the primary
SNTP server address. If the primary server is unavailable, the machine will
contact the secondary SNTP server.
Primary SNTP Server Port
Secondary SNTP Server
Port
Type the port number (1-65535).
The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary SNTP
server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will contact the
secondary SNTP port.
Synchronization Interval Type the number of hours between server synchronization attempts (1-168
hours).
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
376
Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users
Technical Information for Advanced Users
•Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
•Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
377
Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network,
you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based
Management (web browser).
• Use a straight-through Category 5e (or greater) twisted-pair cable. When you connect the machine to a
Gigabit Ethernet Network, use the network devices complying with 1000BASE-T.
Related Information
•Technical Information for Advanced Users
•Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
378
Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network
Only) > Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click Wired.
6. Click Ethernet in the left navigation bar.
7. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list.
8. Click Submit.
9. To enable the settings, restart your machine.
You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report.
Related Information
•Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
•Print the Network Configuration Report
379
Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users > Reset the Network Settings to the Factory
Settings
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
You can use your machine's control panel to reset the print server to its default factory settings. This resets all
information, such as the password and IP address.
• This feature restores all wired (supported models only) and wireless network settings to the factory
settings.
• You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using BRAdmin Light, BRAdmin Professional,
or Web Based Management.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]
appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
The machine will restart.
Related Information
•Technical Information for Advanced Users
380
Home > Security
Security
•Lock the Machine Settings
•Network Security Features
381
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings
Lock the Machine Settings
Before turning on the machine's Access Lock, make a careful note of your password. If you forget the password,
you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother customer service.
•Setting Lock Overview
•Customisation of Your Machine
382
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > Setting Lock Overview
Setting Lock Overview
Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorised access to machine settings.
When Setting Lock is set to On, you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password.
•Set the Setting Lock Password
•Change the Setting Lock Password
•Turn Setting Lock On
•Restrict Specific Machine Settings
383
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > Setting Lock Overview > Set the Setting Lock Password
Set the Setting Lock Password
>> DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
>> MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
3. Press [OK].
4. When the LCD displays [Verify], re-enter the password.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press .
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Admin Settings] > [Password].
This password is also valid for other [Admin Settings] features and Web Based Management login.
2. Type the password you want to use. (8 to 32 characters), and then press [OK].
3. When the LCD displays [Verify], retype the password, and then press [OK].
4. When the machine prompts you to select next step, choose your selection.
5. Press .
Related Information
•Setting Lock Overview
384
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > Setting Lock Overview > Change the Setting Lock
Password
Change the Setting Lock Password
>> DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
>> MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set
Password].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
4. Enter a new four-digit password.
5. Press [OK].
6. When the LCD displays [Verify], re-enter the password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press .
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Admin Settings].
2. Type the current password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Password].
4. Type the current password again, and then press [OK].
5. Type a new password you want to use (8 to 32 characters), and then press [OK].
6. When the LCD displays [Verify], retype the password, and then press [OK].
7. Press .
Related Information
•Setting Lock Overview
385
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > Setting Lock Overview > Turn Setting Lock On
Turn Setting Lock On
>> DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
>> MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock
Off⇒On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
To turn Setting Lock off, press on the LCD, enter the current four-digit password, and then press [OK].
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Admin Settings].
2. Type the current password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock] > [On].
4. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, choose your selection.
To turn Setting Lock off, repeat the step 1 and 2, and then press [Restriction Management] >
[Setting Lock] > [Off].
Related Information
•Setting Lock Overview
386
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > Setting Lock Overview > Restrict Specific Machine Settings
Restrict Specific Machine Settings
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Press [Admin Settings].
2. Enter the current Administrator password, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock Details].
4. Choose the machine settings you want to restrict, and then press [OK].
5. Press .
Related Information
•Setting Lock Overview
387
Home > Security > Network Security Features
Network Security Features
•Before Using Network Security Features
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
•Use Active Directory® Authentication
•Use LDAP Authentication
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
•Send or Receive an Email Securely
•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
•Store Print Log to Network
•Customisation of Your Machine
388
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Before Using Network Security Features
Before Using Network Security Features
Your Brother machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today.
These network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and
prevent unauthorised access to the machine.
We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these
protocols is not secure.
Related Information
•Network Security Features
389
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0
Secure Function Lock 3.0
Brother's Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your Brother
machine.
•Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
•Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
•Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
•Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
•Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
•Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
390
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Before Using Secure Function
Lock 3.0
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all
of the functions listed here.
You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management
or BRAdmin Professional (Windows®):
•Print
Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Google Cloud Print™ and Brother iPrint&Scan.
If you register users' login names in advance, the users do not need to enter their passwords when they use
the print function.
•Color Print
•Copy
•Scan
Scan includes scan jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan.
•Send (supported models only)
•Receive (supported models only)
• USB Direct Print
• Scan to USB (supported models only)
•Web Connect (supported models only)
•Apps (supported models only)
•Page Limits
•Page Counters
•Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
If you register users' Card IDs in advance, registered users can activate the machine by touching their
registered cards to the machines' NFC symbol.
Related Information
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
391
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Secure Function
Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select Secure Function Lock.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click the Restricted Functions menu in the left navigation bar.
9. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name.
10. In the Print and the other columns, select a check box to allow or clear a check box to restrict the function
listed.
11. To configure the maximum page count, select the On check box in the Page Limits column, and then type
the maximum number in the Max. Pages field.
12. Click Submit.
13. Click the User List menu in the left navigation bar.
14. In the User List field, type the user name.
15. In the PIN Number field, type a four-digit password.
16. In the E-mail Address field, type the user's email address (Available only for certain models).
17. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (Available only for certain
models) .
18. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.
19. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
392
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Scan Using Secure Function
Lock 3.0
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Setting Scan restrictions (for administrators)
Secure Function Lock 3.0 allows an administrator to restrict which users are allowed to scan. When the Scan
feature is set to Off for the public user setting, only users who have the Scan check box selected will be able to
scan.
Using the Scan feature (for restricted users)
• To scan using the machine's control panel:
Restricted users must enter their PINs on the machine's control panel to access Scan mode.
• To scan from a computer:
Restricted users must enter their PINs on the machine's control panel before scanning from their computers.
If the PIN is not entered on the machine's control panel, an error message will appear on the user's computer.
Related Information
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
393
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Public Mode for
Secure Function Lock 3.0
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users.
Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode
settings.
Public Mode includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Google Cloud Print™ and Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select Secure Function Lock.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
9. In the Public Mode row, select a check box to allow or clear a check box to restrict the function listed.
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
•Register Your Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Web Based Management
394
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Additional Secure Function
Lock 3.0 Features
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen:
All Counter Reset
Click All Counter Reset, in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter.
Export to CSV file
Click Export to CSV file, to export the current page counter including User List / Restricted Functions
information as a CSV file.
Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
Click the User List menu, and then type a users' Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your ID
card for authentication.
Last Counter Record
Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset.
Counter Auto Reset
Click Counter Auto Reset to configure the time interval you want between page counter reset. Choose a
daily, weekly, or monthly interval.
Related Information
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
395
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Register a new ID Card Using
the Machine's Control Panel
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Touch the NFC symbol on the machine's control panel with a registered ID Card.
2. Touch your user ID on the machine's control panel.
3. Press [Register Card].
4. Touch a new ID Card to the NFC symbol.
The new ID Card's number is registered to the machine.
For the supported ID Card types, go to the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see the
FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
5. Press [OK].
Related Information
•Secure Function Lock 3.0
396
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory® Authentication
Use Active Directory® Authentication
•Introduction to Active Directory® Authentication
•Configure Active Directory® Authentication Using Web Based Management
•Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active
Directory® Authentication)
397
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory® Authentication > Introduction to
Active Directory® Authentication
Introduction to Active Directory® Authentication
Active Directory® Authentication restricts the use of your Brother machine. If Active Directory® Authentication is
enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a
User ID and password.
Active Directory® Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data
• Obtains the email address from the Active Directory® server based on your User ID, when sending scanned
data to an email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting and LDAP + kerberos
authentication method. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data
to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email address.
When Active Directory® Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on,
the machine prints the stored fax data.
You can change the Active Directory® Authentication settings using Web Based Management or BRAdmin
Professional (Windows®).
Related Information
•Use Active Directory® Authentication
398
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory® Authentication > Configure Active
Directory® Authentication Using Web Based Management
Configure Active Directory® Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Active Directory® authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must
configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select Active Directory Authentication.
7. Click Submit.
8. Select Active Directory Authentication in the left navigation bar.
9. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Storage PC Print Data Select this option to store incoming print data. After you log on to the
machine, your PC print jobs will be printed automatically. This feature is
available only for print data created by a Brother native printer driver.
Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax
data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
Active Directory Server
Address
Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of
the Active Directory® Server.
Active Directory Domain
Name
Type the Active Directory® domain name.
Protocol & Authentication
Method
Select the protocol and authentication method.
Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the Active
Directory® server.(available only for LDAP + kerberos authentication
method)
Get User's Home
Directory
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network
destination. (available only for LDAP + kerberos authentication method)
LDAP Server Port Type the port number to connect the Active Directory® server via LDAP
(available only for LDAP + kerberos authentication method).
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root (available only for LDAP + kerberos
authentication method).
10. Click Submit.
399
Related Information
•Use Active Directory® Authentication
400
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory® Authentication > Log On to Change
the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory® Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (Active Directory® Authentication)
When Active Directory® Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter
your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, use the touchscreen to enter your User ID and Password.
2. Press [OK].
3. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel will be unlocked.
Related Information
•Use Active Directory® Authentication
401
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication
Use LDAP Authentication
•Introduction to LDAP Authentication
•Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
•Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP
Authentication)
402
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP
Authentication
Introduction to LDAP Authentication
LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your Brother machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's
control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.
LDAP Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data
• Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an
email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting. Your email address will be set as
the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send
the scanned data to your email address.
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine
prints the stored fax data.
You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management or BRAdmin Professional
(Windows®).
Related Information
•Use LDAP Authentication
403
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP
Authentication Using Web Based Management
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Select LDAP Authentication.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click LDAP Authentication in the left navigation bar.
9. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Storage PC Print Data Select this option to store incoming print data. After you log on to the
machine, your PC print jobs will be printed automatically. This feature is
available only for print data created by a Brother native printer driver.
Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax
data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
LDAP Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ldap.example.com) of
the LDAP server.
Get Mail Address 1 Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the LDAP
server.
Get User's Home
Directory 1
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network
destination.
LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number.
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root directory.
Attribute of Name (Search
Key)
Type the attribute you want to use as a search key.
1If this option is not available, update your machine's firmware. Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center
at support.brother.com.
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Use LDAP Authentication
404
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the
Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (LDAP Authentication)
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID
and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, use the touchscreen to enter your User ID and Password.
2. Press [OK].
3. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel will be unlocked.
Related Information
•Use LDAP Authentication
405
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
•Introduction to SSL/TLS
•Certificates and Web Based Management
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using Web Based Management
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using BRAdmin Professional (Windows®)
•Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
406
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS
Introduction to SSL/TLS
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over
a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network,
so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it.
SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such
as WPA keys and firewalls.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
•Brief History of SSL/TLS
•Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
407
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Brief History of SSL/TLS
Brief History of SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers
and servers. For example, when you use Internet Explorer® for Internet Banking and you see https:// and the little
padlock icon in the web browser, you are using SSL. SSL grew to work with additional applications, such as
Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to become a universal solution for online security. Its original design
intentions are still being used today by many online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit
card numbers, customer records, etc.
SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world.
Related Information
•Introduction to SSL/TLS
408
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS on Brother machines is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by
restricting unauthorised users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's key selling point is that it can be
used to print confidential data securely. For example, an HR department in a large company may be printing
wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read by other
network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a confusing page of code and
not the actual wage slip.
Related Information
•Introduction to SSL/TLS
409
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management
Certificates and Web Based Management
You must configure a certificate to manage your networked Brother machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must
use Web Based Management to configure a certificate.
•Supported Security Certificate Features
•Create and Install a Certificate
•Manage Multiple Certificates
410
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Supported Security Certificate Features
Supported Security Certificate Features
Your Brother machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management,
authentication, and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with
the machine:
• SSL/TLS communication
• SSL communication for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (only available for certain models)
• IEEE 802.1x authentication
• IPsec
The Brother machine supports the following:
• Pre-installed certificate
Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate.
The pre-installed self-signed certificate cannot protect your communication from being compromised. We
recommend using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organisation for better security.
• Self-signed certificate
This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA.
• Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if
you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA:
- When using a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from this print server.
- When importing a certificate and a private key.
• Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate
To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate
from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network.
• If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator
first.
• When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key
that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after
resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them.
Related Information
•Certificates and Web Based Management
411
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate
Create and Install a Certificate
•Step by Step Guide for Creating and Installing a Certificate
•Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate
•Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
•Import and Export a CA Certificate
412
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Step by Step Guide for
Creating and Installing a Certificate
Step by Step Guide for Creating and Installing a Certificate
There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA).
These are a brief summary of the actions required, based on the option you choose.
Option 1
Self-Signed Certificate
1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer.
Option 2
Certificate from a CA
1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management.
2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management.
3. Install the certificate on your computer.
Related Information
•Create and Install a Certificate
413
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-
signed Certificate
Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate
•Create a Self-signed Certificate
•Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows® users with Administrator Rights
•Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine
414
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-
signed Certificate > Create a Self-signed Certificate
Create a Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate.
8. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date.
• The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node
name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node
name is displayed by default.
• A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than
the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate.
9. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
10. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
11. Click Submit.
12. Click Network.
13. Click Protocol.
14. Click HTTP Server Settings.
15. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list.
16. Click Submit.
The following screen appears.
415
17. Click Yes to restart your print server.
The self-signed certificate is created and saved in your machine's memory.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the self-signed certificate must be installed on your computer.
Related Information
•Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate
416
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-
signed Certificate > Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows® users with Administrator Rights
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows® users with
Administrator Rights
The following steps are for Microsoft® Internet Explorer®. If you use another web browser, consult the
documentation for your web browser to get help with installing certificates.
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008)
Click (Start) > All Programs.
• (Windows® 8 )
Right-click the (Internet Explorer) icon on the taskbar.
• (Windows® 10 and Windows Server® 2016)
Click Windows Accessories.
• (Windows Server® 2012 and Windows Server® 2012 R2)
Click (Internet Explorer), and then right-click the (Internet Explorer) icon that appears on the
taskbar.
2. Right-click Internet Explorer, and then click Run as administrator.
If the More option appears, click More.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes.
3. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar to access your machine (where "machine's
IP address" is the machine's IP address or the node name that you assigned for the certificate).
417
4. Click Continue to this website (not recommended).
5. Click Certificate error, and then click View certificates.
6. Click Install Certificate....
418
7. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next.
8. Select Place all certificates in the following store, and then click Browse....
9. Select Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click OK.
10. Click Next.
419
11. Click Finish.
12. Click Yes, if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct.
The fingerprint (thumbprint) is printed on the Network Configuration Report.
13. Click OK.
The self-signed certificate is now installed on your computer, and SSL/TLS communication is available.
Related Information
•Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate
420
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-
signed Certificate > Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine
Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine
You can store the self-signed certificates on your Brother machine and manage them by importing and exporting.
•Import the Self-signed Certificate
•Export the Self-signed Certificate
421
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-
signed Certificate > Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine > Import the Self-
signed Certificate
Import the Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.
8. Browse to the file you want to import.
9. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.
The self-signed certificate is imported to your machine.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the self-signed certificate must also be installed on your computer. Contact your
network administrator.
Related Information
•Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine
422
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-
signed Certificate > Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine > Export the Self-
signed Certificate
Export the Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Export shown with Certificate List.
8. If you want to encrypt the file, type a password in the Enter password field.
If the Enter password field is blank, your output file will not be encrypted.
9. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit.
10. Click Save.
11. Specify the location where you want to save the file.
The self-signed certificate is exported to your computer.
You can also import the self-signed certificate to your computer.
Related Information
•Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine
423
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a
Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
If you already have a certificate from an external trusted CA, you can store the certificate and private key on the
machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate from an external trusted
CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and install the returned
certificate on your machine.
•Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
•Install a Certificate on Your Brother Machine
•Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
424
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a
Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the
credentials contained within the certificate.
We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Create CSR.
8. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional).
• Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside
world.
• The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP
address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this printer through SSL/TLS
communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required.
• A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for
the certificate.
• The length of the Organization, the Organization Unit, the City/Locality and the State/Province must
be less than 64 bytes.
• The Country/Region should be a two character ISO 3166 country code.
• If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition check
box, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual.
9. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
10. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
11. Click Submit.
The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form
offered by a Certificate Authority.
425
12. Click Save.
• Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA.
• If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server® 2008/2012/2012 R2/2016, we recommend
using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If you are
creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we
recommend using User for the certificate template. For more information, go to your model's page on
the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
426
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a
Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Install a Certificate on Your Brother Machine
Install a Certificate on Your Brother Machine
When you receive a certificate from a CA, follow the steps below to install it into the print server:
Only a certificate issued with your machine's CSR can be installed onto the machine. When you want to create
another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating another CSR. Create another CSR only
after installing the certificate on the machine. If you do not, the CSR you create before installing will be invalid.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Install Certificate.
8. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit.
The certificate has been created successfully and saved in your machine's memory successfully.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact
your network administrator.
Related Information
•Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
427
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a
Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them.
•Import a Certificate and Private Key
•Export the Certificate and Private Key
428
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a
Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key > Import a
Certificate and Private Key
Import a Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.
8. Browse to the file you want to import.
9. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.
The certificate and private key are imported to your machine.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must also be installed on your computer.
Contact your network administrator.
Related Information
•Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
429
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a
Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key > Export the
Certificate and Private Key
Export the Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click Certificate.
7. Click Export shown with Certificate List.
8. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file.
If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted.
9. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit.
10. Click Save.
11. Specify the location where you want to save the file.
The certificate and private key are exported to your computer.
You can also import the certificate to your computer.
Related Information
•Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
430
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Import and Export a CA
Certificate
Import and Export a CA Certificate
You can import, export and store CA certificates on your Brother machine.
•Import a CA Certificate
•Export a CA Certificate
431
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Import and Export a CA
Certificate > Import a CA Certificate
Import a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click CA Certificate.
7. Click Import CA Certificate.
8. Browse to the file you want to import.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Import and Export a CA Certificate
432
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Import and Export a CA
Certificate > Export a CA Certificate
Export a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click CA Certificate.
7. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export.
8. Click Submit.
9. Click Save.
10. Specify where on your computer you want to save the exported certificate, and save it.
Related Information
•Import and Export a CA Certificate
433
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Manage Multiple Certificates
Manage Multiple Certificates
The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed
on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view
certificate content, delete, or export your certificates.
Maximum Number of Certificates Stored UP on Brother Machine
Self-signed Certificate or
Certificate Issued by a CA
6
CA Certificate 10
We recommend storing one less certificate than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration.
When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate.
This ensures that you avoid configuration failure.
• When you use HTTPS/IPPS, IEEE 802.1x, or Signed PDF, you must select which certificate you are
using.
• When you use SSL for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 communications (only available for certain models), you do
not have to choose the certificate. The necessary certificate will be chosen automatically.
Related Information
•Certificates and Web Based Management
434
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using Web Based Management
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using Web Based Management
To manage your network machine securely, you must use management utilities with security protocols.
We recommend using the HTTPS protocol for secure management. To use this protocol, HTTPS must be
enabled on your machine.
• The HTTPS protocol is enabled by default.
• You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using the Web Based Management screen.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS.
• If you use the SNMPv3 protocol, follow the steps below.
• You can also change the SNMP settings by using BRAdmin Professional.
5. Click the Network tab.
6. Click Protocol.
7. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings.
8. Configure the SNMP settings.
There are three options for SNMP Mode of Operation.
•SNMP v1/v2c read-write access
In this mode, the print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all
Brother applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not authenticate the user, and data
will not be encrypted.
•SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access
435
In this mode, the print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of version
1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol.
When you use SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access mode, some Brother
applications (such as BRAdmin Light) that access the print server do not work correctly since they authorize
the read-only access of version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend using
SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.
•SNMPv3 read-write access
In this mode, the print server uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print server
securely, use this mode.
When you use SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following:
- You can use only BRAdmin Professional or Web Based Management to manage the print server.
- Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will be restricted. To allow the
use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or
SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
436
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using BRAdmin Professional (Windows®)
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using BRAdmin Professional
(Windows®)
To use BRAdmin Professional utility, you must:
• Use the latest version of BRAdmin Professional. Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother
Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
• Use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol if you use BRAdmin Professional and Web Based
Management together.
• Use a different password in each group if you are managing a mixed group of older and newer print servers
with BRAdmin Professional. This will ensure security is maintained on the newer print servers.
• "Older versions of BRAdmin" refer to BRAdmin Professional older than Ver. 2.80 and BRAdmin Light for
Mac older than Ver.1.10.
• "Older print servers" refer to NC-2000 series, NC-2100p, NC-3100h, NC-3100s, NC-4100h, NC-5100h,
NC-5200h, NC-6100h, NC-6200h, NC-6300h, NC-6400h, NC-8000, NC-100h, NC-110h, NC-120w,
NC-130h, NC-140w, NC-8100h, NC-9100h, NC-7100w, NC-7200w and NC-2200w.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
437
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/
TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click Protocol. Make sure the IPP check box is selected.
If the IPP check box is not selected, select the IPP check box, and then click Submit.
Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, click the Network tab, and then click
Protocol.
6. Click HTTP Server Settings.
7. Select the HTTPS(Port443) check box in the IPP, and then click Submit.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorised access to the print server.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
438
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
•Introduction to IPsec
•Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
•Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
439
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Introduction to IPsec
Introduction to IPsec
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent
manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried over
the network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network
layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use.
IPsec supports the following functions:
• IPsec transmissions
According to the IPsec setting conditions, the network-connected computer sends data to and receives data
from the specified device using IPsec. When the devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are
exchanged using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the
keys.
In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is
used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a
Virtual Private Network (VPN).
For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary:
- A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network.
- Your Brother machine is configured for IPsec communication.
- The computer connected to your Brother machine is configured for IPsec connections.
• IPsec settings
The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web
Based Management.
To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
440
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
The IPsec connection conditions are comprised of two Template types: Address and IPsec. You can configure
up to 10 connection conditions.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click the IPsec menu in the left navigation bar.
7. In the Status field, enable or disable IPsec.
8. Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1.
IKE is a protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication
using IPsec.
441
In Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is high. In Aggressive mode, the processing
speed is faster than Main mode, but the security is lower.
9. In the All Non-IPsec Traffic field, select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets.
When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec Traffic. If you select Drop, Web
Services cannot be used.
10. In the Broadcast/Multicast Bypass field, select Enabled or Disabled.
11. In the Protocol Bypass field, select the check box for the option or options you want.
12. In the Rules table, select the Enabled check box to activate the template.
When you select multiple check boxes, the lower numbered check boxes have priority if the settings for the
selected check boxes conflict.
13. Click on the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address Template that is used for the IPsec
connection conditions.
To add an Address Template, click Add Template.
14. Click on the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template that is used for the IPsec connection
conditions.
To add an IPsec Template, click Add Template.
15. Click Submit.
If the machine must be restarted to register the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear.
If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm
your choices and click Submit again.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
442
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click the IPsec Address Template menu in the left navigation bar.
The Template List appears, displaying 10 Address Templates.
Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template. When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
7. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears.
8. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
9. Select a Local IP Address option to specify the IP address conditions for the sender:
•IP Address
Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address, ALL IPv6 Address, ALL Link Local IPv6, or Custom
from the drop-down list.
If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
•IP Address Range
Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address range in the text boxes. If the starting and
ending IP addresses are not standardized to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is smaller than the
starting address, an error will occur.
•IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
443
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the
addresses 192.168.1.xxx are valid.
10. Select a Remote IP Address option to specify the IP address conditions for the recipient:
•Any
If you select Any, all IP addresses are enabled.
•IP Address
Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
•IP Address Range
Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address range. If the starting and ending IP
addresses are not standardized to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is smaller than the starting
address, an error will occur.
•IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the
addresses 192.168.1.xxx are valid.
11. Click Submit.
When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to active the
configuration.
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
444
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Click IPsec Template in the left navigation bar.
The Template List appears, displaying 10 IPsec Templates.
Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template. When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
7. Click IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration fields
differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) you select.
8. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
9. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed.
10. Click Submit.
445
Related Information
•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec
•IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
•IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
•Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
446
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
Template Name
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
447
Use Prefixed Template
Select Custom, IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security. The setting items are different depending
on the selected template.
The default template differs depending on whether you chose Main or Aggressive for Negotiation Mode
on the IPsec configuration screen.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted
communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm
that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are
exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to
IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv1.
Authentication Type
Configure the IKE authentication and encryption.
•Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network.
The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send
and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
•Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
•Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
•SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
•Protocol
Select ESP, AH or AH+ESP.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload
(communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet is comprised of the header
and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet
also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data,
and so on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the
completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the header. In
addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the
communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is
sent and received as plain text.
•Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
•Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
When AH+ESP is selected in Protocol, select each protocol for Hash(ESP) and Hash(AH).
•SA Lifetime
Specify the IPsec SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte) before the IPsec SA will expire.
448
•Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
•Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel
mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and
shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure
communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption
method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key
Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is
used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys.
Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted
using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method
Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or Certificates.
Pre-Shared Key
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another
channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32
characters).
•Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
•Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the certificate.
You can select only the certificates that were created using the Certificate page of Web Based
Management's Security configuration screen.
Related Information
•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
449
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
Template Name
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
450
Use Prefixed Template
Select Custom, IKEv2 High Security, or IKEv2 Medium Security. The setting items are different depending
on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted
communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm
that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are
exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to
IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv2.
Authentication Type
Configure the IKE authentication and encryption.
•Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network.
The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send
and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
•Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
•Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
•SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
•Protocol
Select ESP.
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload
(communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet is comprised of the header and
the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also
includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
•Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
•Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
•SA Lifetime
Specify the IPsec SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte) before the IPsec SA will expire.
•Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
•Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel
mode is selected.
451
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and
shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure
communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption
method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key
Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is
used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys.
Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted
using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method
Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key, Certificates, EAP - MD5, or EAP - MS-CHAPv2.
Pre-Shared Key
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another
channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32
characters).
•Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
•Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the certificate.
You can select only the certificates that were created using the Certificate page of Web Based
Management's Security configuration screen.
EAP
EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP. By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key
is used for user authentication during each session.
The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in
Authentication Method:
•Mode
Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode.
•Certificate
Select the certificate.
•User Name
Type the user name (up to 32 characters).
•Password
Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password must be entered two times for confirmation.
452
Related Information
•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
453
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using
IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > Manual Settings for an IPsec
Template
Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Template Name
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template
Select Custom.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted
communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm
that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are
exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to
IKE is carried out.
454
Select Manual.
Authentication Key (ESP,AH)
Specify the key to use for authentication. Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for
Internet Key Exchange (IKE), and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for Encapsulating
Security section.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Hash in the
Encapsulating Security section.
If the length of the specified authentication key is different than the selected hash algorithm, an error will
occur.
•MD5: 128 bits (16 bytes)
•SHA1: 160 bits (20 bytes)
•SHA256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
•SHA384: 384 bits (48 bytes)
•SHA512: 512 bits (64 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks (").
Code key (ESP)
Specify the key to use for encryption. Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected in Use Prefixed Template, Manual is selected in
Internet Key Exchange (IKE), and ESP is selected in Protocol in Encapsulating Security.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Encryption in the
Encapsulating Security section.
If the length of the specified code key is different than the selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur.
•DES: 64 bits (8 bytes)
•3DES: 192 bits (24 bytes)
•AES-CBC 128: 128 bits (16 bytes)
•AES-CBC 256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks (").
SPI
These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a host has multiple Security
Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the
applicable SA when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies the SA, is included in
the Authentication Header (AH) and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use Prefixed Template, and Manual is selected
for Internet Key Exchange (IKE).
Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters)
Encapsulating Security
•Protocol
Select ESP or AH.
455
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload
(communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet is comprised of the header
and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet
also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data,
and so on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation of the data
(ensures the completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the
header. In addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the
communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is
sent and received as plain text.
•Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
•Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512. None can be selected only when ESP is
selected in Protocol.
•SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte) before the IPsec SA will expire.
•Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
•Remote Router IP-Address
Specify the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the connection destination. Enter this information only when the
Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and
shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure
communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption
method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key
Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.
Related Information
•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
456
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely
Send or Receive an Email Securely
•Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
•Send an Email with User Authentication
•Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
457
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Configure Email
Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication,
or email sending and receiving using SSL/TLS.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
6. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of POP3/IMAP4/SMTP
is Enabled.
7. Configure the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP settings.
• Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email.
• If you do not know the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
8. When finished, click Submit.
The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.
9. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.
Related Information
•Send or Receive an Email Securely
458
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send an Email with
User Authentication
Send an Email with User Authentication
Your Brother machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user
authentication. This method prevents unauthorised users from accessing the email server.
You can use SMTP-AUTH for email notification, email reports and I-Fax.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication.
Email Server Settings
You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server.
For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
To enable SMTP server authentication: in the Web Based Management POP3/IMAP4/SMTP screen, under
Server Authentication Method, you must select SMTP-AUTH.
Related Information
•Send or Receive an Email Securely
459
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send or Receive an
Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Your Brother machine supports SSL/TLS methods to send or receive an email via an email server that requires
secure SSL/TLS communication. To send or receive email via an email server that is using SSL/TLS
communication, you must configure SMTP over SSL/TLS, POP3 over SSL/TLS, or IMAP4 over SSL/TLS.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS.
Verify Server Certificate
Under SSL/TLS, if you choose SSL or TLS, the Verify Server Certificate check box will be selected
automatically.
460
461
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed
the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to
confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary.
• If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate check box.
Port Number
If you select SSL or TLS for SMTP, POP3, or IMAP4, the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To
change the port number manually, type the port number after you choose SSL or TLS for the SSL/TLS settings.
You must configure your machine's POP3/IMAP4/SMTP communication method to match the method used by
your email server. For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP.
In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings:
SMTP Port 25
Server Authentication Method SMTP-AUTH
SSL/TLS TLS
POP3 Port 995
SSL/TLS SSL
IMAP4 Port 993
SSL/TLS SSL
Related Information
•Send or Receive an Email Securely
462
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless
Network
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
•What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
•Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network Using Web
Based Management (Web Browser)
•IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
463
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless
Network > What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard for wired and wireless networks that limits access from unauthorised network
devices. Your Brother machine (supplicant) sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication
server) through your access point or HUB. After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your
machine can access the network.
Related Information
•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
464
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless
Network > Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued
by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If
you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to
use.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate that has been issued by the CA
that signed the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider
(ISP) to confirm whether a CA certificate import is necessary.
You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using:
• BRAdmin Professional (Wired and wireless network)
• Wireless setup wizard from the control panel (Wireless network)
• Wireless setup wizard on the installation disc (Wireless network)
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Do one of the following:
Option Description
Wired network Click the Wired tab, and then select Wired 802.1x Authentication in the left navigation
bar.
Wireless network Click the Wireless tab, and then select Wireless (Enterprise) in the left navigation bar.
6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.
465
• To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on
the Wired 802.1x Authentication page.
• If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate that has been installed
(shown with certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list.
• If you select EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method
from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA
certificate, imported to the machine in advance, that has been issued by the CA that signed the server
certificate.
Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list:
Option Description
No Verification The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed.
CA Cert. The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the
CA certificate that has been issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
CA Cert. + ServerID The verification method to check the common name 1 value of the server certificate,
in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate.
7. When finished with configuration, click Submit.
For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a
few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the <Wired IEEE 802.1x> Status.
Option Description
Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful.
Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed.
Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available.
Related Information
•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
1The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID.
Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID.
466
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless
Network > IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
LEAP (Wireless network)
Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP) is a proprietary EAP method developed by Cisco
Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication.
EAP-FAST
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been
developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key
algorithms to achieve a tunnelled authentication process.
The Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods:
• EAP-FAST/NONE
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-FAST/GTC
EAP-MD5 (Wired network)
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for
challenge-response authentication.
PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco
Systems, Inc., Microsoft® Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user
ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.
The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
• PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by
Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client
and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication
between the server and the client.
The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• EAP-TTLS/CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate
authentication both at a client and an authentication server.
Related Information
•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
467
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network
Store Print Log to Network
•Store Log to Network Overview
•Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management
•Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
•Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
468
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Store Log to Network
Overview
Store Log to Network Overview
The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your Brother machine to a
network server using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job,
job name, user name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs
over TCP/IP, allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet.
The following print functions are recorded in the print log:
• Print jobs from your computer
• USB Direct Print
• Copy
• Received Fax (supported models only)
• Web Connect Print (supported models only)
• The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication.
You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for authentication.
• You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server.
Related Information
•Store Print Log to Network
469
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log
to Network Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based
Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the Store Print Log to Network menu.
6. In the Print Log field, click On.
7. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Network Folder
Path
Type the destination folder where your log will be stored on the CIFS server (i.e., \
\ComputerName\SharedFolder).
File Name Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters).
File Type Select the TXT or CSV option for the Print Log file type.
Auth. Method Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto,
Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or
individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on.
NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows® to log into servers.
•Auto: If you select Auto, NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method.
•Kerberos: Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only.
•NTLMv2: Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only.
• For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure the
Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS
server.
• You can also configure the Date & Time settings from the machine's
control panel.
Username Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters).
If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
Password Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters).
Kerberos
Server
Address (if
needed)
Type the KDC host address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or
the IP address (for example: 192.168.56.189).
Error Detection
Setting
Choose what action should be taken when the Print Log cannot be stored to the server
due to a network error.
8. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status.
470
You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine.
9. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
10. The machine will test your settings.
11. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
•Store Print Log to Network
471
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to
Network's Error Detection Setting
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the
server due to a network error.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the Store Print Log to Network menu in the left navigation bar.
6. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option.
Option Description
Cancel
Print
If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are cancelled when the print log cannot be
stored to the server.
Even if you select the Cancel Print option, your machine will print a received fax.
Ignore
Log &
Print
If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the
print log cannot be stored to the server.
When the store print log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows:
a. If the log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the print log except the number of printed
pages will be recorded.
b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of the
job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the log.
7. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
8. The machine will test your settings.
9. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
•Store Print Log to Network
472
Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Use Store Print Log to
Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
When Secure Function Lock 3.0 is active, the names of the registered users for copy, Fax RX, Web Connect
Print and USB Direct Print (if available) are recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report. When the Active
Directory® Authentication is enabled, logged on user name will be recorded in the Store Print Log to Network
report:
Related Information
•Store Print Log to Network
473
Home > Mobile/Web Connect
Mobile/Web Connect
•Brother Web Connect
•Google Cloud Print
•AirPrint
•Mobile Printing for Windows®
•Mopria® Print Service
•Brother iPrint&Scan
•Near-Field Communication (NFC)
474
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect
Brother Web Connect
•Brother Web Connect Overview
•Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
•Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect
•Set Up Brother Web Connect
•Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
•Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•NotePrint and NoteScan
475
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview
Brother Web Connect Overview
Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the websites. Your
Brother machine can scan images and upload them to these services, and also download and print images that
are already uploaded to these services.
1. Printing
2. Scanning
3. Photos, images, documents and other files
4. Web Service
To use Brother Web Connect, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to the
Internet, through either a wired or wireless connection.
For network setups that use a proxy server, the machine must also be configured to use a proxy server. If you
are unsure of your network configuration, check with your network administrator.
A proxy server is a computer that serves as an intermediary between computers without a direct Internet
connection, and the Internet.
Related Information
•Brother Web Connect
476
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Use Brother Web Connect to access services from your Brother machine:
To use Brother Web Connect, you must have an account with the online service you want to use. If you do not
already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
You do not need to create an account to use Brother CreativeCenter.
Google Drive™
An online document storage, editing, sharing and file synchronization service.
URL: drive.google.com
Flickr®
An online photo sharing service. Images can be uploaded, organised into albums, and shared with other
users.
URL: www.flickr.com
Facebook
A social networking service that also allows images to be uploaded and shared with other users.
URL: www.facebook.com
Evernote®
An online file storage and management service.
URL: www.evernote.com
Dropbox
An online file storage, sharing and synchronization service.
URL: www.dropbox.com
OneDrive®
An online file storage, sharing and managing service.
URL: onedrive.live.com
Box
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.box.com
OneNote®
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.onenote.com
Brother CreativeCenter
A website that offers various templates, such as greeting cards, brochures and calendars that you can print on
your Brother machine (available only for certain countries).
www.brother.com/creativecenter
For more information about any of these services, refer to the respective service's website.
The following table describes which file types can be used with each Brother Web Connect feature:
477
Accessible
Services
Flickr®
Facebook
Google Drive™
Evernote®
Dropbox
OneDrive®
Box
OneNote®
Brother CreativeCenter
Download and print
images
JPEG JPEG
PDF
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX 1
(Print only)
Upload scanned
images
JPEG JPEG
PDF 2
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX
TIFF
XPS
-
FaxForward to the
online services
(available only for
certain models)
JPEG JPEG
PDF
TIFF
-
1DOC/XLS/PPT formats are also available for downloading and printing images.
2For upload scanned images, PDF includes Searchable PDF, Signed PDF, Secure PDF, PDF/A and High Compression PDF.
(For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea)
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
•Brother Web Connect
478
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect
Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect
•Brother Software Installation for Using Brother Web Connect
•Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Your Brother Machine's Control Panel
•Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
479
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Conditions for Using Brother Web
Connect > Brother Software Installation for Using Brother Web Connect
Brother Software Installation for Using Brother Web Connect
The initial installation of Brother Web Connect requires a computer that has access to the Internet and has the
Brother machine's software installed.
For Windows®:
To install the Brother Software and configure the machine to be able to print over your wired or wireless network,
see the Quick Setup Guide included with your Brother machine.
For Mac:
To install the Brother Software, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect
480
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Conditions for Using Brother Web
Connect > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Your Brother Machine's Control Panel
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Your Brother Machine's
Control Panel
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured on the machine:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Connect Settings] > [Proxy
Settings] > [Proxy Connection] > [On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option that you want to set, and then enter the proxy server information.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect
481
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Conditions for Using Brother Web
Connect > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured using Web
Based Management:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
We recommend Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 for Windows® and Safari 9 for Mac. Make sure that
JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
6. Make sure the Proxy check box is selected, and then click Submit.
7. In the Proxy field, click Advanced Settings.
8. Enter the proxy server information.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
•Conditions for Using Brother Web Connect
482
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect
Set Up Brother Web Connect
•Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
•Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
•Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
•Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
•Set Up Brother Web Connect for Brother CreativeCenter
483
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Brother Web
Connect Setup Overview
Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
Configure the Brother Web Connect settings using the following procedure (when using Brother CreativeCenter,
this procedure is not necessary):
Step 1: Create an account with the service you want to use.
Access the service's website using a computer and create an account. (If you already have an account, there
is no need to create an additional account.)
1. User registration
2. Web Service
3. Obtain account
Step 2: Apply for Brother Web Connect access.
Start Brother Web Connect access using a computer and obtain a temporary ID.
1. Enter account information
2. Brother Web Connect application page
3. Obtain temporary ID
Step 3: Register your account information on your machine so you can access the service you want to
use.
Enter the temporary ID to enable the service on your machine. Specify the account name as you would like it
to be displayed on the machine, and enter a PIN if you would like to use one.
1. Enter temporary ID
2. Web Service
Your Brother machine can now use the service.
Related Information
•Set Up Brother Web Connect
484
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Create an Account
for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web
Connect
To use Brother Web Connect to access an online service, you must have an account with that online service. If
you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
After creating an account, log on and use the account once with a computer before using the Brother Web
Connect feature. Otherwise, you may not be able to access the service using Brother Web Connect.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
After you finish creating an account with the online service you want to use, apply for Brother Web Connect
access.
You do not need to create an account if you use the service as a guest. You can use only certain services
as a guest. If the service you want to use does not have a guest-user option, you must create an account.
Related Information
•Set Up Brother Web Connect
485
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Apply for Brother
Web Connect Access
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
To use Brother Web Connect to access online services, you must first apply for Brother Web Connect access
using a computer that has the Brother Software installed.
1. Access the Brother Web Connect application website:
Option Description
Windows® 7 Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities, and then click the drop-
down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click Do More in the left
navigation bar, and then click Brother Web Connect.
Windows® 8
Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model
name (if not already selected). Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click
Brother Web Connect.
Windows® 8.1 Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are
using a touch-based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the
Apps screen).
Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model
name (if not already selected). Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click
Brother Web Connect.
Mac Click Go in the Finder bar, Applications > Brother > Utilities > Brother Web Connect.
You can also access the website directly:
Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
The Brother Web Connect page launches.
The first time you launch Brother Web Connect, you must select your country, language, and model name,
and then click Next to move to the next step, selecting the service you want.
486
2. Select the service you want to use.
The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and apply for access.
When finished, your temporary ID will appear.
487
4. Make a note of your temporary ID, as you will need it to register accounts to the machine. The temporary ID
is valid for 24 hours.
5. Close the web browser.
Now that you have a Brother Web Connect access ID, you must register this ID on your machine, and then use
your machine to access the web service you want to use.
Related Information
•Set Up Brother Web Connect
•Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
488
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Register an
Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
You must enter your Brother Web Connect account information and configure your machine so that it can use
Brother Web Connect to access the service you want.
• You must apply for Brother Web Connect access to register an account on your machine.
• Before you register an account, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine.
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. If the information regarding licence agreement appears, make your selection and follow the on-screen
instructions.
4. Select the service with which you want to register.
5. Press the service name.
6. If information regarding Brother Web Connect appears, press [OK].
7. Press [Register/Delete Account].
8. Press [Register Account].
The machine will prompt you to enter the temporary ID you received when you applied for Brother Web
Connect access.
9. Press [OK].
10. Enter the temporary ID using the LCD.
11. Press [OK].
An error message will appear on the LCD if the information you entered does not match the temporary ID
you received when you applied for access, or if the temporary ID has expired. Enter the temporary ID
correctly, or apply for access again to receive a new temporary ID.
The machine will prompt you to enter the account name that you want to be displayed on the LCD.
12. Press [OK].
13. Enter the name using the LCD.
14. Press [OK].
15. Do one of the following:
• To set a PIN for the account, press [Yes]. (A PIN prevents unauthorised access to the account.) Enter a
four-digit number, and then press [OK].
• If you do not want to set a PIN, press [No].
16. When the account information you entered appears, confirm that it is correct.
17. Press [Yes] to register your information as entered.
18. Press [OK].
19. Press .
Registration is complete and your machine can now access the service.
489
Related Information
•Set Up Brother Web Connect
•Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
490
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother
Web Connect for Brother CreativeCenter
Set Up Brother Web Connect for Brother CreativeCenter
Brother Web Connect is set up to work with Brother CreativeCenter automatically. No configuration is needed to
create the calendars, business cards, posters and greeting cards available at www.brother.com/creativecenter.
Brother CreativeCenter is not available in all countries.
Related Information
•Set Up Brother Web Connect
491
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web
Connect
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Upload your scanned photos and documents directly to a web service without using a computer.
• When scanning and uploading JPEG files, monochrome scanning is not available.
• When scanning and uploading Searchable PDF or Microsoft® Office files, monochrome and grey scanning
is not available.
• When scanning and uploading JPEG files, each page is uploaded as a separate file.
• Uploaded documents are saved in an album named From_BrotherDevice.
For information regarding restrictions, such as the size or number of documents that can be uploaded, refer to
the respective service's website.
If you are a restricted Web Connect user due to the Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain
models), you cannot upload the scanned data.
1. Load your document.
2. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
3. Press [Web].
• You can also press [Scan] > [to Web].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
4. Select the service that hosts the account to which you want to upload.
5. Select your account name.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•Brother Web Connect
492
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Documents that have been uploaded to your account can be downloaded directly to your machine and printed.
Documents that other users have uploaded to their own accounts for sharing can also be downloaded to your
machine and printed, as long as you have viewing privileges for those documents. Certain services allow guest
users to view documents that are public. When accessing a service or an account as a guest user, you can view
documents that the owner has made public, that is, documents with no viewing restrictions.
To download other users’ documents, you must have access privileges to view the corresponding albums or
documents.
If you are a restricted user for Web Connect due to the Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain
models), you cannot download the data.
The Secure Function Lock Page Limit feature applies to the print job using Web Connect.
For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
•Brother Web Connect
•Download and Print Using Web Services
•Download and Print Brother CreativeCenter Templates
493
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect > Download and Print Using Web Services
Download and Print Using Web Services
For information on Brother CreativeCenter Templates, see Related Information.
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select the service that hosts the document you want to download and print.
4. Select your account name. If the PIN entry screen appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK].
• To access the service as a guest user, select [Use Service as a Guest User]. When the
information regarding access as a guest user appears, press [OK]. Type the account name of the user
whose documents you want to download, and then press [OK].
• Depending on the service, you may have to select the account name from a list.
5. Press [Download to Print].
6. Select the album you want. Some services do not require documents to be saved in albums. For documents
not saved in albums, select [Show Unsorted Photos] or [Show Unsorted Files] to select
documents. Other users’ documents cannot be downloaded if they are not saved in an album.
• To download from Flickr® and Facebook, choose the album you want to download.
• An album is a collection of images. The actual term may differ depending on the service you use. When
using Evernote®, you must select the notebook, and then select the note.
7. Select the thumbnail of the document you want to print. Confirm the document on the LCD and then press
[OK]. Select additional documents to print (you can select up to 10 documents).
8. When finished, press [OK].
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•Download and Print Brother CreativeCenter Templates
494
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect > Download and Print Brother CreativeCenter Templates
Download and Print Brother CreativeCenter Templates
Brother CreativeCenter is not available in all countries.
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Print "CreativeCenter" Templates].
4. Select the category you want.
5. Select the category you want again.
6. Select the file you want. Enter the number of copies you want to print and then press [OK]. Repeat this step
until you have chosen all the files that you want to print.
7. After you have selected all of the files you want to print, press [OK].
If information regarding the recommended print settings appears on the machine’s LCD, read the
information and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•Download and Print Using Web Services
495
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
• Use the FaxForward to Cloud feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to your accounts with the
available online services.
1
1. Web Service
• Use the FaxForward to E-mail feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to an inbox as email
attachments.
Related Information
•Brother Web Connect
•Turn On FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
•Turn Off FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
496
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Turn On
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Turn On FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Turn on the FaxForward feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to either an online service or an inbox
as email attachments.
• If you are a restricted Web Connect user due to the Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain
models), you cannot upload the incoming faxes.
• This feature is available only for monochrome faxes.
• If you turn on the FaxForward to Cloud feature, you cannot use the following features:
-[Fax Forward]
-[Fax Storage]
-[PC Fax Receive]
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail].
If information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Forward to Cloud] or [Forward to E-mail].
• If you selected [Forward to Cloud], choose the online service you want to receive the faxes, and
then specify your account name.
• If you selected [Forward to E-mail], enter the email address you want to receive the faxes as email
attachments.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
497
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Turn Off
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Turn Off FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Turn off FaxForward when you want to stop incoming faxes from automatically going to either an online service
or an inbox as email attachments.
If there are received faxes still in your machine's memory, you cannot turn off the FaxForward to Cloud feature.
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail].
If information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK].
4. Press [Off].
5. Press [OK].
Related Information
•FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
498
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your
Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your Documents Using Brother
Web Connect
When you outline specific areas of a document using a red pen and then scan the document, the outlined areas
will be captured and can be processed as images in various ways.
Outline and Scan
When you use a red pen to outline sections of a document and then scan the document, the outlined areas
are extracted and saved to a cloud service as separate JPEG files.
1. Web Service
Copy Outlined Area (available only for some models)
When you use a red pen to outline sections of a document and then scan the document, the outlined areas
are extracted, rearranged and printed together.
Cut Outlined Area (available only for some models)
When you use a red pen to outline sections of a document and then scan the document, the outlined areas
are deleted and the remaining information is printed.
Outlining
Correct outline style Incorrect outline style
• Use a red pen or marker with a tip width of 1.0 mm-10.0 mm, that is, from an extra-fine tip up to an extra-
thick marker tip.
499
• Outlined areas with thick red lines are easier to recognise. However, do not use a pen or marker with a tip
wider than indicated above.
• The red outline must not be broken and the line must not cross more than once.
• The outlined area must have a length and width of at least 1 cm.
• If the paper has a dark background colour, the outlined area may be difficult to recognize.
Related Information
•Brother Web Connect
•Outline and Scan a Document to the Cloud
•Copy an Outlined Section Using Brother Web Connect
•Cut an Outlined Section Using Brother Web Connect
500
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your
Documents Using Brother Web Connect > Outline and Scan a Document to the Cloud
Outline and Scan a Document to the Cloud
The areas outlined using a red pen are extracted and saved to a cloud service as separate JPEG files.
1. Using a thick red pen or marker, outline the areas of the document that you want to scan.
2. Load your document.
3. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
4. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
5. Select [Outline&Scan].
• If information regarding [Outline&Scan] appears, read the information and press [OK]. If you want
to display this information again, press [Yes].
6. Select the service you want.
7. Select your account name.
• If the PIN entry screen appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK].
• If the LCD prompts you to specify scan size, select the scan size of the document you are scanning.
8. Press [OK].
The machine scans the document and starts uploading. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow
the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
9. When the machine finished uploading the image, press [OK].
10. Press .
Related Information
•Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your Documents Using Brother Web Connect
501
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your
Documents Using Brother Web Connect > Copy an Outlined Section Using Brother Web Connect
Copy an Outlined Section Using Brother Web Connect
Outline areas of your document with a red line and use Outline and Copy to display only those areas in your final
scanned document.
1. Using a thick red pen or marker, outline the areas of the document that you want to copy.
2. Load your document.
3. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
4. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
5. Select [Outline&Copy].
6. Press [Copy outlined area].
7. If information regarding [Copy outlined area] appears, read the information and press [OK]. If you
want to display this information again, press [Yes].
8. The Copy Settings screen will appear. Change your setting, if needed. Press [OK].
9. Press [OK].
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to
complete the printing job.
10. When the machine finished printing, press [OK].
11. Press .
Related Information
•Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your Documents Using Brother Web Connect
502
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your
Documents Using Brother Web Connect > Cut an Outlined Section Using Brother Web Connect
Cut an Outlined Section Using Brother Web Connect
Outline areas of your document with a red line and use Outline and Cut to remove those areas from your final
scanned document.
1. Using a thick red pen or marker, outline the areas of the document that you want to cut.
2. Load your document.
3. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
4. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
5. Select [Outline&Copy].
6. Press [Cut outlined area].
7. If information regarding [Cut outlined area] appears, read the information and press [OK]. If you want
to display this information again, press [Yes].
8. The Copy Settings screen will appear. Change your setting, if needed. Press [OK].
9. Press [OK].
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to
complete the printing job.
10. When the machine finished printing, press [OK].
11. Press .
Related Information
•Outline, Scan, and Copy or Cut Parts of Your Documents Using Brother Web Connect
503
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > NotePrint and NoteScan
NotePrint and NoteScan
•NotePrint and NoteScan Overview
•Print Note Sheet and Folder Templates
•Scan a Note Sheet to the Cloud
504
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > NotePrint and NoteScan > NotePrint and NoteScan
Overview
NotePrint and NoteScan Overview
Use this function to print note sheets and the folders designed to hold them, and to scan note sheets so that
each page of notes is saved as a JPEG file.
The printed note sheets can be folded in half or quarters, used, and stored in the folders. After writing on the note
sheets pre-printed with lines or a grid, scan the sheets and save your notes to a cloud service.
NotePrint
Select a specific style of note sheet or note folder to print.
1. Brother Cloud
NoteScan
After writing on your note sheet, scan it to save each section of notes as a JPEG file. If you use our 2-, 4-, or
8‑in‑1 style, each page of notes is saved as a separate JPEG file.
1. Web Service
You must use Brother note sheet templates to successfully use the NoteScan feature.
Note Sheet templates:
1 in 1, Note style 2 in 1, Dot graph style 4 in 1, Note style 8 in 1, Grid style
505
Note Folder templates:
How to use note sheets and note folders
1. Print template and fold on dotted lines.
2. Write your notes.
3. Tape sides and punch binder holes in folder, if needed.
4. Store notes in the custom folder for later use.
Related Information
•NotePrint and NoteScan
506
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > NotePrint and NoteScan > Print Note Sheet and
Folder Templates
Print Note Sheet and Folder Templates
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [NoteScan].
4. Press [Print Note & Folder template].
If information regarding [Print Note&Folder] appears, read the information and press [OK]. If you
want to display this information again in the future, press [Yes].
5. Press [Note Format] or [Note Folder].
6. Select the category and file you want.
7. Enter the number of copies you want to print, and then press [OK].
• After the folder is printed, fold the paper along the dotted lines and secure the folded areas with tape or
other adhesive. You can use a three-hole punch to make the folder suitable for use in a binder.
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [OK].
The machine starts printing.
10. Press [OK] when it is finished.
11. Press .
Related Information
•NotePrint and NoteScan
507
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > NotePrint and NoteScan > Scan a Note Sheet to
the Cloud
Scan a Note Sheet to the Cloud
Each page of your Note Sheet is saved as a separate JPEG file.
1. Load your document.
2. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
3. Press [Apps].
• If information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
4. Select [NoteScan].
5. Press [Scan Notes].
6. If information regarding [Scan Notes] appears, read the information and press [OK]. If you want to display
this information again, press [Yes].
7. Select the service you want.
8. Select your account name.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•NotePrint and NoteScan
508
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print
•Google Cloud Print Overview
•Before Using Google Cloud Print
•Print from Google Chrome™ or Chrome OS™
•Print from Google Drive™ for Mobile
•Print from Gmail™ Webmail Service for Mobile
509
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Google Cloud Print Overview
Google Cloud Print Overview
Google Cloud Print™ is a Google service that allows you to print to a printer registered to your Google account
using a network-compatible device (such as a mobile phone or computer) without installing the printer driver on
the device.
Printing from Android™ applications requires installing the Google Cloud Print™ application from the Google
Play™ Store app.
3
1
4
2
1
2
3
4
1. Print request
2. Internet
3. Google Cloud Print™
4. Printing
Related Information
•Google Cloud Print
510
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Before Using Google Cloud Print
Before Using Google Cloud Print
•Network Settings for Using Google Cloud Print
•Register Your Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Google Chrome™
•Register Your Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Web Based Management
511
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Before Using Google Cloud Print > Network Settings
for Using Google Cloud Print
Network Settings for Using Google Cloud Print
In order to use Google Cloud Print™, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to
the Internet, either through a wired or wireless connection. To connect and configure your machine correctly, see
the Quick Setup Guide or related topics in this guide.
Related Information
•Before Using Google Cloud Print
•Google Cloud Print Problems
512
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Before Using Google Cloud Print > Register Your
Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Google Chrome™
Register Your Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Google Chrome™
Make sure you have already created a Google Account. If you do not have an account, use a computer or
mobile device to access the Google website (https://accounts.google.com/signup) and create an account.
Make sure your Brother machine is idle before starting the registration process.
The steps in this section are examples for Windows users.
Screens on your computer may vary depending on your operating system and environment.
1. Open Google Chrome™ on your computer.
2. Sign in to your Google Account.
3. Click the Google Chrome™ menu icon, and then Settings > Show advanced settings….
4. In the Google Cloud Print section, click Manage.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your machine.
6. When a confirmation message appears on your machine, press the OK button.
If the confirmation message does not appear on your machine's LCD, repeat these steps.
7. When your Brother machine is successfully registered, it will appear in the My devices field.
Related Information
•Before Using Google Cloud Print
513
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Before Using Google Cloud Print > Register Your
Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Web Based Management
Register Your Machine with Google Cloud Print Using Web Based
Management
Make sure you have already created a Google Account. If you do not have an account, use a computer or
mobile device to access the Google website (https://accounts.google.com/signup) and create an account.
Make sure your Brother machine is idle before starting the registration process.
Before you begin to register your machine, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine.
1. Confirm that your Brother machine is connected to the same network as your computer or mobile device.
2. Start your web browser.
3. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
4. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
5. Click the Network tab.
6. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
7. Make sure that Google Cloud Print is selected, and then click Advanced Settings.
8. Make sure that Status is set to Enabled. Click Register.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your machine.
10. When a confirmation message appears on your machine, press the OK button.
If the confirmation message does not appear on your machine's LCD, repeat these steps.
11. Click Google.
12. The sign-in screen for Google Cloud Print™ appears. Sign in with your Google Account and follow the on-
screen instructions to register your machine.
13. When you have finished registering your machine, return to the Web Based Management screen and make
sure that Registration Status is set to Registered.
If your machine supports the Secure Function Lock feature, printing via Google Cloud Print™ is possible
even if PC print for each user is restricted. To restrict printing via Google Cloud Print™, disable Google
Cloud Print™ using Web Based Management or set the Secure Function Lock feature to Public Mode, and
then restrict print for public users. See Related Information.
Related Information
•Before Using Google Cloud Print
•Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
514
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Print from Google Chrome™ or Chrome OS™
Print from Google Chrome™ or Chrome OS™
1. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
2. Open the web page that you want to print.
3. Click the Google Chrome™ menu icon.
4. Click Print.
5. Select your machine from the printer list.
6. Change print options, if needed.
7. Click Print.
Related Information
•Google Cloud Print
515
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Print from Google Drive™ for Mobile
Print from Google Drive™ for Mobile
1. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
2. Access Google Drive™ from your Android™ or Apple device’s web browser.
3. Open the document that you want to print.
4. Tap the menu icon.
5. Tap Print.
6. Select your machine from the printer list.
7. Change print options, if needed.
8. Tap or Print.
Related Information
•Google Cloud Print
516
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Google Cloud Print > Print from Gmail™ Webmail Service for Mobile
Print from Gmail™ Webmail Service for Mobile
1. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
2. Access the Gmail™ webmail service from your Android™ or Apple device’s web browser.
3. Open the email that you want to print.
4. Tap the menu icon.
If Print appears beside the attachment name, you can also print the attachment. Tap Print, and then follow
the instructions on your mobile device.
5. Tap Print.
6. Select your machine from the printer list.
7. Change print options, if needed.
8. Tap or Print.
Related Information
•Google Cloud Print
517
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint
AirPrint
•AirPrint Overview
•Before Using AirPrint
•Print Using AirPrint
•Scan Using AirPrint
•Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models)
518
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > AirPrint Overview
AirPrint Overview
Use Brother AirPrint to wirelessly print photos, emails, web pages, and documents from your iPad, iPhone and
iPod touch without installing a printer driver on the device.
1
2
1. Print request
2. Printed photos, emails, web pages, and documents
• AirPrint also lets you send faxes directly from your Mac computer without printing them.
1 2
3
1. Wired or wireless network
2. Telephone line
3. Your Brother machine
• AirPrint also lets you scan documents to your Mac computer without installing a driver on the device.
Related Information
•AirPrint
•AirPrint Problems
519
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint
Before Using AirPrint
•Network Settings for Using AirPrint
•Disable and Enable AirPrint Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
520
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint > Network Settings for Using AirPrint
Network Settings for Using AirPrint
In order to use AirPrint, your mobile device must connect to the wireless network to which your Brother machine
is connected. AirPrint supports wireless connections that use infrastructure mode or Wi-Fi Direct®.
To configure your mobile device for a wireless network, refer to your mobile device’s user’s guide. A link to your
mobile device’s user’s guide on Apple’s website can be found by tapping in Safari.
To configure your Brother machine for a wireless network, see the Quick Setup Guide or related topics in this
guide. If your Brother machine supports a wired network, you can use a network cable to connect to the wireless
access point/router.
If your Brother machine supports Wi-Fi Direct® and you want to configure your Brother machine for a Wi-Fi
Direct® network, see related topics in this Online Guide.
Related Information
•Before Using AirPrint
521
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint > Disable and Enable AirPrint Using Web
Based Management (Web Browser)
Disable and Enable AirPrint Using Web Based Management (Web
Browser)
Confirm that your Brother machine is connected to the same network as your computer.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Network tab.
5. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.
6. To disable AirPrint, clear the AirPrint check box. To enable AirPrint, select the AirPrint check box.
By default, AirPrint is enabled.
7. Click Submit.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•Before Using AirPrint
522
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint
Print Using AirPrint
•Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod Touch
•Before Printing Using AirPrint (macOS)
•Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
523
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod Touch
Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod Touch
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below.
1. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
2. Use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
3. Tap or .
4. Tap Print.
5. Make sure your Brother machine is selected.
6. If a different machine (or no printer) is selected, tap Printer.
A list of available machines appears.
7. Tap your machine's name in the list.
8. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
9. Tap Print.
Related Information
•Print Using AirPrint
524
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Before Printing Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Printing Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before printing using macOS, add your Brother machine to the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple Menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners.
3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left.
4. Click Add Printer or Scanner…. The Add screen appears.
5. Select your Brother machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
6. Click Add.
Related Information
•Print Using AirPrint
525
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. Before printing,
make sure your Brother machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
2. On your Mac computer, use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
3. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
4. Make sure your Brother machine is selected. If a different machine (or no printer) is selected, click the Printer
pop-up menu, and then select your Brother machine.
5. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
6. Click Print.
Related Information
•Print Using AirPrint
526
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint
Scan Using AirPrint
•Before Scanning Using AirPrint (macOS)
•Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
527
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint > Before Scanning Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Scanning Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before scanning using macOS, add your Brother machine to the scanner list on your Mac computer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple Menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners.
3. Click the + icon below the Scanners pane on the left.
4. Click Add Printer or Scanner….
The Add screen appears.
5. Select your Brother machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
6. Click Add.
Related Information
•Scan Using AirPrint
528
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before scanning, make sure your Brother machine is in the scanner list on your Mac computer.
1. Load your document.
2. Select System Preferences from the Apple Menu.
3. Click Printers & Scanners.
4. Select your Brother machine from the scanner list.
5. Click the Scan tab, and then click the Open Scanner… button.
The Scanner screen appears.
6. If you place the document in the ADF, select Use Document Feeder check box, and then select the size of
your document from the scan size setting pop-up menu.
7. Select the destination folder or destination application from the destination setting pop-up menu.
8. Click Show Details to change the scanning settings if needed.
You can crop the image manually by dragging the mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan when
scanning from the scanner glass.
9. Click Scan.
Related Information
•Scan Using AirPrint
529
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models)
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models)
•Before Sending a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
•Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
530
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models) > Before Sending a
Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Sending a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Before sending a fax, add your Brother machine to the printer list on your Mac computer. Make sure your
Brother machine is connected to the telephone line and works correctly.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple Menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners.
3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left.
4. Click Add Printer or Scanner…. The Add screen appears.
5. Select your Brother machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
6. Click Add.
Related Information
•Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models)
531
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models) > Send a Fax Using
AirPrint (macOS)
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Make sure your Brother machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer. Apple TextEdit is used in the
example below.
• AirPrint supports only monochrome fax documents.
1. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
2. On your Mac computer, open the file that you want to send as a fax.
3. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
4. Click the Printer pop-up menu, and then select Brother MFC-XXXX - Fax (where XXXX is your model
name).
5. Type the fax recipient information.
6. Click Fax.
Related Information
•Send a Fax Using AirPrint (For MFC Models)
532
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mobile Printing for Windows®
Mobile Printing for Windows®
Mobile printing for Windows® is a function to print wirelessly from your Windows® mobile device. You can
connect to the same network that your Brother machine is connected to and print without installing the printer
driver on the device. Many Windows® apps support this function.
1
2
3
1. Windows® mobile device (Windows® 10 Mobile or later)
2. Wi-Fi® connection
3. Your Brother machine
Related Information
•Mobile/Web Connect
533
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mopria® Print Service
Mopria® Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a print feature on Android™ mobile devices (Android™ version 4.4 or later) developed by
the Mopria® Alliance. With this service, you can connect to the same network as your machine and print without
additional setup. Many native Android™ apps support printing.
1
2
3
1. Android™ 4.4 or later
2. Wi-Fi® Connection
3. Your Brother machine
You must download the Mopria® Print Service from the Google Play™ Store and install it on your Android™
device. Before using this service, you must turn it on.
Related Information
•Mobile/Web Connect
534
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother iPrint&Scan
Brother iPrint&Scan
Use Brother iPrint&Scan to print and scan from various mobile devices.
• For Android™ Devices
Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to use features of your Brother machine directly from your Android™ device,
without using a computer.
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the Google Play™ Store app.
• For Apple Devices
Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to use features of your Brother machine directly from your Apple device.
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store.
• For Windows® Devices
Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to use features of your Brother machine directly from your Windows® device,
without using a computer.
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the Microsoft® Store.
For more detailed information, see the Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan. Go to your model's
Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Mobile/Web Connect
535
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Near-Field Communication (NFC)
Near-Field Communication (NFC)
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Near-Field Communication (NFC) allows for simple transactions, data exchange, and wireless connections
between two devices that are in close range of each other.
If your Android™ device is NFC-enabled, you can print data (photos, PDF files, text files, web pages and email
messages) from the device or scan photos and documents to the device by touching it to the NFC symbol on the
machine's control panel.
You must download and install Brother iPrint&Scan on your Android™ device to use this feature. For more
detailed information, see the Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan. Go to your model's Manuals page
on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Related Information
•Mobile/Web Connect
•Register an External IC Card Reader
536
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Near-Field Communication (NFC) > Register an External IC Card Reader
Register an External IC Card Reader
When you connect an external IC card reader, use Web Based Management to register the card reader. Your
machine supports HID class driver supported external IC card readers.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click the Administrator tab.
5. Click the External Card Reader menu, and then enter the necessary information.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•Near-Field Communication (NFC)
537
Home > ControlCenter
ControlCenter
Use Brother's ControlCenter software utility to quickly access your frequently-used applications. Using
ControlCenter gives you direct access to specific applications.
•ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•ControlCenter2 (Mac)
538
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
539
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows®) > Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4
(Windows®)
Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
ControlCenter4 has two operation modes: Home Mode and Advanced Mode. You can change modes at any
time.
Home Mode
Advanced Mode
•Home Mode
ControlCenter4 Home Mode lets you access your machine's main features easily.
540
•Advanced Mode
ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode gives you more control over the details of your machine's features and
allows you to customise one-button scan actions.
To change operation mode:
1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then select Open.
2. Click the Configuration button, and then select Mode Select.
3. The mode selection dialog box appears. Select either the Home Mode or Advanced Mode option.
4. Click OK.
Related Information
•ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
541
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®)
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
Use ControlCenter4 Home Mode to access your machine's main features.
•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows®)
542
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows®) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode gives you more control over the details of your machine's features and allows
you to customise one-button scan actions.
•Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows®)
543
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows®) > Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4
(Windows®)
Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
3. Click the Remote Setup button.
4. Configure the settings as needed.
Export
Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.
Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.
Import
Click to import a file and read its settings.
Print
Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the
machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.
544
OK
Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message
appears, confirm that your data is correct, and then click OK.
Cancel
Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.
Apply
Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.
5. Click OK.
• If your computer is protected by a firewall and is unable to use Remote Setup, you may need to configure the
firewall settings to allow communication through port numbers 137 and 161.
• If you are using Windows® Firewall and you installed the Brother software and drivers from the installation
disc, the necessary firewall settings have already been set.
Related Information
•ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Remote Setup (Windows®)
545
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows®) > Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4
Advanced Mode (Windows®)
Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode
(Windows®)
You can create up to three customised tabs, each including up to five customised buttons, with your preferred
settings.
Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.
1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
2. Click the Configuration button, and then select Create custom tab.
A custom tab is created.
3. To change the name of a custom tab, right-click the custom tab, and then select Rename custom tab.
4. Click the Configuration button, select Create custom button, and then select the button you want to create.
The settings dialog box appears.
5. Type the button name, and then change the settings, if needed. Click OK.
The setting options vary depending on the button you select.
546
You can change or remove the created tab, button, or settings. Click the Configuration button, and then
follow the menu.
Related Information
•ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
547
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter2 (Mac)
ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
548
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Use Brother's ControlCenter software to scan photos and save them as JPEGs, PDFs, or other file formats.
•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Scan Settings for ControlCenter2 (Mac)
549
Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
2. Click the DEVICE SETTINGS tab.
3. Click the Remote Setup button.
The Remote Setup Program screen appears.
4. Configure the settings as needed.
Export
Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.
Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.
Import
Click to import a file and read its settings.
Print
Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the
machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.
550
OK
Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message
appears, enter the correct data again, and then click OK.
Cancel
Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.
Apply
Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.
5. When finished, click OK.
Related Information
•ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Remote Setup (Mac)
551
Home > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your Brother machine. You can
correct most problems yourself.
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability.
If you need additional help, go to the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
First, check the following:
• The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is
set up on both the machine and your computer.
• Error and maintenance messages
If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information.
Related Information
•Error and Maintenance Messages
•Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
•Document Jams
•Paper Jams
•Printing Problems
•Improve the Print Quality
•Telephone and Fax Problems
•Network Problems
•Google Cloud Print Problems
•AirPrint Problems
•Other Problems
•Check the Machine Information
•Reset Your Brother Machine
552
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages
Error and Maintenance Messages
(MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
If the LCD displays errors and your Android™ device supports the NFC feature, touch your device to the
NFC symbol on your Brother machine to access the Brother Solutions Center and browse the latest FAQs
from your device. (Your mobile telephone provider's message and data rates may apply.)
Make sure the NFC settings of both your Brother machine and your Android™ device are set to On.
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this
happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message.
The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table.
Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit
support.brother.com, and click the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
Error Message Cause Action
2-sided Disabled The back cover of the machine
is not closed completely.
Close the back cover of the machine until it locks
in the closed position.
2-sided Disabled
Reload paper, then
press [Retry].
Although the size of paper in
the paper tray matches the
paper size that was selected
from the control panel or printer
driver, the machine has stopped
printing when it encountered an
additional, different size of
paper in the tray.
Make sure the paper tray contains only the size of
paper you select in either the control panel or
printer driver, then press Start.
The paper tray was pulled out
before the machine completed
printing on both sides of the
paper.
Reinstall the paper tray and press Start.
Access Denied The function you want to use is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock 3.0.
Call your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
BT Call Sign On
(For U.K.)
The BT Call Sign setting is on.
You cannot change the Receive
Mode from Manual to another
mode.
Set the BT Call Sign setting to off.
Calibration Calibration failed. • Press and hold down to turn the machine
off. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on
again. Perform the colour calibration again
using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Cartridge Error The toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Pull out the drum unit, remove the toner cartridge
for the colour that is indicated on the LCD, and
place it back in the drum unit. Install the drum unit
in the machine again.
If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Comm.Error Poor telephone line quality
caused a communication error.
Send the fax again or connect the machine to
another telephone line. If the problem continues,
contact the telephone company and ask them to
check your telephone line.
553
Error Message Cause Action
Condensation Condensation may have formed
inside the machine after a room
temperature change.
Leave the machine turned on. Wait for 30 minutes
with the front cover in the open position. Then
turn off the machine and close the cover. Turn it
on again.
Cooling Down The temperature of the inside of
the machine is too hot. The
machine pauses its current print
job and goes into cooling down
mode.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling down.
Make sure all vents on the machine are clear of
obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, the machine
will resume printing.
Cover is Open The front cover is not
completely closed.
Open and then firmly close the front cover of the
machine.
Cover is Open. The fuser cover is not
completely closed or paper was
jammed in the back of the
machine when you turned on
the power.
Close the fuser cover located inside the back
cover of the machine.
Make sure paper is not jammed inside the back of
the machine, and then close the fuser cover.
Cover is Open. The ADF cover is not
completely closed.
Close the ADF cover.
If the error message remains, press .
Disconnected The other person or other
person's fax machine stopped
the call.
Try to send or receive again.
If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using
a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the
Compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
Document Jam The document was not inserted
or fed correctly, or the
document scanned from the
ADF was too long.
Remove the jammed paper from the ADF unit.
Clear any debris or scraps of paper from the ADF
unit paper path.
Press .
Supplies
Drum End Soon
The drum unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new drum unit before the LCD displays
Replace Drum.
Drum ! The corona wires on the drum
unit must be cleaned.
Clean the corona wires on the drum unit.
1
See Related Information: Clean the Corona
Wires.
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit
with a new one.
The drum unit or the toner
cartridge and drum unit
assembly is not installed
correctly.
Remove the drum unit, remove the toner
cartridges from the drum unit, and put the toner
cartridges back into the drum unit. Reinstall the
drum unit in the machine.
Drum Stop It is time to replace the drum
unit.
Replace the drum unit.
Jam 2-sided The paper is jammed
underneath the paper tray or
the fuser unit.
Remove the paper tray or open the back cover to
pull out all jammed paper.
554
Error Message Cause Action
Jam Inside The paper is jammed inside the
machine.
Open the front cover, remove the toner cartridge
and drum unit assembly, and pull out all jammed
paper. Close the front cover.
Jam MP Tray The paper is jammed in the MP
tray.
Remove all jammed paper from in and around the
MP tray. Press Retry.
Jam Rear The paper is jammed in the
back of the machine.
Open the fuser cover and remove all jammed
paper. Close the fuser cover. If the error message
remains, press Retry
Jam Tray 1
Jam Tray 2
Jam Tray 3
Jam Tray 4
The paper is jammed in the
indicated paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray and remove all jammed
paper as shown in the animation on the LCD.
Limit Exceeded The print limit set in Secure
Function Lock 3.0 was reached.
Call your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Media Type Mismatch The media type specified in the
printer driver differs from the
paper type specified in the
machine's menu.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray
indicated on the LCD, and then select the correct
media type in the Paper Type setting on the
machine.
No Belt Unit The belt unit is not installed or
not installed correctly.
Reinstall the belt unit.
No HUB Support A USB hub device is connected
to the USB direct interface.
Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB
direct interface.
No Drum Unit The drum unit is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly.
No Paper The machine is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in
the paper tray.
• Refill paper in the paper tray. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Paper Fed T1
No Paper Fed T2
No Paper Fed T3
No Paper Fed T4
The machine failed to feed
paper from the indicated paper
tray.
Pull out the paper tray indicated on the LCD and
remove all jammed paper.
No Paper MP The MP tray is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in
the MP tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
No Paper T1
No Paper T2
No Paper T3
No Paper T4
The machine failed to feed
paper from the indicated paper
tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on the
LCD. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Toner The toner cartridge for the
colour indicated on the LCD is
not installed or not installed
correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge for the colour
indicated on the LCD from the drum unit, and put
the toner cartridge back into the drum unit. If the
problem continues, replace the toner cartridge.
555
Error Message Cause Action
No Tray T1
No Tray T2
No Tray T3
No Tray T4
The paper tray is not installed
or not installed correctly.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
No Waste Toner The waste toner box is not
installed or not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the waste toner box.
Out of Fax Memory The machine's fax memory is
full.
If you are using Fax Preview function, delete
unwanted received fax data.
If you are using Memory Receive function and are
not using fax preview function, print received fax
data.
See Related Information: Print a Fax Stored in the
Machine's Memory.
Out of Memory The machine's memory is full. If a fax-sending or copy operation is in
process
Do one of the following:
• Press Send Now to send the pages scanned
so far.
• Press Partial Print to copy the pages
scanned so far.
• Press Quit or and wait until the other
operations that are in progress finish, and then
try again.
If a scan operation is in process
• Split the document into multiple parts.
• Reduce the Resolution.
• Reduce the File Size.
• Select the high compression PDF file type.
• Clear faxes from the memory.
If a print operation is in process
Press and reduce the print resolution.
Paper Low
Paper Low T1
Paper Low T2
Paper Low T3
Paper Low T4
The paper tray is nearly empty. Refill the paper in the paper tray indicated on the
LCD.
Print Data Full The machine’s memory is full. Press and delete the previously stored
secure print data.
Print Unable ## The machine has a mechanical
problem. • Press and hold to turn the machine off,
wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service.
Registration Registration failed. • Press and hold down to turn the machine
off. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on
again. Perform the colour registration again
using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service or your local Brother dealer.
556
Error Message Cause Action
Supplies
Replace Drum
It is time to replace the drum
unit.
Replace the drum unit with a new one.
The drum unit counter was not
reset when a new drum was
installed.
Reset the drum unit counter.
See the instructions included with the new drum
unit.
Replace Toner The toner cartridge is at the end
of its life. The machine stops all
print operations.
While memory is available,
faxes are stored in the memory.
Replace the toner cartridge for the colour
indicated on the LCD.
Replace WT Box It is time to replace the waste
toner box.
Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
Scan Unable The document is too long for
2‑sided scanning. Press . For 2-sided scanning, use A4 size
paper. Other paper must be within the following
size:
Length: 147.3 to 355.6 mm
Width: 105 to 215.9 mm
Scan Unable ## The machine has a mechanical
problem. • Press and hold to turn the machine off,
and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
customer service.
Self-Diagnostic The temperature of the fuser
unit does not rise to a specified
temperature within the specified
time.
Press and hold to turn the machine off, wait a
few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the
machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on.
The fuser unit is too hot.
Service Error ## Machine's firmware has a
problem.
• Contact Brother customer service.
Short paper The length of the paper in the
tray is too short for the machine
to deliver it to the Face down
output tray.
Open the back cover (Face up output tray) to let
the printed page exit onto the Face up output tray.
Remove the printed pages, and then press
Retry.
Size Error The paper size defined in the
printer driver is not supported
by the defined tray.
Choose a paper size supported by the defined
tray.
Size Error 2-sided The paper size specified in the
machine's paper size setting is
not available for automatic 2-
sided printing.
Press (if required).
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set
the tray for that paper size.
Choose a paper size supported by 2-sided
printing.
Paper size available for automatic 2-sided printing
is A4.
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size and is not available
for automatic 2-sided printing.
Size Mismatch The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray
indicated on the LCD and set the size of paper for
the tray.
Supplies
Belt End Soon
The belt unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new belt unit before the LCD displays
Replace Belt.
Supplies
Replace Belt
It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit with a new one.
557
Error Message Cause Action
Supplies
Toner Low: X
(X indicates the toner cartridge
or drum unit colour that is near
the end of its life. BK=Black,
C=Cyan, M=Magenta,
Y=Yellow.)
If the LCD displays this
message, you can still print.
The toner cartridge is near the
end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge before the LCD
displays Replace Toner.
Supplies
WT Box End Soon
The waste toner box is almost
full.
Order a new waste toner box before the LCD
displays Replace WT Box.
Toner Error One or more toner cartridges
are not installed or not installed
correctly.
Pull out the drum unit. Remove all the toner
cartridges, and then put them back into the drum
unit.
Too Many Trays The number of installed
Optional Trays exceeds the
maximum number.
Reduce the number of Optional Trays.
Touchscreen
Initialisation Failed
The touchscreen was pressed
before the power on
initialisation was completed.
Make sure nothing is touching the touchscreen.
Debris may be stuck between
the lower part of the
touchscreen and its frame.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part
of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back
and forth to push out any debris.
Tray 2 Error
Tray 3 Error
Tray 4 Error
The optional lower tray is not
installed correctly.
Reinstall the lower tray.
Unusable Device A USB device or USB Flash
memory drive that is encrypted
or not supported has been
connected to the USB direct
interface.
Unplug the device from the USB direct interface.
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn
the power off and back
on again.
A defective USB device or a
high power consumption USB
device has been connected to
the USB direct interface.
• Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off,
and then turn it on again.
Wrong Paper Size MP
Wrong Paper Size T1
Wrong Paper Size T2
Wrong Paper Size T3
Wrong Paper Size T4
The specified tray ran out of
paper during copying and the
machine could not feed the
same size paper from the next
priority tray.
Refill the paper in the paper tray.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report
•Replace Supplies
•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•Replace the Drum Unit
•Clean the Corona Wires
•Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
558
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report
Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If the LCD displays:
•[Print Unable] ##
•[Scan Unable] ##
We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your computer.
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you must transfer.
If there is an error message on the LCD after you transfer the faxes, disconnect your Brother machine from
the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.
Related Information
•Error and Maintenance Messages
•Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
•Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
•Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
559
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal
Report > Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter Fax Transfer mode.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Fax Transfer].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the LCD displays [No Data], there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press [Close].
• Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report
•Set Your Station ID
560
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal
Report > Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1. Make sure you have installed the software and drivers on your computer, and then turn on PC-FAX Receive
on the computer.
Do one of the following:
• (Windows® 7)
From the (Start) menu, select All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left
navigation bar, and then click Receive.
• (Windows® 8 and Windows® 10)
Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.
2. Make sure you have set [PC Fax Receive] on the machine.
If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the LCD displays [Send Fax to
PC?].
3. Do one of the following:
• To transfer all faxes to your computer, press [Yes].
• To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press [No].
4. Press .
Related Information
•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report
561
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal
Report > Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Report
Transfer].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the fax number to which the Fax Journal will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report
•Set Your Station ID
562
Home > Troubleshooting > Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Your Brother machine displays an error message if an error occurs. The most common error messages are
shown in the table.
You can correct most errors yourself. If, after reading this table, you still need help, the Brother Solutions Center
offers the latest troubleshooting tips.
Go to the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.
Connection Error
Error Messages Cause Action
Connection Error 02
Network connection failed.
Verify that the network
connection is good.
The machine is not connected to a
network.
• Verify that the network connection
is good.
• If the Web button was pressed
soon after the machine was turned
on, the network connection may
not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
Connection Error 03
Connection failed to server.
Check network settings.
• Network or server settings are
incorrect.
• There is a problem with the
network or server.
• Confirm that network settings are
correct, or wait and try again later.
• If the Web button was pressed
soon after the machine was turned
on, the network connection may
not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
Connection Error 07
Connection failed to server.
Wrong Date&Time.
Date and time settings are incorrect. Set the date and time correctly. Note
that if the machine's power cord is
disconnected, the date and time
settings may have reset to factory
settings.
Authentication Error
Error Messages Cause Action
Authentication Error 01
Incorrect PIN code. Enter
PIN correctly.
The PIN you entered to access the
account is incorrect. The PIN is the
four-digit number that was entered
when registering the account to the
machine.
Enter the correct PIN.
Authentication Error 02
Incorrect or expired ID, or
this temporary ID is already
used. Enter correctly or
reissue temporary ID.
Temporary ID is valid for 24
hours after it is issued.
The temporary ID that was entered is
incorrect .
Enter the correct temporary ID.
The temporary ID that was entered
has expired. A temporary ID is valid
for 24 hours.
Apply for Brother Web Connect
access again and receive a new
temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the
machine.
Authentication Error 03
Display name has already
been registered. Enter
another display name.
The name you entered as the display
name has already been registered to
another service user.
Enter a different display name.
563
Server Error
Error Messages Cause Action
Server Error 01
Authentication failed. Do
the following: 1. Go to
http://bwc.brother.com to
get a new temporary ID. 2.
Press OK and enter your new
temporary ID in the next
screen.
The machine's authentication
information (needed to access the
service) has expired or is invalid.
Apply for Brother Web Connect
access again to receive a new
temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the
machine.
Server Error 03
Failed to upload.
Unsupported file or corrupt
data. Confirm data of file.
The file you are trying to upload may
have one of the following problems:
• The file exceeds the service's limit
on number of pixels, file size, etc.
• The file type is not supported.
• The file is corrupted.
The file cannot be used:
• Check the service's size or format
restrictions.
• Save the file as a different type.
• If possible, get a new, uncorrupted
version of the file.
Server Error 13
Service temporarily
unavailable. Try again
later.
There is a problem with the service
and it cannot be used now.
Wait and try again. If you get the
message again, access the service
from a computer to confirm if it is
unavailable.
Shortcut Error
Error Messages Cause Action
ShortCut Error 02
Account is invalid. Please
register account and
shortcut again after
deleting this shortcut.
The shortcut cannot be used because
the account was deleted after the
shortcut was registered.
Delete the shortcut, and then register
the account and shortcut again.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
564
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams
Document Jams
•Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
•Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
•Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
565
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Open the ADF cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the left. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or
scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the ADF cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
•Document Jams
566
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Lift the document cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the right. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or
scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the document cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
•Document Jams
567
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.
3. Close the document cover.
4. Press .
Related Information
•Document Jams
568
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray and straighten the stack when you are adding new
paper. This helps prevent multiple sheets of paper from feeding through the machine at one time and prevents
paper jams.
•Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
•Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
•Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
•Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
•Paper is Jammed underneath the Paper Tray
569
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow
these steps:
1. Remove the paper from the MP tray.
2. Remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.
3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.
4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper height guides (1) on
both sides of the tray. Place the paper's leading edge (top of paper) between the and b arrows (2).
2
5. Follow the instructions on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
•Paper Jams
570
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these
steps:
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper.
Pulling the jammed paper downward using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily.
3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size.
4. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
571
5. Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
Related Information
•Paper Jams
572
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back (Rear) of the
machine, follow these steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the back cover.
3. Pull the green levers at the left and right sides toward you to release the fuser cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
If the grey envelope levers inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position, lift these levers
to the original position before pulling the green tabs down.
4. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.
573
5. Close the fuser cover.
If you print on envelopes, pull down the grey envelope levers to the envelope position again before closing
the back cover.
6. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•Paper Jams
574
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these
steps:
1. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
2. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
3. Turn the green lock lever (1) counterclockwise until it locks in the release position. Holding the green handles
of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
2
1
IMPORTANT
Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
4. Pull out the jammed paper slowly.
575
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
5. Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position, as shown in the illustration.
2
1
6. Gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
2
7. Turn the green lock lever clockwise to the lock position.
576
2
8. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
9. Close the machine's front cover.
Related Information
•Paper Jams
577
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed underneath the Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed underneath the Paper Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these
steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. Make sure the jammed paper does not remain inside the machine.
4. If paper is not jammed inside the machine, remove the paper from the paper tray, flip it over, and check
underneath the paper tray.
5. If the paper is not jammed in the paper tray, open the back cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
578
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
6. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine.
7. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
8. Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
Related Information
•Paper Jams
579
Home > Troubleshooting > Printing Problems
Printing Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
No printout Check the machine is not in Power Off mode.
If the machine is in Power Off mode, press on the
control panel, and then send the print data again.
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed
and selected.
Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's
control panel displays an error status.
Check that the machine is online:
• Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2
Click (Start) >Devices and Printers . Right-click
Brother XXX-XXXX and click See what's printing.
Click Printer in the menu bar. Make sure Use Printer
Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server® 2008
Click (Start) >Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers. Right-click Brother XXX-XXXX.
Make sure Use Printer Online is not listed. If it is
listed, click this option to set the driver Online.
• Windows® 8 and Windows Server® 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group,
click Devices and Printers. Right-click the Brother
XXX-XXXX. Click See what's printing. If printer driver
options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer
in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer
Offline is not selected.
•Windows® 10 and Windows Server® 2016
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers. Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX.
Click See what's printing. If printer driver options
appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the
menu bar and make sure that Use Printer Offline is
not selected.
•Windows Server® 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX. Click See what’s
printing. If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make
sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.
• Mac
Click the System Preferences menu, and then select
the Printers & Scanners option. When the machine is
offline, delete it using the button, and then add it
using the button.
580
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine is not printing or has stopped printing. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
The headers or footers appear when the document
displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is
printed.
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the
page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your
document to allow for this.
The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your
application's Print window.
The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly,
then some pages have missing text.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Your machine is not receiving all of the data sent from the
computer. Make sure you connected the interface cable
correctly.
The machine does not print on both sides of the paper
even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the
machine supports automatic 2-sided printing.
Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You
must select A4 paper that is 60 to 105 g/m2.
Print speed is too slow. Try changing the printer driver setting. The highest
resolution needs longer data processing, sending and
printing time.
If you have enabled the Quiet Mode, disable the Quiet
Mode on the printer driver or the machine's menu setting.
The machine does not feed paper. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight.
If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful
to remove the paper, turn the stack over and place it back
in the paper tray.
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then
try again.
Make sure MP Tray is not selected for Paper Source in
the printer driver.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers.
The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray. Fan the paper well and place it back in the MP tray firmly.
Make sure MP Tray is selected as Paper Source in the
printer driver.
The machine does not feed envelopes. Load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be
set to print the envelope size you are using. This is
usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu
of your application.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)
•Cancel a Print Job
•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
581
•Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
582
Home > Troubleshooting > Improve the Print Quality
Improve the Print Quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not
the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test
page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality and follow the
recommendations in the table.
IMPORTANT
Using non-genuine supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability.
1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that
meets our specifications.
2. Check that the drum unit and toner cartridges are installed correctly.
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Printed pages are compressed, horizontal stripes appear,
or characters in the top, bottom, left, or right margins are
cut off
Adjust the print margins in your document's application
and reprint the job.
Coloured letters and thin letters in the original document
are light or faint in the copy
• Choose Text or Receipt in the copy quality setting.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colours are light or faint on the whole page
• Use the machine's LCD to perform calibration.See
Related Information:Calibrate Colour Output.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are
copying.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the LCD or the
printer driver.
See Related Information:Reduce Toner Consumption.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
• Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry, soft lint-
free cloth.
583
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical white streaks or bands appear on the page
• Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry, soft lint-
free cloth.
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft
cloth.
• Make sure foreign material such as a torn piece of
paper, sticky notes, or dust is not inside the machine
and around the drum unit and toner cartridge.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical coloured streaks or bands appear on the page
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft
cloth.
• Clean all four corona wires (one for each colour)
inside the drum unit by sliding the green tab.
Make sure the green tab of the corona wire is in
the home position(1).
1
• Replace the toner cartridge that matches the colour of
the streak or band.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com and
view the FAQs & Troubleshooting page for your
Brother model.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Horizontal coloured lines appear on the page
• Identify the colour causing the problem and replace
the toner cartridge that matches the colour of the line.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
see the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
584
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
White spots
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity can cause hollow print.
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
the drum may have foreign material, such as glue
from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Blank page or some missing colours
• Identify the colour causing the problem and install a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
see the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Coloured spots at 94 mm
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
the drum may have foreign material, such as glue
from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
Coloured spots at 29 mm
• Identify the colour causing the problem and install a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
see the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner scatter or toner stain
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity and high temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
see the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.See Related
Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
The colour of your printouts is not what you expected • To improve the colour density, calibrate the colours
using the LCD.
• To adjust the print position of colours for sharper
edges, perform the colour registration using the LCD.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are
copying.
585
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the LCD or the
printer driver.
• If the print quality of the black portion is not what you
expected, select the Enhance Black Printing check
box in the printer driver.
• Clear the Improve Grey Colour check box in the
printer driver.
• Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
see the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colour offset
• Make sure the machine is on a solid level surface.
• Perform the colour registration using the LCD.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
• Install a new belt unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Belt Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Uneven colour density across the page
• Perform the calibration using the LCD.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are
copying.
• Clear the Improve Grey Colour check box in the
printer driver.
• Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit the
Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to
see the FAQs & Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information:Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
A
B
C
D
E
W X Y Z
Missing thin lines in images
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the LCD or the
printer driver.
• Change the print resolution.
• If you use a Windows printer driver, choose Improve
Pattern Printing in Print Setting of the Basic tab.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Wrinkled printout
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Make sure the back cover is closed correctly.
• Make sure the two grey levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
586
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Ghosting images
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
low humidity and low temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Make sure the two grey levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information:Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner smears easily
• Make sure the two grey levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer
driver.
If this selection does not provide enough
improvement, change the printer driver setting in
Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an
envelope, choose Env. Thick in the media type
setting.
Curled or wavy image
• Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer
driver.
If the problem is not solved, choose Plain Paper in
the media type setting.
• If you are printing an envelope, chooseEnv. Thin in
the Media Type Setting of the printer driver.
• If you do not use the machine often, the paper may
have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the
stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper
stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Store the paper where it will not be exposed to high
temperatures and high humidity.
• Open the back cover (Face up output tray) to let the
printed paper exit onto the Face up output tray.
Envelope creases
• Make sure the envelope levers inside the back cover
are pulled down to the envelope position when you
print envelopes.
NOTE
When you have finished printing, open the back
cover and reset the two grey levers back to
their original position (1) by lifting them up until
they stop.
587
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
1
• If creases occur with the envelope levers in the
envelope position, print with the back cover open and
feed one envelope at a time from the MP tray.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•Test Print
•Clean the Drum Unit
•Calibrate Colour Output
•Reduce Toner Consumption
•Replace the Toner Cartridge
•Replace the Drum Unit
•Replace the Belt Unit
588
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems
Telephone and Fax Problems
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Telephone Line or Connections
Difficulties Suggestions
Dialling does not work. (No
dial tone)
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the
telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or
VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions.
(Available only for some countries.)
Change the Tone/Pulse setting.
If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the
handset of the external telephone and dialling the number using the external telephone.
Wait to hear the fax receiving tones before sending fax.
If there is no dial tone, connect a known working telephone and telephone line cord to
the socket. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is
still no dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or wall socket.
The machine does not
answer when called.
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup.
Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no
answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and
the LINE socket of the machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask
your telephone company to check the line.
Handling Incoming Calls
Difficulties Suggestions
Sending a Fax
Call to the
machine.
If you answered on an extension or external telephone, press your Remote Activation Code (the
factory setting is *51). If you answered on the external telephone, press the Start button to
receive the fax.
When your machine answers, hang up.
Custom features
on a single line.
If you have Call Waiting, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom
feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or
receiving faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes
through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily
interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature should help
overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common
to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If
avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, we recommend using a separate
telephone line with no custom features.
Receiving Faxes
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone
wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, contact
your service provider for connection instructions. If you are using a VoIP system, try changing the
VoIP setting to Basic (for VoIP). This will lower modem speed and turn off Error Correction Mode
(ECM).
589
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices
and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as the Brother machine.
• If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all
incoming faxes, you should select Fax only mode.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the
External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will receive incoming faxes
automatically and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically
answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In Fax/Tel mode, your Brother
machine will receive faxes automatically and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to
answer voice calls.
• If you do not want your Brother machine to answer any incoming faxes automatically, you should
select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the
machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your Brother machine
answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:
• If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay to one ring.
See Related Information: Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay).
• If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your
answering machine to two.
• If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
• If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating correctly. Remember to reset
your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems
recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering
the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.
• If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be
interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the
Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly.
1. Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings.
2. Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
• Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
• Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
• End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual
faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”
3. Set your answering machine to answer calls.
4. Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD.
See Related Information: Choose the Correct Receive Mode.
Make sure your Brother machine’s Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is a feature that
allows you to receive a fax even if you answered the call on an external or extension telephone.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are
using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP).
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.
Sending Faxes
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot send a fax. Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the
telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or
VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure you pressed Fax and the machine is in Fax mode.
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error.
590
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot send a fax. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.
Poor sending quality. Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s
scanner operation. If the copy quality is poor, clean the scanner.
Transmission Verification
Report says
RESULT:ERROR.
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If
you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:ERROR on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you
can turn off Fax Storage, print fax messages in memory or cancel a delayed fax. If the
problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line
or if you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for
VoIP).
Sent faxes are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly. When using the ADF, the document
should be face up. When using the scanner glass, the document should be face down.
Vertical black lines when
sending.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on
the glass strip. Clean the glass strip.
Printing received faxes
Difficulties Suggestions
• Condensed print
• Horizontal streaks
• Top and bottom sentences are cut
off
• Missing lines
This is usually caused by a poor telephone connection. Make a copy; if your
copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or
interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty.Clean the corona wires in the
drum unit.
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if
the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax
machine.
Received faxes appear as split or blank
pages.
Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages.
Turn on Auto Reduction.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•Set Dial Tone Detection
•Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
•Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
•Choose the Correct Receive Mode
591
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Dial Tone Detection
Set Dial Tone Detection
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Setting the Dial Tone to [Detection] will shorten the Dial Tone detect pause.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Tone].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Detection] or [No Detection]
3. Press .
Related Information
•Telephone and Fax Problems
592
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Telephone Line Compatibility for
Interference and VoIP Systems
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Problems sending and receiving faxes due to possible interference on the telephone line may be solved by
reducing the modem speed to minimise errors in fax transmission. If you are using a Voice over IP (VoIP)
service, Brother recommends changing the compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
• VoIP is a type of phone system that uses an Internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line.
• Telephone providers frequently bundle VoIP together with Internet and cable services.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want.
• Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps.
• Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps.
• Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction
Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use
this option only when needed.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Telephone and Fax Problems
593
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems
Network Problems
•Error Messages
•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®)
•Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?
•I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network
•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
594
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Error Messages
Error Messages
Your Brother machine will display an error message if an error occurs. The most common error messages are
shown in the table.
Error Messages Cause Action
The maximum number
of devices are
already connected
using Wi-Fi
Direct.
Two mobile devices are
already connected to the Wi-Fi
Direct network when the
Brother machine is the Group
Owner (G/O).
After the current connection between your Brother
machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm
the connection status by printing the Network
Configuration Report.
Authentication
Error, contact
your
administrator.
Your authentication setting for
the Store Print Log to Network
feature is not correct.
• Make sure the Username and Password in
Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is
part of a domain, enter the username in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
• Make sure the time of the log file server matches the
time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings.
• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are
configured correctly so the time matches the time used
for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is
no SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time
Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based
Management or the control panel so the machine
matches the time being used by the server providing
the authentication.
Check User ID and
Password.
The Kerberos Authentication
error.
Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a
password for the Kerberos server. For more information on
the Kerberos server settings, contact your network
administrator.
The date, time and time zone
settings of the Brother
machine are not correct.
Confirm your machine's date, time and time zone settings.
The DNS server configuration
is not correct.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the DNS server settings.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Kerberos
server.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the Kerberos server settings.
Connection Error Other devices are trying to
connect to the Wi-Fi Direct
network at the same time.
• Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect
to the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure
the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
Connection Failed The Brother machine and your
mobile device cannot
communicate during the Wi-Fi
Direct network configuration.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure
you have entered the correct PIN.
File Access Error,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
access the destination folder
for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
• Make sure the stored directory name is correct.
• Make sure the stored directory is write-enabled.
• Make sure the file is not locked.
In Web Based Management,
you have selected the Cancel
Print option in the Error
Detection Setting of Store
Print Log to Network.
Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears
from the LCD.
595
Error Messages Cause Action
No Device When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the Brother
machine cannot find your
mobile device.
• Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the
Wi-Fi Direct mode.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, make sure you have entered the correct
password.
• If your mobile device has a configuration page for how
to obtain an IP address, make sure the IP address of
your mobile device has been configured via DHCP.
Server Timeout,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the server for the
Store Print Log to Network
feature.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Server Timeout The Brother machine cannot
connect to the LDAP server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Active
Directory® server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Wrong Date&Time,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine does not
obtain the time from the SNTP
time server or you have not
configured the Date&Time for
the machine.
• Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server
are configured correctly in Web Based Management.
• Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are
correct in Web Based Management.
Internal Error The Brother machine's LDAP
protocol is disabled.
Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the
necessary protocol setting in the Web Based
Management.
The Brother machine's CIFS
protocol is disabled.
Related Information
•Network Problems
596
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct
IP address and Subnet Mask.
• Windows® 7/Windows® 8/Windows® 10
You must log on with Administrator rights.
• Make sure the Brother machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer.
1. Do one of the following:
Option Description
Windows® 7 Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click
Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Network Connection Repair Tool.
Windows® 8/
Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your
model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then
click Network Connection Repair Tool.
• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report.
The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair
Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings >
Enable Connection Repair Tool. This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the
IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address.
If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection
Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information.
Related Information
•Network Problems
•Print the Network Configuration Report
•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network
•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
597
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?
Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?
•Print the Network Configuration Report
•Change Machine Settings from Your Computer
598
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup
Configuration
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to
resolve the problem, follow the instructions below:
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Cause Action Interface
Your security settings (SSID/
Network Key) are not
correct.
• Confirm the security settings using the Wireless Setup Helper
utility. For more information and to download the utility, go to your
model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com.
• Select and confirm that you are using the correct security
settings.
- See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access
point/router for information on how to find the security
settings.
- The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless
LAN access point/router may be used as the default security
settings.
- Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your
Internet provider, or network administrator.
Wireless
Your Brother machine's MAC
address is not allowed.
Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the
filter. You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's
control panel.
Wireless
Your wireless LAN access
point/router is in stealth
mode (not broadcasting the
SSID).
• Enter the correct SSID name or Network Key manually.
• Check the SSID name or the Network Key in the instructions
supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router and
reconfigure the wireless network setup.
Wireless
Your security settings (SSID/
password) are not correct.
• Confirm the SSID and password.
- When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID
and password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your
mobile device supports the manual configuration, the SSID
and password will be displayed on your mobile device’s
screen.
Wi-Fi Direct
You are using Android™ 4.0. If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after
using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS
(recommended) and set the Brother machine as a G/O.
Wi-Fi Direct
Your Brother machine is
placed too far from your
mobile device.
Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 metre) of the
mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Wi-Fi Direct
There are some obstructions
(walls or furniture, for
example) between your
machine and the mobile
device.
Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area. Wi-Fi Direct
There is a wireless
computer, Bluetooth-
supported device,
microwave oven, or digital
cordless phone near the
Brother machine or the
mobile device.
Move other devices away from the Brother machine or the mobile
device.
Wi-Fi Direct
If you have checked and
tried all of the above, but still
cannot complete the Wi-Fi
• Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then try to configure
the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
Wi-Fi Direct
599
Cause Action Interface
Direct configuration, do the
following:
• If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how
many devices are allowed in the current Wi-Fi Direct network,
and then check how many devices are connected.
For Windows®
If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we
recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Related Information
•Network Problems
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•Use Wi-Fi Direct®
600
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX
Receive over the Network
My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the
Network
Cause Action Interface
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
(The Network scanning
feature does not work. )
• Windows®
Configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow
Network scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, type
the information below:
- In Name:
Type any description, for example Brother NetScan.
- In Port number:
Type 54925.
- In Protocol:
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
• Mac
Launch ControlCenter2. Click the Model pop-up menu, and then
select Other.... The Device Selector window appears. Reselect
your network machine, make sure Status is idle, and then click
OK.
Wired/Wireless
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
(The network PC-Fax
Receive feature does not
work.)
(Windows®)
Set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To
add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, type the information below:
• In Name:
Type any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
• In Port number:
Type 54926.
• In Protocol:
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/
Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
Some security software might block access without showing a security
alert dialog box even after successful installation.
To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask
the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your Brother machine was
not assigned an available
IP address.
• Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask.
Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your
computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the
same network.
For more information about how to verify the IP address and the
Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator.
• Windows®
Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network
Connection Repair Tool.
Wired/Wireless
The failed print job is still
in your computer's print
queue.
• If the failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it.
• Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and
cancel all documents:
- Windows® 7
Click (Start) > Devices and Printers > Printers and
Faxes.
Wired/Wireless
601
Cause Action Interface
- Windows® 8
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.
When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.
In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and
printers > Printers.
- Windows® 10 and Windows Server® 2016
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the
Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers
> Printers.
-Windows Server® 2008
Click Start > Control Panel > Printers.
- Windows Server® 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.
When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.
In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers >
Printers.
- Windows Server® 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware
group, click View devices and printers.
- macOS v10.10.5, v10.11.x, v10.12
Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners.
Your Brother machine is
not connected to the
wireless network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report. Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above, but your Brother machine still cannot print and scan, uninstall the
Brother software and drivers and reinstall them.
Related Information
•Network Problems
•Print the WLAN Report
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®)
•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
602
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working
Correctly
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
Check Action Interface
Check that your Brother
machine, access point/
router, or network hub is
turned on.
Check the following:
• The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is
turned on.
• The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link button is
blinking.
• All protective packaging has been removed from the machine.
• The toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly.
• The front and back covers are fully closed.
• Paper is inserted correctly in the paper tray.
• (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the
Brother machine and to the router or hub.
Wired/Wireless
Check the Link Status
in the Network
Configuration Report.
Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link
Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK.
Wired/Wireless
Check that you can
"ping" the Brother
machine from your
computer.
Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or
the node name in the Windows® command prompt or Mac Terminal
application:
ping <ipaddress> or <nodename>.
• Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and
connected to the same network as your computer.
• Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same
network as your computer.
(Windows®)
Ask the network administrator and use the Network Connection Repair
Tool to fix the IP address and the subnet mask.
(Mac)
Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly.
Wired/Wireless
Check that your Brother
machine is connected to
the wireless network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report. Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with
your wireless LAN access point/router to find the SSID and the Network Key information and set them correctly.
Related Information
•Network Problems
•Print the Network Configuration Report
•Print the WLAN Report
•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows®)
•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network
603
Home > Troubleshooting > Google Cloud Print Problems
Google Cloud Print Problems
Difficulty Suggestions
My Brother machine is not displayed in the printer list. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Confirm that Google Cloud Print™ is enabled.
Confirm that your machine is registered with Google
Cloud Print™. If it is not registered, try to register again.
I cannot print. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Confirm your network settings. See Related Information.
Certain files may not be printable, or may not appear
exactly as they are displayed.
I cannot register my Brother machine with Google Cloud
Print™.
Make sure your machine is connected to a network with
Internet access.
Verify that the date and time are set correctly on your
machine.
I do not see a confirmation message on my Brother
machine when I try to register with Google Cloud Print™,
even after repeating the registration steps.
Make sure your Brother machine is idle while you are
registering with Google Cloud Print™.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•Network Settings for Using Google Cloud Print
604
Home > Troubleshooting > AirPrint Problems
AirPrint Problems
Difficulty Suggestions
My Brother machine is not displayed in the printer list. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
Confirm the network settings. See Related Information.
Move the mobile device closer to the wireless access
point/router, or to your Brother machine.
I cannot print. Make sure your Brother machine is turned on.
Confirm the network settings. See Related Information.
I am trying to print a multiple-page document from an
Apple device, but ONLY the first page is printing.
Make sure you are running the latest version of iOS.
Refer to the following Apple support article for more
information about AirPrint: support.apple.com/kb/HT4356.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•AirPrint Overview
605
Home > Troubleshooting > Other Problems
Other Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine will not turn on. Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as
lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the
machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Unplug the power
cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord
and press to turn on the machine.
If the problem is not solved and you are using a power
breaker, disconnect it to make sure it is not the problem.
Plug the machine's power cord directly into a different
known working wall electrical socket. If there is still no
power, try a different power cable.
The machine cannot print EPS data that includes binary
with the BR-Script3 printer driver.
(Windows®)
To print EPS data, do the following:
1. For Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2:
Click the Start button > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server® 2008:
Click the (Start) button > Control Panel >
Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows® 8 and Windows Server® 2012:
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound 1
group, click View devices and printers.
For Windows® 10 and Windows Server® 2016:
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers.
For Windows Server® 2012 R2:
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX BR-Script3 icon,
select Printer properties.
3. From the Device Settings tab, choose TBCP (Tagged
binary communication protocol) in Output Protocol.
(Mac)
If your machine is connected to a computer with a USB
interface, you cannot print EPS data that includes binary.
You can print the EPS data at the machine through a
network. For help installing the BR-Script3 printer driver
through the network, go to the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com.
The Brother software cannot be installed. (Windows®)
If the Security Software warning appears on the computer
screen during the installation, change the Security
Software settings to permit the Brother product setup
program or other program to run.
(Mac)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or
antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then
install the Brother software.
606
1For Windows Server® 2012: Hardware and Sound
Copying difficulties
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot make a copy. Make sure you pressed Copy and the machine is in Copy
mode.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock Settings.
Vertical black line appears in copies. Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt
or correction fluid on the glass strip, or the corona wires
are dirty. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the
white bar and white plastic above them.
Copies are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly.
Scanning difficulties
Difficulties Suggestions
TWAIN or WIA errors appear when starting to scan.
(Windows®)
Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is selected
as the primary source in your scanning application. For
example, in Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE, click Desktop >
Scan Settings > Select to choose the Brother
TWAIN/WIA driver.
TWAIN or ICA errors appear when starting to scan. (Mac) Make sure the Brother TWAIN driver is selected as the
primary source.
You can also scan documents using the ICA Scanner
Driver.
OCR does not work. Try increasing the scanning resolution.
Cannot scan. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock Settings.
Software difficulties
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot install software or print. (Windows® )
Run the install program again. This program will repair
and reinstall the software.
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
607
Home > Troubleshooting > Check the Machine Information
Check the Machine Information
Follow these instructions to check your Brother machine's serial number and firmware version.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Serial No. Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Check your machine's firmware version.
Page Counter Check the number of total pages the machine has printed.
Parts Life Check the percentage of the supplies' life that remains available.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
608
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Brother Machine
Reset Your Brother Machine
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the type of reset functions, and then press the reset function you
want to use.
• The network settings, the security settings and address book data will not be reset by the [Machine
Reset].
• If you discard or transfer the machine, we recommend accomplishment of the [Factory Reset] to
erase the personal data in the machine.
3. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]
appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
The machine will restart.
4. Press .
You can also reset the Network settings by pressing [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network]
> [Network Reset].
Related Information
•Troubleshooting
•Reset Functions Overview
609
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Brother Machine > Reset Functions Overview
Reset Functions Overview
The following reset functions are available:
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network Settings Reset function, All Settings Reset function
or Factory Reset function.
1. Machine Reset
Reset all the machine’s settings that you have changed, such as Date and Time and Ring Delay.
The Address Book, fax reports, and Call history will remain. (For MFC Models)
2. Network Settings Reset (For Network Models)
Reset the print server back to its default factory settings (includes Password and IP Address information).
3. Address Book and Fax Settings Reset (For MFC Models)
This function resets the following settings:
• Address Book
(Addresses and Groups)
• Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Delayed Fax)
• Station ID
(name and number)
• Coverpage Message
• Fax receive settings
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows® only))
• Report
(Transmission Verification Report / Tel Index List / Fax Journal)
• Setting Lock password
4. All Settings Reset
Reset all the machine's settings back to the settings that were set at the factory.
All Settings Reset takes less time than Factory Reset.
5. Factory Reset
Use the Settings Reset function to reset all machine's settings to the settings originally set at the factory.
Factory Reset takes more time than All Settings Reset.
Brother strongly recommends you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network Settings Reset function, All Settings Reset function
or Factory Reset function.
Related Information
•Reset Your Brother Machine
610
Home > Routine Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
•Replace Supplies
•Clean the Machine
•Calibrate Colour Output
•Correct Colour Print Alignment (Colour Registration)
•Check the Remaining Part Life
•Pack and Ship Your Brother Machine
•Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
611
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies
Replace Supplies
You must replace supplies when the machine indicates that the life of the supply is over.
Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability. The toner
cartridge and drum unit are two separate supplies. Make sure both are installed as an assembly. The model
name of supplies may vary depending on the country.
NOTE
• Be sure to seal up the used supplies tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the
cartridge.
• Visit www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used supplies to the
Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used supply, discard the used supply
according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, contact
your local waste disposal office.
• We recommend placing used and new supplies on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally spilling or
scattering the material inside.
• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended print media, the life of supplies and
machine parts may be reduced.
• The projected life for each of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement
will vary depending on the print volume, percentage of coverage, types of media used, and powering
on/off the machine.
• Frequency of replacing supplies except toner cartridges will vary depending on the print volume, types of
media used, and powering on/off the machine.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash
it off with cold water.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner cartridge
Drum unit
612
Belt unit
Waste toner box
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
•Replace the Toner Cartridge
•Replace the Drum Unit
•Replace the Belt Unit
•Replace the Waste Toner Box
•Error and Maintenance Messages
•Supplies
613
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Toner Cartridge
Replace the Toner Cartridge
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
3. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
4. Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and gently push it away from you to unlock it. Pull it up and out of the
drum unit. Repeat this for all toner cartridges.
5. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times. Repeat this for all the corona wires.
614
1
To avoid poor print quality, be sure to lock the green tab into the home position (1), flush left with the left
side of the drum.
6. Unpack the new toner cartridge.
7. Remove the protective cover.
8. Insert the toner cartridge into the drum unit and gently pull it toward you until you hear it lock into place. Make
sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all
toner cartridges.
BK
BK
C
M
Y
• BK: Black
• C: Cyan
• M: Magenta
• Y: Yellow
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
9. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
615
10. Close the machine's front cover.
• After replacing a toner cartridge, DO NOT turn the machine off or open the front cover until the
machine's display returns to Ready Mode.
• The toner cartridge that comes with your Brother machine is a Inbox toner cartridge.
• We recommend keeping a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the Toner Low warning.
• To ensure high quality printing, we recommend using only Brother Original toner cartridges. When you
want to buy toner cartridges, contact Brother Customer Service or your Brother Dealer.
• DO NOT unpack the new toner cartridge until you are ready to install it.
• If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.
• Brother strongly recommends you DO NOT refill the toner cartridge provided with your machine. We
also strongly recommend you continue to use only Brother Original replacement toner cartridges. Use
or attempted use of third-party toner and/or cartridges in the Brother machine may cause damage to the
machine and/or may result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our limited warranty coverage does not apply
to any problem that is caused by the use of third party toner and/or cartridges. To protect your
investment and obtain premium performance from the Brother machine, we strongly recommend the
use of Brother Original Supplies.
Related Information
•Replace Supplies
•Improve the Print Quality
616
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Drum Unit
Replace the Drum Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
3. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
4. Turn the green lock lever (1) counterclockwise until it locks in the release position. Holding the green handles
of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
2
1
IMPORTANT
Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new drum unit.
617
6. Remove the protective cover.
7. Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and gently push it away from you to unlock it. Pull it up and out of the
drum unit. Repeat this for all toner cartridges.
8. Reinsert the toner cartridge into the new drum unit and gently pull it toward you until you hear it lock into
place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat
this for all toner cartridges.
BK
BK
C
M
Y
• BK: Black
• C: Cyan
• M: Magenta
• Y: Yellow
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
9. Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position, as shown in the illustration.
618
2
1
10. Gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
2
11. Turn the green lock lever clockwise to the lock position.
2
12. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
13. Close the machine's front cover.
NOTE
• Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and rotation of the drum and interaction with paper, toner and
other materials in the paper path. In designing this product, Brother decided to use the number of
rotations of the drum as a reasonable determinant of the drum life. When a drum reaches the factory-
established rotation limit corresponding to the rated page yield, the product’s LCD will advise you to
replace the drum. The product will continue to function; however, print quality may not be optimal.
619
• If an unpacked drum unit is placed in direct sunlight (or room light for long periods of time), the unit may
be damaged.
• There are many factors that determine the actual drum life, such as the temperature, humidity, type of
paper, type of toner used and so on. Under ideal conditions, the average drum life is estimated at
approximately 30,000 pages based on 1 page per job and 50,000 pages based on 3 pages per job [A4/
letter simplex pages]. The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not
limited to media type and media size.
Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot
guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum.
• For best performance, use only Brother Original toner.
• The machine should be used only in a clean, dust-free environment with adequate ventilation.
Printing with a non-Brother drum unit may reduce not only the print quality but also the quality and life of
the machine itself. Warranty coverage does not apply to problems caused by the use of a non-Brother
drum unit.
Related Information
•Replace Supplies
•Error and Maintenance Messages
•Improve the Print Quality
620
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Belt Unit
Replace the Belt Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
3. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
4. Turn the green lock lever (1) counterclockwise until it locks in the release position. Holding the green handles
of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
2
1
IMPORTANT
Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
5. Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.
621
6. Unpack the new belt unit and install the new belt unit in the machine. Make sure the belt unit is level and fits
firmly into place.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
7. Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position, as shown in the illustration.
2
1
8. Gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
622
2
9. Turn the green lock lever clockwise to the lock position.
2
10. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
11. Close the machine's front cover.
Related Information
•Replace Supplies
•Improve the Print Quality
623
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Waste Toner Box
Replace the Waste Toner Box
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
3. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
4. Turn the green lock lever (1) counterclockwise until it locks in the release position. Holding the green handles
of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
2
1
IMPORTANT
Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
5. Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.
624
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
6. Remove the two pieces of orange packing material and discard them.
This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and is not
required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to
protect your machine during shipment.
7. Hold the blue handle of the waste toner box and remove the waste toner box from the machine.
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.
8. Unpack the new waste toner box and install the new waste toner box in the machine using the blue handle.
Make sure the waste toner box is level and fits firmly into place.
625
9. Slide the belt unit back into the machine. Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
10. Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position, as shown in the illustration.
2
1
11. Gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
626
2
12. Turn the green lock lever clockwise to the lock position.
2
13. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
14. Close the machine's front cover.
Related Information
•Replace Supplies
627
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine
Clean the Machine
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth.
When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure you clean the inside of the machine. If printed
pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
• DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing alcohol or
ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire. Instead, use only a
dry, lint-free cloth.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner cartridge
Drum unit
Belt unit
628
Waste toner box
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
•Clean the Scanner
•Clean the Laser Scanner Windows
•Clean the Touchscreen LCD
•Clean the Corona Wires
•Clean the Drum Unit
•Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
629
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Scanner
Clean the Scanner
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Lift the document cover (1). Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft
lint-free cloth moistened with water.
1
2
3
3. In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water.
2
1
4. Open the scanner glass cover (1), and then clean the other white bar (2) and scanner glass strip (3)
(supported models only).
1
2
3
5. Close the document cover.
6. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•Clean the Machine
630
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Laser Scanner Windows
Clean the Laser Scanner Windows
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
3. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
4. Turn the green lock lever (1) counterclockwise until it locks in the release position. Holding the green handles
of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
2
1
IMPORTANT
Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
5. Wipe the four laser scanner windows (1) with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth.
631
1
6. Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position, as shown in the illustration.
2
1
7. Gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
2
8. Turn the green lock lever clockwise to the lock position.
2
9. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
632
10. Close the machine's front cover.
11. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•Clean the Machine
633
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Clean the Touchscreen LCD
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners (including ethanol).
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Clean the touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
3. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•Clean the Machine
634
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Corona Wires
Clean the Corona Wires
1. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
2. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
3. Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and gently push it away from you to unlock it. Pull it up and out of the
drum unit. Repeat this for all toner cartridges.
4. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times. Repeat this for all the corona wires.
1
635
To avoid poor print quality, be sure to lock the green tab into the home position (1), flush left with the left
side of the drum.
5. Insert the toner cartridge into the drum unit and gently pull it toward you until you hear it lock into place. Make
sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all
toner cartridges.
BK
BK
C
M
Y
• BK: Black
• C: Cyan
• M: Magenta
• Y: Yellow
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
6. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
7. Close the machine's front cover.
Related Information
•Clean the Machine
•Error and Maintenance Messages
636
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Drum Unit
Clean the Drum Unit
If your printout has black or white dots or other repeating marks at 94 mm intervals, the drum may have foreign
material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface.
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready Mode.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Drum Dot Print].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
3. Press [Yes].
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
4. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
5. Press the front cover release button and pull open the front cover.
6. Hold the drum unit's green handle. Pull the drum unit out of the machine until it stops.
7. Turn the green lock lever (1) counterclockwise until it locks in the release position. Holding the green handles
of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.
2
1
IMPORTANT
Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.
637
8. Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and gently push it away from you to unlock it. Pull it up and out of the
drum unit. Repeat this for all toner cartridges.
9. Turn the drum unit over by holding the green handles. Make sure that the drum unit gears (1) are on the left
side.
1
10. Use the numbered markers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a cyan dot in column 2 on
the check sheet would mean that there is a mark in the “2” region of the cyan drum.
638
• BK: Black
• C: Cyan
• M: Magenta
• Y: Yellow
11. Hold the drum unit frame with both hands, place your left thumb on the drum unit gear, and roll the drum
toward you by hand while looking at the surface of the suspected area.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the surface of the drum unit except the edge.
12. Wipe the surface of the drum gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark on the surface comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
13. Turn the drum unit over by holding the green handles.
14. Reinsert the toner cartridge into the new drum unit and gently pull it toward you until you hear it lock into
place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat
this for all toner cartridges.
BK
BK
C
M
Y
• BK: Black
639
• C: Cyan
• M: Magenta
• Y: Yellow
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
15. Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position, as shown in the illustration.
2
1
16. Gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.
2
17. Turn the green lock lever clockwise to the lock position.
2
18. Using the green handle, push the drum unit back into the machine until it locks in place.
19. Close the machine's front cover.
20. Press to turn the machine on.
640
Related Information
•Clean the Machine
•Improve the Print Quality
641
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers periodically may prevent paper jams by ensuring that paper feeds properly.
If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows:
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. If paper is loaded or something is stuck inside in the paper tray, remove it.
4. Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad on the paper
tray to remove dust.
5. Wipe the two pick-up rollers inside the machine to remove dust.
6. Reload the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
7. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•Clean the Machine
•Printing Problems
642
Home > Routine Maintenance > Calibrate Colour Output
Calibrate Colour Output
The output density for each colour may vary depending on the machine’s environment, including factors like
temperature and humidity. Calibrating your machine helps improve the output colour density.
If you are using the Mac printer driver, the printer driver automatically retrieves the calibration data. To
retrieve the data manually, you must perform the calibration using Brother's Status Monitor.
1. Press [Toner] > [Calibration] > [Calibrate]
2. Press [Yes].
Calibration starts automatically, and will take a few minutes.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
•Reset the Machine's Calibration Settings
•Improve the Print Quality
•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)
643
Home > Routine Maintenance > Calibrate Colour Output > Reset the Machine's Calibration Settings
Reset the Machine's Calibration Settings
If the output colour differs from what you see on your monitor, try resetting your machine's calibration
parameters.
1. Press [Toner] > [Calibration] > [Reset]
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
•Calibrate Colour Output
644
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Colour Print Alignment (Colour Registration)
Correct Colour Print Alignment (Colour Registration)
If solid areas of colour or images have cyan, magenta or yellow fringes, use the Colour Registration function.
1. Press [Toner] > [Registration]
2. Press [Yes].
Colour registration starts automatically, and will take around 10 seconds or more.
3. Press .
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
645
Home > Routine Maintenance > Check the Remaining Part Life
Check the Remaining Part Life
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] > [Parts Life].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the machine part you want to check.
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
3. Press .
To display the approximate remaining life of the toner cartridge, press on the LCD.
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
646
Home > Routine Maintenance > Pack and Ship Your Brother Machine
Pack and Ship Your Brother Machine
WARNING
• This product is heavy and weighs more than 27.6 kg. To prevent possible injuries, at least two people
should lift the product by holding it at the front and back.
• When you move the machine, carry the machine as shown in the illustration below.
• If the machine has the Optional Tray(s) installed, remove the Optional Tray(s) BEFORE moving the
machine. Attempting to move the machine without removing the Optional Tray(s) may cause injury to you
or damage to the machine.
• Pack the Optional Tray(s) separately in its original carton with original packing material.
• If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to
avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. Leave the machine off for at least 10 minutes to cool down.
2. Disconnect all the cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
3. Put the machine into the bag it originally came in.
4. Pack the machine, the printed materials, and the AC power cord (if applicable) in the original carton with the
original packing material as shown.
647
(1)
Packing (1) is only for certain models.
5. Close the carton and tape it shut.
6. If you have a Lower Tray, repack it as shown.
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
648
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace the following parts regularly to maintain print quality. The parts listed below must be replaced after
printing approximately 50,000 pages 1 for the PF Kit MP and 100,000 pages 1 for the other parts.
Contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer when the following message appears on the LCD:
LCD Message Description
Replace Fuser 2 Replace the Fuser Unit.
Replace Laser 2 Replace the Laser Unit.
Replace PF Kit 1 2 Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Paper Tray.
Replace PF Kit 2 2 3 Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Optional Tray(s).
Replace PF Kit MP 2 Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Multi-purpose Tray.
Related Information
•Routine Maintenance
1Letter or A4 size 1-sided pages
2Replacement frequency depends on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage, and the type of media used.
3If you use the Optional Tray(s) with your machine, this message will appear on the LCD. When the machine has multiple Optional Trays, the
machine displays messages using numbers corresponding to each Optional Tray.
649
Home > Machine Settings
Machine Settings
Customise settings and features, create shortcuts, and work with options displayed on the machine's LCD to
make your Brother machine a more efficient work tool.
•Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
•Change Machine Settings from Your Computer
650
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
•In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage)
•General Settings
•Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
•Print Reports
•Settings and Features Tables
651
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > In the Event of Power
Failure (Memory Storage)
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage)
Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost.Temporary settings
(for example, Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost.
• During a power failure, the machine will retain the date and time and programmed fax timer jobs (for
example: Delayed Fax) for approximately 60 hours. Other fax jobs in the machine's memory will not be lost.
Related Information
•Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
652
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings
General Settings
•Adjust the Machine's Volume
•Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
•Set Sleep Mode Countdown
•About Deep Sleep Mode
•Set Auto Power Off Mode
•Set the Date and Time
•Set the Time Zone
•Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
•Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
•Set Your Station ID
•Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
•Reduce Toner Consumption
•Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
•Reduce Printing Noise
•Change the Language on the LCD
653
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the Machine's Volume
Adjust the Machine's Volume
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the following options:
(The options will vary depending on your machine.)
•[Ring]
Adjust the ring volume.
•[Beep]
Adjust the volume of the beep you hear when you press a button, make a mistake, or after you send or
receive a fax.
•[Speaker]
Adjust the speaker volume.
3. Select the [Off], [Low], [Med] or [High] option, and then press the option you want.
4. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
654
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
You can program the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and backward one hour in the autumn. Make sure you have set
the correct date and time in the Date & Time setting.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Auto
Daylight].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
655
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Sleep Mode Countdown
Set Sleep Mode Countdown
The Sleep Mode (or Power Save Mode) setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep
Mode, it acts as though it is turned off. The machine will wake up and start printing when it receives a print job or
a fax. Use these instructions to set a time delay (countdown) before the machine enters Sleep Mode.
• You can choose how long the machine must be idle before it goes into Sleep Mode.
• The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a print job.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Sleep Time].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine will remain idle before entering Sleep Mode, and
then press [OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
656
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > About
Deep Sleep Mode
About Deep Sleep Mode
If the machine is in Sleep Mode and does not receive any jobs for certain length of time, the machine will
automatically enter Deep Sleep Mode. The length of time is based on your specific model and settings.
Deep Sleep Mode uses less power than Sleep Mode.
Applicable Models Machine's LCD in Deep Sleep Mode Conditions That Will Wake the
Machine
DCP-L8410CDW/
MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW/
MFC-L9570CDW
The LCD backlight turns off and the
Power LED brightens and dims.
• The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses , or the
touchscreen LCD.
Related Information
•General Settings
657
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Auto Power Off Mode
Set Auto Power Off Mode
If the machine is in Deep Sleep Mode for certain length of time, based on your model and settings, the machine
will go into Power Off Mode automatically. The machine does not go into Power Off Mode when the machine is
connected to a network or a telephone line , or has secure print data in the memory.
• To start printing, press on the control panel and then send a print job.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Auto Power Off].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the [Off], [1hour], [2hours], [4hours] or [8hours] option you want.
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
658
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the
Date and Time
Set the Date and Time
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Date].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter the last two digits of the year using the LCD, and then press [OK].
3. Enter the two digits for the month using the LCD, and then press [OK].
4. Enter the two digits for the day using the LCD, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Time].
6. Enter the time (in 24-hour format) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
7. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
659
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the
Time Zone
Set the Time Zone
Set the time zone for your location on the machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Time Zone].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter your time zone.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
660
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the LCD Backlight Brightness
Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, changing the brightness setting may help.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Backlight].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the [Light], [Med] or [Dark] option.
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
661
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Dim Timer].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press the option you want:
•[10Secs]
•[30Secs]
•[1Min]
•[2Mins]
•[3Mins]
•[5Mins]
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
662
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Your Station ID
Set Your Station ID
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Set the machine to print your Station ID and the fax's date and time at the top of each fax you send.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Station ID] > [Fax].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Tel].
4. Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Name].
6. Enter your name (up to 20 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. (The characters available
may differ depending on your country.)
If your machine displays , press .
• If you enter an incorrect character, press d or c to move the cursor to it and press . Press the
correct character.
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c.
• For more detailed information, see Related Information.
7. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine
•Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
•Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
663
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Your Brother machine is set for a Tone dialling service. If you have a Pulse dialling (rotary) service, you must
change the dialling mode.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Tone/Pulse].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Tone] or [Pulse].
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
664
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Toner Consumption
Reduce Toner Consumption
Using the Toner Save feature may reduce toner consumption. When Toner Save is set to on, the print on your
documents appears lighter.
We DO NOT recommend using the Toner Save feature for printing photo or greyscale images.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Toner Save].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
•Improve the Print Quality
665
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Prevent
Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
This feature prevents users from sending a fax or call to the wrong number by mistake. You can set the machine
to restrict dialling when you use the dial pad, Address Book, Shortcuts and LDAP search.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Dial Restriction].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the following options:
•[Dial Pad]
•[Address Book]
If you combine Address Book numbers when dialling, the numbers will be recognised as dial pad input and
will not be restricted.
•[Shortcuts]
•[LDAP Server]
3. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Enter #
Twice
The machine prompts you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same
number correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD
will display an error message.
On The machine restricts all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialling method.
Off The machine does not restrict the dialling method.
• The [Enter # Twice] setting will not work if you use an external phone before entering the number.
You will not be asked to re-enter the number.
• If you choose [On] or [Enter # Twice], you cannot use the Broadcasting feature.
4. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
666
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Printing Noise
Reduce Printing Noise
The Quiet Mode setting can reduce printing noise. When Quiet Mode is turned on, the print speed becomes
slower. The factory setting is off.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Quiet Mode].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
667
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
the Language on the LCD
Change the Language on the LCD
Change the LCD language if needed.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Local Language].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press your language.
3. Press .
Related Information
•General Settings
668
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
•Add Shortcuts
•Change or Delete Shortcuts
•Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
669
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut > Add Shortcuts
Add Shortcuts
You can add the Fax, Copy, Scan, Web Connect and Apps settings you use most frequently by saving them as
your Shortcuts. Later you can press the Shortcut to apply these settings instead of manually re-entering them.
Some Shortcut menus are not available depending on your model.
These instructions describe how to add a Copy Shortcut. The steps for adding a Fax, Scan, Web Connect or
Apps Shortcut are very similar.
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab.
Swipe to display the tab if needed.
3. Press where you have not added a Shortcut.
4. Press [Copy].
5. Press > to access the preset copy settings.
6. Swipe to display the copy presets, and then press the copy preset you want.
7. Press [Options].
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to
change.
9. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option
you want.
Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want.
10. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
11. Press [Save as Shortcut].
12. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
13. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Related Information
•Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
670
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut > Change or Delete Shortcuts
Change or Delete Shortcuts
You cannot change a Web Connect Shortcut or Apps Shortcut. If you need to change them, delete them,
and then add a new Shortcut.
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab to display the Shortcut you want to change.
Swipe to display the tab if needed.
3. Press the Shortcut you want to change.
The settings for the Shortcut you selected appear.
To delete the Shortcut or edit the name, press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear, and then
follow the on-screen menus.
4. Press [Options].
5. Change the settings for the Shortcut if needed.
6. Press [OK] (if needed).
7. When finished, press [Save as Shortcut].
8. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
9. Do one of the following:
• To overwrite the Shortcut, press [Yes].
• If you do not want to overwrite the Shortcut, press [No] to enter a new Shortcut name.
Enter a new name using the LCD, and then press [OK].
To edit the name, hold down to delete the current name.
Related Information
•Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
671
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut > Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
You can assign one machine Shortcut to your ID card. When you touch your ID card to the machine's NFC
symbol, your personal Shortcut will automatically appear on the touchscreen.
• You cannot use the same ID card for different Shortcuts.
• To use the ID card for another Shortcut, unregister the card first, and then register it with the new
Shortcut.
1. Press the tab that contains the Shortcut you want to assign to your ID card.
2. Press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear.
3. Press [Register Card/NFC].
4. Touch the ID card to the NFC symbol.
5. Press [Register].
The Shortcut is assigned to the ID Card.
Related Information
•Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
672
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports
Print Reports
•Reports
•Print a Report
673
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Reports
Reports
The following reports are available:
XMIT Verify (MFC models)
The XMIT Verify report prints a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book (MFC models)
The Address Book report prints an alphabetical list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book
memory.
Fax Journal (MFC models)
The Fax Journal prints a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means
Transmit, RX means Receive)
User Settings
The User Settings report prints a list of your current settings.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings report prints a list of your current printer settings.
Network Configuration (Models with network functionality)
The Network Configuration report prints a list of your current network settings.
Print File List
The Print File List prints a list of the fonts and print macros stored in the machine.
Drum Dot Print
The Drum Dot Print prints the drum dot sheet, which helps when it is time to clean the drum unit.
WLAN Report (Models with wireless network functionality)
The WLAN Report prints the wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.
Related Information
•Print Reports
674
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Print a
Report
Print a Report
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the report you want to print, and then press it.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you choose [XMIT Verify], do one of the following:
- To view the Transmission Verification Report, press [View on LCD].
- To print the Transmission Verification Report, press [Print Report].
• If you choose other reports, go to next step.
4. Press [Yes].
5. Press .
Related Information
•Print Reports
675
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables
Settings and Features Tables
The Settings tables will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine’s
programs.
•Settings Tables (MFC-L8690CDW)
•Settings Tables (DCP-L8410CDW)
•Settings Tables (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
•Feature Tables (MFC-L8690CDW)
•Feature Tables (DCP-L8410CDW)
•Feature Tables (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
676
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (MFC-L8690CDW)
Settings Tables (MFC-L8690CDW)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW
[Settings]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Date & Time - Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Toner Toner Life - View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print - Print a test page.
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
Network Wired LAN - Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
WLAN - Access the WLAN setting menus.
Screen Settings - - Access the default screen setting menus.
Wi-Fi Direct - - Access the Wi-Fi Direct setting menus.
Tray Setting - - Access the tray setting menus.
All Settings - - Configure the detailed settings.
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Tray Setting Paper Type MP Tray Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
MP tray.
Tray #1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray #2 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Tray #3 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 3).
Tray #4 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 4).
Paper Size MP Tray Select the size of paper you loaded in the MP tray.
Tray #1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray #2 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 2).
Tray #3 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 3).
Tray #4 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 4).
Check Size - Select whether to display a message telling you to
check that the size of the paper in the machine and the
machine's Paper Size setting match.
Tray Use: Copy - Select the tray to be used for Copy.
677
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Tray Setting Tray Use: Fax - Select the tray to be used for Fax.
Tray Use: Print - Select the tray to be used for Print.
Volume Ring - Adjust the ring volume.
Beep - Adjust the beeper volume.
Speaker - Adjust the speaker volume.
LCD Settings Backlight - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go
back to your Main Home screen.
Screen
Settings
Main Home Screen - Set the Main Home screen.
Copy Screen - Set the default Copy screen.
Scan Screen - Set the default Scan screen.
Notice
Settings
Scan Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- Displays the total scanned pages and skipped blank
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Toner Save - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time - Set how much time will pass before the machine
enters Power Saving Mode.
Quiet Mode - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off - Set the number of hours that the machine will remain
in Deep Sleep Mode before going into Power Off
Mode.
Setting Lock Set Password - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the
machine’s settings.
Lock Off⇒On -
New Password
(Available only when you
enter the password for the
first time.)
-
1Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a Shortcut) Rename Change the shortcut name.
Edit Change the shortcut settings.
Delete Delete the shortcut.
[All Settings] > [Fax]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Receive Receive Mode - Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs.
Ring Delay - Set the number of rings before the machine answers
in Fax or Fax/Tel mode.
F/T Ring Time - Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in
Fax/Tel mode.
Fax Preview - View received faxes on the LCD.
Fax Detect - Receive fax messages automatically when you
answer a call and hear fax tones.
678
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Receive Remote Codes Remote Codes Answer calls at an extension or external telephone
and use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off.
You can personalise the codes.
Act.Code
Deact.Code
Auto Reduction - Reduce the size of incoming faxes.
PC Fax Receive On Set the machine to send faxes to your computer.
You can turn on the Backup Print safety feature.
Off
Memory Receive Off -
Fax Forward Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store
incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve
them while you are away from your machine).
If you select Fax Forward, you can turn on the
Backup Print safety feature.
Fax Storage
Forward to
Cloud
Forward incoming faxes to the online service.
Fax Rx Stamp - Print the received time and date on the top of
received faxes.
2-sided - Print received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Setup Send Batch TX - Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at
the same time of day into one transmission.
Coverpage
Setting
Print Sample Print a sample of the fax cover page. You can fill in
information and fax it with your document.
Coverpage
Note
Set up your own comments for the fax cover page.
Auto Redial - Set the machine to redial the last fax number after
five minutes if the fax did not go through because the
line was busy.
Destination - Set the machine to display the destination
information on the LCD during fax dialling.
Report Setting XMIT Report - Select the initial setup for the Transmission
Verification Report.
Journal Period Journal
Period
Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax
Journal.
Time If you select an option other than Off and Every 50
Faxes, you can set the time for the option.
Day If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the
week.
Print Document - - Print received faxes stored in the machine's memory.
Remote Access - - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval.
Dial Restriction Dial Pad - Set the machine to restrict dialling when using the
dial pad.
Address Book - Set the machine to restrict the dialling when using
the Address Book.
Shortcuts - Set the machine to restrict the dialling when using a
Shortcut.
LDAP Server
(Available after
Internet Fax (I-Fax)
is downloaded)
- Set the machine to restrict the dialling of LDAP
server numbers.
679
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Remaining Jobs - - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's
memory and cancel selected jobs.
Miscellaneous BT Call Sign
(U.K. only)
- Use with BT Call Sign.
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation - - Select the emulation mode.
Quality - - Select the print quality.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print - Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print - Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long
edge or short edge.
Single Image - For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided
image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce
printing time.
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, you
must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you
select 1-sided Feed for letterhead or preprinted
paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse
side.
Auto Continue - - Select if you want the machine to clear paper size
errors or media type errors automatically, and use
paper from other trays.
Output Colour - - Set the output colour.
HP Tray Command - - Select the correct version of HP LaserJet tray
emulation.
Reset Printer - - Restore the printer settings to the factory settings.
Colour
Correction
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct
colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
Auto Correction - Set the machine to perform Colour Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Colour Settings Setting Mode Select whether to apply the colour print settings of
the machine or the printer driver.
Colour Mode Select the colour mode.
Improve Grey
Colour
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of
shaded areas.
Enhance Black
Printing
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print
correctly.
Brightness Adjust the brightness.
Contrast Adjust the contrast.
Red Adjust the red colour.
Green Adjust the green colour.
Blue Adjust the blue colour.
680
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP BOOT Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the BOOT method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name - Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. To
use the IPv6 protocol, go to the
Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com for more
information.
Ethernet - - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status - - View the current wired status.
MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to
Default
- - Restore the wired network settings
to the factory settings.
Wired Enable - - Turn the Wired LAN on or off
manually.
WLAN TCP/IP BOOT Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the BOOT method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name - Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
681
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
WLAN TCP/IP DNS Server Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. To
use the IPv6 protocol, go to the
Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com for more
information.
Setup Wizard - - Configure the wireless network
settings using the setup wizard.
WLAN
Assistant
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using the Brother
installation disc.
WPS - - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button push
method.
WPS w/ PIN
Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status - View the current wireless network
status.
Signal - View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID - View the current SSID.
Comm. Mode - View the current Communication
Mode.
MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to
Default
- - Restore the wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable - - Turns the wireless interface on or
off.
Wi-Fi Direct Push Button - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using the one-
button push method.
PIN Code - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using WPS with a
PIN code.
Manual - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings manually.
Group Owner - - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Device
Information
Device Name - View your machine's device name.
SSID - View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not
connected, the LCD displays Not
Connected.
IP Address - View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status - View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network status.
682
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wi-Fi Direct Status
Information
Signal - View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group
Owner, the LCD always indicates a
strong signal.
I/F Enable - - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection
on or off.
E-mail/IFAX
(Available after
Internet Fax (I-Fax) is
downloaded)
Mail Address - - Enter the email address.
Setup Server SMTP Server Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for
email notification.
SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
POP3/IMAP4 Protocol Select the protocol for receiving an
email from the server.
Server Enter the server name and
address.
Port Enter the port number.
Mailbox
Name
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 60 characters)
Mailbox
Password
Enter the password to login to the
server.
(Up to 32 characters)
Select
Folder
Select the specified folder in the
mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol.
SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
APOP Turn APOP on or off.
Setup Mail RX Auto Polling Auto
Polling
Check the server for new
messages automatically.
Poll
Frequency
Set the interval for checking new
messages on the server.
Header - Select the contents of the email
header to be printed.
Del/Read Error
Mail
- The POP3 server deletes error
emails automatically. The IMAP4
server deletes error emails
automatically after you read them.
Notification - Receive notification messages.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject - View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents.
683
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
E-mail/IFAX
(Available after
Internet Fax (I-Fax) is
downloaded)
Setup Mail TX Size Limit Maximum
Size(MB)
Limit the size of email documents.
Notification - Send notification messages.
Setup Relay Relay Broadcast - Relay a document to another fax
machine.
Relay Domain Relay XX Register the Domain name.
Relay Report - Print the relay Broadcast Report.
Manual
Receive
- - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server
for new messages manually.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy
Settings
Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection
settings.
Address -
Port -
User Name -
Password -
Fax to Server
(Available after
Internet Fax (I-Fax) is
downloaded)
Fax to Server - - Select the network connection
type.
Prefix - -
Suffix - -
IPsec - - - IPsec is an optional security
feature of the IP protocol that
provides authentication and
encryption services. We
recommend contacting your
network administrator before
changing this setting.
Network Reset - - - Restore all network settings back
to the factory settings.
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
XMIT Verify View on LCD Display Transmission Verification Reports about sent faxes.
Print Report Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book - Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Fax Journal - Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing
faxes.
(TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.)
User Settings - Print a list of your settings.
Printer Settings - Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration - Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List - Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print - Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report - Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Serial No. - - Check your machine's serial number.
684
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Firmware Version Main Version - Check your machine's firmware version.
Sub1 Version -
Page Counter Total Colour Check the number of the pages the machine has printed.
Black and
White
Fax -
Copy Colour
Black and
White
Print Colour
Black and
White
Other Colour
Black and
White
Parts Life 1Drum - Display the remaining life of the drum unit.
Belt - Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Fuser - Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
Laser Unit - Display the remaining life of the laser unit.
PF Kit MP - Display the remaining life of the PF kit MP.
PF Kit 1 - Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 1.
PF Kit 2 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 2.
PF Kit 3 2 - Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 3.
PF Kit 4 2 - Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 4.
1Life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
2Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Date & Time Date Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the
faxes you send.
Time
Auto Daylight Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Time Zone Set your time zone.
Station ID Fax Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you
fax.
Tel
Name
Tone/Pulse
(Available only for some
countries)
- Select the dialling mode.
Dial Tone - Shorten the dial tone detect pause.
Phone Line Set - Select the telephone line type.
Compatibility - Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties.
685
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If
you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic (for
VoIP).
Reset Machine Reset Restore the machine settings that you have changed, such as Date
and Time.
Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book
& Fax
Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the memory. You cannot see the data on
the machine.
Factory Reset Restore all the machine settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the machine's memory. We recommend
using this menu option if you want to delete all the data from the
machine.
Local Language
(Available only for some
countries)
- Change your LCD language.
Related Information
•Settings and Features Tables
686
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (DCP-L8410CDW)
Settings Tables (DCP-L8410CDW)
Related Models: DCP-L8410CDW
[Settings]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Date & Time - Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Toner Toner Life - View the approximate remaining toner life.
Test Print - Print a test page.
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Registration - Access the Registration menu to adjust the print position of
each colour.
Network Wired LAN - Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
WLAN - Access the WLAN setting menus.
Screen Settings - - Access the default screen setting menus.
Wi-Fi Direct - - Access the Wi-Fi Direct setting menus.
Tray Setting - - Access the tray setting menus.
All Settings - - Configure the detailed settings.
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Tray Setting Paper Type MP Tray Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
MP tray.
Tray #1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray #2 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Tray #3 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 3).
Tray #4 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 4).
Paper Size MP Tray Select the size of paper you loaded in the MP tray.
Tray #1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray #2 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 2).
Tray #3 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 3).
Tray #4 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 4).
Check Size - Select whether to display a message telling you to
check that the size of the paper in the machine and the
machine's Paper Size setting match.
687
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Tray Setting Tray Use: Copy - Select the tray to be used for Copy.
Tray Use: Print - Select the tray to be used for Print.
Volume Beep - Adjust the beeper volume.
LCD Settings Backlight - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go
back to your Main Home screen.
Screen
Settings
Home Screen - Set the Main Home screen.
Copy Screen - Set the default Copy screen.
Scan Screen - Set the default Scan screen.
Notice
Settings
Scan Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- Displays the total scanned pages and skipped blank
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Toner Save - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time - Set how much time will pass before the machine
enters Power Saving Mode.
Quiet Mode - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off - Set the number of hours that the machine will remain
in Deep Sleep Mode before going into Power Off
Mode.
Setting Lock Set Password - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the
machine’s settings.
Lock Off⇒On -
New Password
(Available only when you
enter the password for the
first time.)
-
1Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions
(Select a Shortcut) Rename Change the shortcut name.
Edit Change the shortcut settings.
Delete Delete the shortcut.
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Emulation - - Select the emulation mode.
Quality - - Select the print quality.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print - Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print - Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long
edge or short edge.
Single Image - For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided
image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce
printing time.
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, you
must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you
688
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
2-sided select 1-sided Feed for letterhead or preprinted
paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse
side.
Auto Continue - - Select if you want the machine to clear paper size
errors or media type errors automatically, and use
paper from other trays.
Output Colour - - Set the output colour.
HP Tray Command - - Select the correct version of HP LaserJet tray
emulation.
Reset Printer - - Restore the printer settings to the factory settings.
Colour
Correction
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct
colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
Auto Correction - Set the machine to perform Colour Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Colour Settings Setting Mode Select whether to apply the colour print settings of
the machine or the printer driver.
Colour Mode Select the colour mode.
Improve Grey
Colour
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of
shaded areas.
Enhance Black
Printing
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print
correctly.
Brightness Adjust the brightness.
Contrast Adjust the contrast.
Red Adjust the red colour.
Green Adjust the green colour.
Blue Adjust the blue colour.
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP BOOT Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the BOOT method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name - Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
689
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP DNS Server Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. To
use the IPv6 protocol, go to the
Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com for more
information.
Ethernet - - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status - - View the current wired status.
MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default - - Restore the wired network settings to
the factory settings.
Wired Enable - - Turn the Wired LAN on or off
manually.
WLAN TCP/IP BOOT Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the BOOT method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name - Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. To
use the IPv6 protocol, go to the
Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com for more
information.
Setup Wizard - - Configure the wireless network
settings using the setup wizard.
WLAN Assistant - - Configure your wireless network
settings using the Brother installation
disc.
WPS - - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button push
method.
690
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
WLAN WPS w/ PIN
Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status - View the current wireless network
status.
Signal - View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID - View the current SSID.
Comm. Mode - View the current Communication
Mode.
MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default - - Restore the wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable - - Turns the wireless interface on or off.
Wi-Fi Direct Push Button - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using the one-button push
method.
PIN Code - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using WPS with a PIN code.
Manual - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings manually.
Group Owner - - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Device
Information
Device Name - View your machine's device name.
SSID - View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not connected,
the LCD displays Not Connected.
IP Address - View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network
status.
Signal - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network
signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group
Owner, the LCD always indicates a
strong signal.
I/F Enable - - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on
or off.
E-mail
(Available after
Scan to Email
Server is
downloaded)
Mail Address - - Enter the email address.
Setup Server SMTP Server Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for email
notification.
SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject - View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents.
691
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
E-mail
(Available after
Scan to Email
Server is
downloaded)
Setup Mail TX Size Limit Maximum
Size(MB)
Limit the size of email documents.
Notification - Send notification messages.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection
settings.
Address -
Port -
User Name -
Password -
IPsec - - - IPsec is an optional security feature
of the IP protocol that provides
authentication and encryption
services. We recommend contacting
your network administrator before
changing this setting.
Network Reset - - - Restore all network settings back to
the factory settings.
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions
Address Book
(Available after Scan to Email Server is
downloaded)
- Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Journal Report
(Available after Scan to Email Server is
downloaded)
- Print a list of information about your last 200 outgoing emails.
User Settings - Print a list of your settings.
Printer Settings - Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration - Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List - Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print - Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report - Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Serial No. - - Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version - Check your machine's firmware version.
Sub1 Version -
Page Counter Total Colour Check the number of the pages the machine has printed.
Black and
White
Copy Colour
Black and
White
Print Colour
692
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Page Counter Print Black and
White
Check the number of the pages the machine has printed.
Other Colour
Black and
White
Parts Life 1Drum - Display the remaining life of the drum unit.
Belt - Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Fuser - Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
Laser Unit - Display the remaining life of the laser unit.
PF Kit MP - Display the remaining life of the PF kit MP.
PF Kit 1 - Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 1.
PF Kit 2 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 2.
PF Kit 3 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 3.
PF Kit 4 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 4.
1Life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
2Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions
Date & Time Date Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the faxes
you send.
Time
Auto Daylight Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Time Zone Set your time zone.
Reset Machine Reset Restore the machine settings that you have changed, such as Date
and Time.
Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book
(Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Erase all stored email addresses.
All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the memory. You cannot see the data on
the machine.
Factory Reset Restore all the machine settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the machine's memory. We recommend
using this menu option if you want to delete all the data from the
machine.
Local Language
(Available only for
some countries)
- Change your LCD language.
Related Information
•Settings and Features Tables
693
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Settings Tables (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Tray Setting Paper Type MP Tray Select the paper type that matches the paper in the MP
tray.
Tray #1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray #2 1Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Tray #3 1 Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 3).
Tray #4 1Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 4).
Paper Size MP Tray Select the size of paper you loaded in the MP tray.
Tray #1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray #2 1 Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray
(Tray 2).
Tray #3 1Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray
(Tray 3).
Tray #4 1Select the size of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray
(Tray 4).
Paper Low Notice Paper Low
Notice
Select whether to display a message telling you that the
paper tray is nearly empty.
Notice
Level
Select the minimum paper level that will trigger the
message.
Check Size - Select whether to display a message telling you to
check that the size of the paper in the machine and the
machine's Paper Size setting match.
Tray Use: Copy - Select the tray to be used for Copy.
Tray Use: Fax - Select the tray to be used for Fax.
Tray Use: Print - Select the tray to be used for Print.
Volume Ring - Adjust the ring volume.
Beep - Adjust the beeper volume.
Speaker - Adjust the speaker volume.
LCD Settings Backlight - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go
back to your Main Home screen.
Notice
Settings
Scan Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- Displays the total scanned pages and skipped blank
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Toner Save - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time - Set how much time will pass before the machine enters
Power Saving Mode.
694
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Ecology Quiet Mode - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off - Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in
Deep Sleep Mode before going into Power Off Mode.
1Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a Shortcut) Rename Change the shortcut name.
Edit Change the shortcut settings.
Delete Delete the shortcut.
Register Card/NFC Assign a Shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC Remove a Shortcut from an ID card.
[All Settings] > [Fax]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Receive Receive Mode - Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs.
Ring Delay - Set the number of rings before the machine answers
in Fax or Fax/Tel mode.
F/T Ring Time - Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in
Fax/Tel mode.
Fax Preview - View received faxes on the LCD.
Fax Detect - Receive fax messages automatically when you
answer a call and hear fax tones.
Remote Codes Remote Codes Answer calls at an extension or external telephone
and use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off.
You can personalise the codes.
Act.Code
Deact.Code
Auto Reduction - Reduce the size of incoming faxes.
PC Fax Receive On Set the machine to send faxes to your computer.
You can turn on the Backup Print safety feature.
Off
Memory Receive Off -
Fax Forward Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store
incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve
them while you are away from your machine).
If you select Fax Forward, you can turn on the
Backup Print safety feature.
Fax Storage
Forward to
Cloud
Forward incoming faxes to the online service.
Fax Rx Stamp - Print the received time and date on the top of
received faxes.
2-sided - Print received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Setup Send Batch TX - Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at
the same time of day into one transmission.
Coverpage
Setting
Print Sample Print a sample of the fax cover page. You can fill in
information and fax it with your document.
Coverpage
Note
Set up your own comments for the fax cover page.
695
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Send Auto Redial - Set the machine to redial the last fax number after
five minutes if the fax did not go through because the
line was busy.
Destination - Set the machine to display the destination information
on the LCD during fax dialling.
Report Setting XMIT Report - Select the initial setup for the Transmission
Verification Report.
Journal Period Journal
Period
Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax
Journal.
Time If you select an option other than Off and Every 50
Faxes, you can set the time for the option.
Day If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the
week.
Print Document - - Print received faxes stored in the machine's memory.
Remote Access - - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval.
Dial Restriction Dial Pad - Set the machine to restrict dialling when using the
dial pad.
Address Book - Set the machine to restrict the dialling when using the
Address Book.
Shortcuts - Set the machine to restrict the dialling when using a
Shortcut.
LDAP Server - Set the machine to restrict the dialling of LDAP server
numbers.
Remaining Jobs - - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's
memory and cancel selected jobs.
Miscellaneous BT Call Sign
(U.K. only)
- Use with BT Call Sign.
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation - - Select the emulation mode.
Quality - - Select the print quality.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print - Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print - Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long
edge or short edge.
Single Image - For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided
image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce
printing time.
When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, you
must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select
1-sided Feed for letterhead or preprinted paper,
the last page will be printed on the reverse side.
Auto Continue - - Select if you want the machine to clear paper size
errors or media type errors automatically, and use
paper from other trays.
Output Colour - - Set the output colour.
696
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
HP Tray Command - - Select the correct version of HP LaserJet tray
emulation.
Reset Printer - - Restore the printer settings to the factory settings.
Colour
Correction
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct
colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
Auto Correction - Set the machine to perform Colour Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Colour Settings Setting Mode Select whether to apply the colour print settings of
the machine or the printer driver.
Colour Mode Select the colour mode.
Improve Grey
Colour
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of
shaded areas.
Enhance Black
Printing
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print
correctly.
Brightness Adjust the brightness.
Contrast Adjust the contrast.
Red Adjust the red colour.
Green Adjust the green colour.
Blue Adjust the blue colour.
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP BOOT Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the BOOT method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name - Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. To
use the IPv6 protocol, go to the
Brother Solutions Center at
697
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP support.brother.com for more
information.
Ethernet - - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status - - View the current wired status.
MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default - - Restore the wired network settings to
the factory settings.
Wired Enable
(For wireless
network models)
- - Turn the Wired LAN on or off
manually.
WLAN
(For wireless
network models)
TCP/IP BOOT Method IP Boot
Tries
Select the BOOT method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name - Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local address
range automatically.
IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. To
use the IPv6 protocol, go to the
Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com for more
information.
Setup Wizard - - Configure the wireless network
settings using the setup wizard.
WLAN Assistant - - Configure your wireless network
settings using the Brother installation
disc.
WPS - - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button push
method.
WPS w/ PIN
Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status - View the current wireless network
status.
Signal - View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID - View the current SSID.
698
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
WLAN
(For wireless
network models)
WLAN Status Comm. Mode - View the current Communication
Mode.
MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default - - Restore the wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable - - Turns the wireless interface on or off.
Wi-Fi Direct
(For wireless
network models)
Push Button - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using the one-button push
method.
PIN Code - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings using WPS with a PIN code.
Manual - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network
settings manually.
Group Owner - - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Device
Information
Device Name - View your machine's device name.
SSID - View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not connected,
the LCD displays Not Connected.
IP Address - View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status - View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network status.
Signal - View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group
Owner, the LCD always indicates a
strong signal.
I/F Enable - - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on
or off.
NFC
(Available only for
certain models)
- - - Turn the NFC function on or off.
E-mail/IFAX Mail Address - - Enter the email address.
Setup Server SMTP Server Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for email
notification.
SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
POP3/IMAP4 Protocol Select the protocol for receiving an
email from the server.
Server Enter the server name and address.
Port Enter the port number.
Mailbox
Name
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 60 characters)
699
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
E-mail/IFAX Setup Server POP3/IMAP4 Mailbox
Password
Enter the password to login to the
server.
(Up to 32 characters)
Select
Folder
Select the specified folder in the
mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol.
SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify
Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
APOP Turn APOP on or off.
Setup Mail RX Auto Polling Auto
Polling
Check the server for new messages
automatically.
Poll
Frequency
Set the interval for checking new
messages on the server.
Header - Select the contents of the email
header to be printed.
Del/Read Error
Mail
- The POP3 server deletes error
emails automatically. The IMAP4
server deletes error emails
automatically after you read them.
Notification - Receive notification messages.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject - View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents.
Maximum
Size(MB)
Notification - Send notification messages.
Setup Relay Relay Broadcast - Relay a document to another fax
machine.
Relay Domain Relay XX Register the Domain name.
Relay Report - Print the relay Broadcast Report.
Manual Receive - - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server for
new messages manually.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection
settings.
Address -
Port -
User Name -
Password -
Fax to Server Fax to Server - - Select the network connection type.
Prefix - -
Suffix - -
IPsec - - - IPsec is an optional security feature
of the IP protocol that provides
authentication and encryption
services. We recommend contacting
your network administrator before
changing this setting.
700
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Network Reset - - - Restore all network settings back to
the factory settings.
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
XMIT Verify View on LCD Display Transmission Verification Reports about sent faxes.
Print Report Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book - Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Fax Journal - Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing
faxes.
(TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.)
User Settings - Print a list of your settings.
Printer Settings - Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration - Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List - Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print - Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
(For wireless network models)
- Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Serial No. - - Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version - Check your machine's firmware version.
Sub1 Version -
Page Counter Total Colour Check the number of the pages the machine has printed.
Black and
White
Fax -
Copy Colour
Black and
White
Print Colour
Black and
White
Other Colour
Black and
White
Parts Life 1Drum - Display the remaining life of the drum unit.
Belt - Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Fuser - Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
Laser Unit - Display the remaining life of the laser unit.
PF Kit MP - Display the remaining life of the PF kit MP.
PF Kit 1 - Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 1.
PF Kit 2 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 2.
701
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Parts Life 1PF Kit 3 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 3.
PF Kit 4 2- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit 4.
1Life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
2Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed.
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Date & Time Date Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the
faxes you send.
Time
Auto Daylight Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Time Zone Set your time zone.
Station ID Fax Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you
fax.
Tel
Name
Tone/Pulse
(Available only for some
countries)
- Select the dialling mode.
Dial Tone - Shorten the dial tone detect pause.
Phone Line Set - Select the telephone line type.
Compatibility - Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties.
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If
you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic (for
VoIP).
Reset Machine Reset Restore the machine settings that you have changed, such as Date
and Time.
Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book
& Fax
Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the memory. You cannot see the data on
the machine.
Factory Reset Restore all the machine settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the machine's memory. We recommend
using this menu option if you want to delete all the data from the
machine.
Local Language
(Available only for some
countries)
- Change your LCD language.
[Admin Settings]
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Home Screen
Settings
Icons - - Delete icons, add icons or move icons to
other places on the Home screens.
Background
Colour
- - Change the background colour on the
touchscreen to White or Black.
Tabs Rename Tab 1 Change the name of the tabs.
702
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Home Screen
Settings
Tabs Rename Tab 2 Change the name of the tabs.
Tab 3
Tab 4
Tab 5
Tab 6
Tab 7
Tab 8
Main Home
Screen
- Set your Main Home screen.
Home Screen
Settings Reset
- - Restore Home screen settings back to the
factory settings.
Other Screen
Settings
Copy Screen - - Set the default Copy screen settings.
Scan Screen - - Set the default Scan screen settings.
Restriction
Management
User
Restriction
Function
- - Enable or disable the restriction function,
such as Secure Function Lock.
Setting Lock - - Restrict unauthorised users from changing
the machine’s settings.
Setting Lock
Details
- - Select the specific machine settings you
want to restrict unauthorised users from
changing.
Password - - - Register or change the password to log on
to the Admin Settings menu.
Related Information
•Settings and Features Tables
703
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Feature Tables (MFC-L8690CDW)
Feature Tables (MFC-L8690CDW)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW
[Toner]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Toner Life - View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Test Print - Print a test page.
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Redial /
Pause
- - - Redial the last number called. When you are
entering a fax or telephone number on the
control panel, Redial changes to Pause on the
LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay
while dialling numbers, such as access codes
and credit card numbers. You can also store a
pause when you set up addresses.
Tel / R- - - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the
telephone line type. You can use R to gain
access to an outside line or to transfer a call to
another extension when connected to a PBX.
Address
Book
(Search)
- - Search within the Address Book.
Edit Add New
Address
Name Store Address Book numbers, set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting, change and delete
Address Book numbers.
Address
Setup
Groups
Name
Add/
Delete
Change (Select
Address)
Delete (Select
Address)
(Select Address
Book)
Apply - Start sending a fax using the Address Book.
Call
History
Outgoing Call (Select
Outgoing Call)
Apply Select a number from the Outgoing Call
history and then send a fax to it, add it to the
Address Book, or delete it.
Edit
Fax Start - - - Send a fax.
Options Fax Resolution - - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Contrast - - Adjust the contrast.
704
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Options 2-sided Fax - - Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size - - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to
the size of the document.
Broadcasting Add Number Add
Number
Send the same fax message to more than one
fax number.
Add from
Address
book
Search in
Address
book
Delayed Fax Delayed Fax - Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be
sent.
Set Time -
Real Time TX - - Send a fax without using the memory.
Coverpage Setup Coverpage
Setup
- Set the machine to automatically send a cover
page that you have pre-programmed.
Coverpage
Note
-
Total Pages -
Overseas Mode - - Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes
overseas.
Set New Default - - Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset - - Restore all settings back to the factory
settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Sending
Faxes
Redial / Pause - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or
telephone number on the control panel, Redial changes to
Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay while
dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card
numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up
addresses.
Tel / R- Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line
type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to
transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX.
Address Book - Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Call History - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history and then send
a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Fax Start - Send a fax.
Options - Select your settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Received
Faxes
Print/Delete Print
All(New
Faxes)
Print the new received faxes.
705
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Received
Faxes
Print/Delete Print
All(Old
Faxes)
Print the old received faxes.
Delete
All(New
Faxes)
Delete the new received faxes.
Delete
All(Old
Faxes)
Delete the old received faxes.
Address Book - - Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Call History - - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history and then send
a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
[Copy]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Mono Start - - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
Colour Start - - Make a colour copy.
> (more Copy options) Receipt Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Receipt.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Normal Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Normal.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1(ID) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1(ID).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1 Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(1⇒2) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(1⇒2).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(2⇒2) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(2⇒2).
706
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
> (more Copy options) 2sided(2⇒2) Colour Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(2⇒2).
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Paper Save Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Paper Save.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Mono Start - Start Copying.
Colour Start -
Options - Select your settings.
Options Enlarge/Reduce 100% -
Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density - Adjust the density.
Tray Use - Select the tray that will be used.
2-sided Copy Layout Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select
flip on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make
2-sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided
document.
Quality - Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Contrast - Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort - Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Page Layout - Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 ID copies.
Colour Adjust - Adjust the colour for copies.
Remove
Background
Colour
- Change the amount of background colour
that is removed.
Save as Shortcut - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Scan Actions - - Scan documents to a USB
Flash memory drive.
Options Resolution -
File Type -
Scan Type -
2-sided Scan -
Document Size -
Brightness -
707
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Options Contrast Scan documents to a USB
Flash memory drive.
-
File Name -
File Name
Style
-
File Size -
ADF Auto
Deskew
-
Skip Blank
Page
Skip Blank
Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Colour
-
Set New
Default
-
Factory Reset -
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start - -
to PC to File Scan Actions - Scan documents and save
them to a folder on your
computer.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Scan Actions - Convert your scanned
document to an editable text
file.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Scan Actions - Scan photos or graphics into
your graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Scan Actions - Send a scanned document as
an email attachment.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Server
(MFC-L8690CDW:
Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Scan Actions - - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to the email
address you want.
Cancel - -
Manual - -
Address Book
(Search)
-
708
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to E-mail Server
(MFC-L8690CDW:
Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Address Book Edit Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to the email
address you want.
-
(Select Address
Book)
-
Next Destinations -
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
Destinations (Select Address) -
to My E-mail - - - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to your email
address.
to FTP/SFTP Scan Actions - - Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to Network Scan Actions - - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or
on the Internet.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to My Folder - - - Send scanned data to your
folder in the CIFS server on
your local network or on the
Internet.
to SharePoint Scan Actions - - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint® server.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to Web - - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you install a
Web Services Scanner,
which is displayed in your
computer's Network
explorer.)
Scan Actions - - Scan data using the Web
Service protocol.
Scan - -
Scan for E-
mail
- -
Scan for Fax - -
Scan for Print - -
(Wi-Fi®)
Level 3 Descriptions
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
Setup Wizard Configure the wireless network settings using the setup wizard.
WLAN Assistant Configure your wireless network settings using the Brother installation disc.
709
Level 3 Descriptions
WPS Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
WPS w/ PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display the MAC address of the machine.
Set to Default
1
Restore wireless network settings of your machine to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1Available after the Wi-Fi® is set up
[Shortcuts]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Edit/ Delete (Select
Shortcut)
Rename Change the shortcut name.
Edit Change the shortcut settings.
Delete Delete the shortcut.
Add Shortcut Copy - Select the settings you want.
Fax - Select the settings you want.
Scan to File Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your
computer.
to OCR Convert your scanned document to an editable text
file.
to Image Scan a colour picture into your graphics application.
to USB Scan documents to a USB Flash memory drive.
to E-mail Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your
email application.
to E-mail Server
(Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the
email address you want.
to Network Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local
network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint® server.
Web - Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
Web services may have been added and service
names may have been changed by the provider
since this document was published.
Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother
Solutions Center at support.brother.com to download
the Web Connect Guide.
Apps - Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps
service.
These lists appears
when each Shortcut
Rename - Change the shortcut name.
710
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
name is pressed for
two seconds.
Edit - Change the shortcut settings.
Delete - Delete the shortcut.
[Secure Print]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Secure
Print
(Select User) (Select Secure
Print Job)
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you
enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
Level 1 Descriptions
Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
Level 1 Descriptions
Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB Scan documents to a USB Flash memory drive.
Direct Print Print the data directly from the USB flash drive.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 1 Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
•Settings and Features Tables
711
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Feature Tables (DCP-L8410CDW)
Feature Tables (DCP-L8410CDW)
Related Models: DCP-L8410CDW
[Toner]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Toner Life - View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Test Print - Print a test page.
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
[Copy]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Mono Start - - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
Colour Start - - Make a colour copy.
> (more Copy options) Receipt Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Receipt.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Normal Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Normal.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1(ID) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1(ID).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1 Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(1⇒2) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(1⇒2).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
712
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
> (more Copy options) 2sided(1⇒2) > (more Copy options) Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(1⇒2).
Options
2sided(2⇒2) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(2⇒2).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Paper Save Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Paper Save.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Mono Start - Start Copying.
Colour Start -
Options - Select your settings.
Options Enlarge/Reduce 100% -
Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density - Adjust the density.
Tray Use - Select the tray that will be used.
2-sided Copy Layout Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select
flip on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make
2-sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided
document.
Quality - Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Contrast - Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort - Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Page Layout - Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 ID copies.
Colour Adjust - Adjust the colour for copies.
Remove
Background
Colour
- Change the amount of background colour
that is removed.
Save as Shortcut - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
to USB Scan Actions - - Scan documents to a USB
Flash memory drive.
Options Resolution -
File Type -
Scan Type -
713
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
to USB Options Document Size Scan documents to a USB
Flash memory drive.
-
Brightness -
Contrast -
File Name -
File Name
Style
-
File Size -
ADF Auto
Deskew
-
Skip Blank
Page
-
Skip Blank
Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Colour
-
Set New
Default
-
Factory Reset -
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start - -
to PC to File Scan Actions - Scan documents and save
them to a folder on your
computer.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Scan Actions - Convert your scanned
document to an editable text
file.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Scan Actions - Scan photos or graphics into
your graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Scan Actions - Send a scanned document as
an email attachment.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Server
(DCP-L8410CDW:
Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Scan Actions - - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to the email
address you want.
Cancel - -
Manual - -
714
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
to E-mail Server
(DCP-L8410CDW:
Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Address Book
(Search)
Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to the email
address you want.
-
Edit -
(Select Address
Book)
-
Next Destinations -
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
Destinations (Select Address) -
to My E-mail - - - Scan a monochrome or a
colour document to your email
address.
to FTP/SFTP Scan Actions - - Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to Network Scan Actions - - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or
on the Internet.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to My Folder - - - Send scanned data to your
folder in the CIFS server on
your local network or on the
Internet.
to SharePoint Scan Actions - - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint® server.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to Web - - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you install a
Web Services Scanner,
which is displayed in your
computer's Network
explorer.)
Scan Actions - - Scan data using the Web
Service protocol.
Scan - -
Scan for E-
mail
- -
Scan for Fax - -
Scan for Print - -
(Wi-Fi® Setup)
Level 3 Descriptions
TCP/IP Change the TCP/IP settings.
715
Level 3 Descriptions
1
Setup Wizard Configure the wireless network settings using the setup wizard.
WLAN Assistant Configure your wireless network settings using the Brother installation disc.
WPS Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
WPS w/ PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display the MAC address of the machine.
Set to Default
1
Restore wireless network settings of your machine to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1Available after the Wi-Fi® is set up
[Shortcuts]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Edit/ Delete (Select
Shortcut)
Rename Change the shortcut name.
Edit Change the shortcut settings.
Delete Delete the shortcut.
Add Shortcut Copy - Select the settings you want.
Scan to File Scan a monochrome or a colour document to
your computer.
to OCR Convert your scanned document to an editable
text file.
to Image Scan a colour picture into your graphics
application.
to USB Scan documents to a USB Flash memory drive.
to E-mail Scan a monochrome or a colour document into
your email application.
to E-mail Server
(Available after Scan to
Email Server is
downloaded)
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the
email address you want.
to Network Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your
local network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint® server.
Web - Connect the Brother machine to an Internet
service.
Web services may have been added and service
names may have been changed by the provider
since this document was published.
Apps - Connect the Brother machine to the Brother
Apps service.
716
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
These lists appears
when each Shortcut
name is pressed for
two seconds.
Rename - Change the shortcut name.
Edit - Change the shortcut settings.
Delete - Delete the shortcut.
[Secure Print]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Secure
Print
(Select User) (Select Secure
Print Job)
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you
enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
Level 1 Descriptions
Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
Level 1 Descriptions
Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB Scan documents to a USB Flash memory drive.
Direct Print Print the data directly from the USB flash drive.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 1 Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
•Settings and Features Tables
717
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Feature Tables (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Feature Tables (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Related Models: MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
(Wired Network Setup)
Level 3 Descriptions
TCP/IP Change the TCP/IP settings.
Ethernet Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status View the current wired status.
MAC Address View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings.
Wired Enable Turn the Wired LAN on or off manually.
(Wi-Fi® Setup)
For wireless network models
Level 3 Descriptions
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
Setup Wizard Configure the wireless network settings using the setup wizard.
WLAN Assistant Configure your wireless network settings using the Brother installation disc.
WPS Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
WPS w/ PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display the MAC address of the machine.
Set to Default
1
Restore wireless network settings of your machine to the factory settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1Available after the Wi-Fi® is set up
[Toner]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Toner Life - View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Test Print - Print a test page.
Calibration Calibrate Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Registration - Align the print position of each colour.
718
[Admin Settings]
Level 2 Descriptions
Admin Settings Change the screen settings and restrict use of the machine.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Redial /
Pause
- - - Redial the last number called. When you are
entering a fax or telephone number on the
control panel, Redial changes to Pause on the
LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay
while dialling numbers, such as access codes
and credit card numbers. You can also store a
pause when you set up addresses.
Tel / R- - - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the
telephone line type. You can use R to gain
access to an outside line or to transfer a call to
another extension when connected to a PBX.
Address
Book
(Search)
- - Search within the Address Book.
Edit Add New
Address
Name Store Address Book numbers, set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting, change and delete
Address Book numbers.
Address
Setup
Groups
Name
Add/
Delete
Change (Select
Address)
Delete (Select
Address)
(Select Address
Book)
Apply - Start sending a fax using the Address Book.
Call
History
Outgoing Call (Select
Outgoing Call)
Apply Select a number from the Outgoing Call history
and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address
Book, or delete it.
Edit
Fax Start - - - Send a fax.
Options Fax Resolution - - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Contrast - - Adjust the contrast.
2-sided Fax - - Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size - - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to
the size of the document.
Broadcasting Add Number Add
Number
Send the same fax message to more than one
fax number.
Add from
Address
book
Search in
Address
book
Delayed Fax Delayed Fax - Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be
sent.
719
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Options Delayed Fax Set Time Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be
sent.
-
Real Time TX - - Send a fax without using the memory.
Coverpage Setup Coverpage
Setup
- Set the machine to automatically send a cover
page that you have pre-programmed.
Coverpage
Note
-
Total Pages -
Overseas Mode - - Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes
overseas.
Set New Default - - Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset - - Restore all settings back to the factory
settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Sending
Faxes
Redial / Pause - - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a
fax or telephone number on the control panel, Redial
changes to Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you
need a delay while dialling numbers, such as access
codes and credit card numbers. You can also store a
pause when you set up addresses.
Tel / R- - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the
telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to
an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension
when connected to a PBX.
Address Book - - Select the address of the recipient from the address
book.
Call History - - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history and
then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or
delete it.
Fax Start - - Send a fax.
Options - - Select your settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Received
Faxes
Print/Delete Print
All(New
Faxes)
- Print the new received faxes.
Print
All(Old
Faxes)
- Print the old received faxes.
Delete
All(New
Faxes)
- Delete the new received faxes.
Delete
All(Old
Faxes)
- Delete the old received faxes.
Address Book - - - Select the address of the recipient from the address
book.
720
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Call History - - - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history and
then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or
delete it.
[Copy]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Mono Start - - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
Colour Start - - Make a colour copy.
> (more Copy options) Receipt Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Receipt.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Normal Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Normal.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1(ID) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1(ID).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2in1 Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(1⇒2) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(1⇒2).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
2sided(2⇒2) Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided(2⇒2).
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
> (more Copy options)
Options
Paper Save Mono Start Set the preset copy settings of Paper Save.
Colour Start
Save as Shortcut
721
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
> (more Copy options) Paper Save > (more Copy options) Set the preset copy settings of Paper Save.
Options
Options Enlarge/Reduce 100% -
Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density - Adjust the density.
Tray Use - Select the tray that will be used.
2-sided Copy Layout Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select
flip on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make
2-sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided
document.
Quality - Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Contrast - Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort - Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Page Layout - Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 ID copies.
Colour Adjust - Adjust the colour for copies.
Remove
Background
Colour
- Change the amount of background colour that
is removed.
Save as Shortcut - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Scan Actions - - Scan documents to a USB Flash
memory drive.
Options Resolution -
File Type -
Scan Type -
2-sided Scan -
Document Size -
Brightness -
Contrast -
File Name -
File Name Style -
File Size -
ADF Auto Deskew -
Skip Blank Page -
Skip Blank Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Colour
-
722
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Options Set New Default Scan documents to a USB Flash
memory drive.
-
Factory Reset -
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start - -
to PC to File Scan Actions - Scan documents and save them to
a folder on your computer.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Scan Actions - Convert your scanned document to
an editable text file.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Scan Actions - Scan photos or graphics into your
graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Scan Actions - Send a scanned document as an
email attachment.
(Select USB or PC) Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail
Server
Scan Actions - - Scan a monochrome or a colour
document to the email address you
want.
Cancel - -
Manual - -
Address Book
(Search)
-
Edit -
(Select Address
Book)
-
Next Destinations -
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
Destinations (Select Address) -
to My E-mail - - - Scan a monochrome or a colour
document to your email address.
to FTP/SFTP Scan Actions - - Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
723
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to FTP/SFTP (Select Profile
name)
Save as
Shortcut
Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.-
Start -
to Network Scan Actions - - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or on
the Internet.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to My Folder - - - Send scanned data to your folder
in the CIFS server on your local
network or on the Internet.
to SharePoint Scan Actions - - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint® server.
(Select Profile
name)
Options -
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start -
to Web - - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you
install a Web
Services Scanner,
which is displayed in
your computer's
Network explorer.)
Scan Actions - - Scan data using the Web Service
protocol.
Scan - -
Scan for E-
mail
- -
Scan for Fax - -
Scan for Print - -
[Secure Print]
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Secure
Print
(Select User) (Select Secure
Print Job)
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you
enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
Level 2 Descriptions
Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
Level 2 Descriptions
Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB Scan documents to a USB Flash memory drive.
Direct Print Print the data directly from the USB flash drive.
724
(Shortcuts)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Add Shortcut Copy - Select the settings you want.
Fax - Select the settings you want.
Scan to File Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your
computer.
to OCR Convert your scanned document to an editable text
file.
to Image Scan a colour picture into your graphics application.
to USB Scan documents to a USB Flash memory drive.
to E-mail Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your
email application.
to E-mail
Server
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the
email address you want.
to Network Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local
network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint® server.
Web - Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
Web services may have been added and service
names may have been changed by the provider since
this document was published.
Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother
Solutions Center at support.brother.com to download
the Web Connect Guide.
Apps - Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps
service.
These lists appears
when each Shortcut
name is pressed for two
seconds.
Rename - Change the shortcut name.
Edit - Change the shortcut settings.
Delete - Delete the shortcut.
Register
Card/NFC
- Assign a Shortcut to an ID card.
Delete
Card/NFC
- Remove a Shortcut from an ID card.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 2 Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
•Settings and Features Tables
725
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer
Change Machine Settings from Your Computer
•Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
•Change the Machine Settings Using Remote Setup
•Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?
•Network Management Software and Utilities
726
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change Machine Settings
Using Web Based Management
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
•What is Web Based Management?
•Access Web Based Management
•Set a Login Password for Web Based Management
•Network Management Software and Utilities
727
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change Machine Settings
Using Web Based Management > What is Web Based Management?
What is Web Based Management?
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS). Type your
machine's IP address into your web browser to access and change your print server settings.
• We recommend Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 for Windows® and Safari 9 for Mac. Make sure that
JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use.
• You must use the TCP/IP protocol on your network and have a valid IP address programmed into the
print server and your computer.
• The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above.
Related Information
•Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
728
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change Machine Settings
Using Web Based Management > Access Web Based Management
Access Web Based Management
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning
dialog box.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
You can now change the print server settings.
If you change the protocol settings, you must restart the machine after clicking Submit to activate the
configuration.
Related Information
•Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
•Print the Network Configuration Report
729
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change Machine Settings
Using Web Based Management > Set a Login Password for Web Based Management
Set a Login Password for Web Based Management
We recommend setting a login password to prevent unauthorised access to Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the
machine's IP address).
For example:
http://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
- For example:
http://SharedPrinter
If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
- For example:
http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx
The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor
screen.
3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .
4. Click Administrator.
5. Type the password you want to use in the Enter New Password field (8 to 32 characters).
6. Retype the password in the Confirm New Password field.
7. Click Submit.
In the future, every time you access Web Based Management, type the password in the Login field, and then
click .
After configuring the settings, log off by clicking .
If you have not previously set a login password, you can also set a password by clicking the Please
configure the password button on the machine's web page.
Related Information
•Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
730
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup
Change the Machine Settings Using Remote Setup
The Remote Setup program lets you configure many of your Brother machine's settings from your computer.
When you start Remote Setup, the settings on your Brother machine will be downloaded to your computer and
displayed on your screen. If you change the settings on your computer, you can upload them directly to the
machine.
•Remote Setup (Windows®)
•Remote Setup (Mac)
731
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Windows®)
Remote Setup (Windows®)
•Set Up the Brother Machine from Your Computer (Windows®)
•Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
732
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Windows®) > Set Up the Brother Machine from Your Computer
(Windows®)
Set Up the Brother Machine from Your Computer (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows® 7
Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.
Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left
navigation bar, and then click Remote Setup.
• Windows® 8 and Windows® 10
Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not
already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Remote Setup.
The Remote Setup Program window appears.
When your machine is connected via a Network, type the password if required.
2. Configure the settings as needed.
733
Export
Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.
Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.
Import
Click to import a file and read its settings.
Print
Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the
machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.
OK
Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message
appears, confirm that your data is correct, and then click OK.
Cancel
Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.
Apply
Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.
3. Click OK.
• If your computer is protected by a firewall and is unable to use Remote Setup, you may need to configure the
firewall settings to allow communication through port numbers 137 and 161.
• If you are using Windows® Firewall and you installed the Brother software and drivers from the installation
disc, the necessary firewall settings have already been set.
Related Information
•Remote Setup (Windows®)
734
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Windows®) > Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4
(Windows®)
Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
3. Click the Remote Setup button.
4. Configure the settings as needed.
Export
Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.
Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.
Import
Click to import a file and read its settings.
Print
Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the
machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.
735
OK
Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message
appears, confirm that your data is correct, and then click OK.
Cancel
Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.
Apply
Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.
5. Click OK.
• If your computer is protected by a firewall and is unable to use Remote Setup, you may need to configure the
firewall settings to allow communication through port numbers 137 and 161.
• If you are using Windows® Firewall and you installed the Brother software and drivers from the installation
disc, the necessary firewall settings have already been set.
Related Information
•ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
•Remote Setup (Windows®)
736
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Windows®) > Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using
ControlCenter4 (Windows®)
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using ControlCenter4
(Windows®)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use Remote Setup through CC4 to add or change Address Book numbers on your computer.
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
3. Click the Address Book button.
The Address Book opens in a Remote Setup window.
4. Add or update the Address Book information as needed.
5. Click OK.
Related Information
•Remote Setup (Windows®)
737
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Mac)
Remote Setup (Mac)
•Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
738
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Mac) > Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
2. Click the DEVICE SETTINGS tab.
3. Click the Remote Setup button.
The Remote Setup Program screen appears.
4. Configure the settings as needed.
Export
Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.
Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.
Import
Click to import a file and read its settings.
Print
Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the
machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.
739
OK
Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message
appears, enter the correct data again, and then click OK.
Cancel
Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.
Apply
Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.
5. When finished, click OK.
Related Information
•ControlCenter2 (Mac)
•Remote Setup (Mac)
740
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from Your Computer > Change the Machine Settings
Using Remote Setup > Remote Setup (Mac) > Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using ControlCenter2
(Mac)
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)
Related Models: MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Use Remote Setup through ControlCenter2 to add or change Address Book numbers on your computer.
If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.
1. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the
(ControlCenter) icon.
The ControlCenter2 screen appears.
2. Click the DEVICE SETTINGS tab.
3. Click the Address Book button.
The Address Book opens in a Remote Setup window.
4. Add or update the Address Book information as needed.
5. When finished, click OK.
Related Information
•Remote Setup (Mac)
741
Home > Appendix
Appendix
•Specifications
•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine
•Supplies
•Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
•Accessories
•Information Regarding Recycled Paper
•Brother Numbers
742
Home > Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
General Specifications
Printer Type • Laser
Print Method • Electrophotographic Laser Printer
Memory Capacity Standard • (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW)
512 MB
• (MFC-L9570CDW)
1 GB
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) • (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
3.7 in. (93.4 mm) TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 1
• (MFC-L8900CDW)
5.0 in. (118.5 mm) TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 1
• (MFC-L9570CDW)
7.0 in. (164.9 mm) TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 1
Power Source • 220 to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
(Average)
Peak • Approximately 1230 W
Printing 2• Approximately 580 W at 25 °C
Printing
(Quiet Mode) 2
• Approximately 340 W at 25 °C
Copying 2 • Approximately 550 W at 25 °C
Copying
(Quiet Mode) 2
• Approximately 350 W at 25 °C
Ready 2• Approximately 70 W at 25 °C
Sleep 2• Approximately 10 W
Deep Sleep 2• (DCP-L8410CDW)
Approximately 1.3 W
• (MFC-L8690CDW)
Approximately 1.4 W
• (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Approximately 1.7 W
Power Off 2 3 4 • Approximately 0.03 W
Dimensions
(Typical outline view)
******
Unit: mm
• (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
* : 435
** : 539
*** : 526
• (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
* : 495
** : 549
*** : 526
743
Weights (with supplies) • (DCP-L8410CDW)
27.6 kg
• (MFC-L8690CDW)
27.9 kg
• (MFC-L8900CDW)
28.7 kg
• (MFC-L9570CDW)
29.7 kg
Noise Level Sound Pressure Printing • LpAm = 49 dB (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
• LpAm = 44 dB (A)
Ready • LpAm = Inaudible
Sound Power Copying 5 6 Monochrome
(Excluding Belgium)
• LWAd = 6.40 B (A)
(For Belgium)
• LWAd = 6.40 B (A)
Colour
(Excluding Belgium)
• LWAd = 6.41 B (A)
(For Belgium)
• LWAd = 6.41 B (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
Monochrome
• LWAd = 6.00 B (A)
Colour
• LWAd = 6.00 B (A)
Ready 5 6 • LWAd = Inaudible
Temperature Operating • 10 to 32 °C
Storage • 0 to 40 °C
Humidity Operating • 20 to 80% (without condensation)
Storage • 10 to 90% (without condensation)
ADF (automatic document feeder) • (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
Up to 50 sheets
• (MFC-L8900CDW)
Up to 70 sheets
• (MFC-L9570CDW)
Up to 80 sheets
For best results we recommend:
• Temperature: 20 to 30 °C
• Humidity: 50 to 70%
•Paper: 80 g/m2
1Measured diagonally
2USB connections to computer
3Measured according to IEC 62301 Edition 2.0.
4Power consumption varies slightly depending on the usage environment.
5Measured in accordance with the method described in RAL-UZ171.
6Office equipment with LWAd>6.30 B(A) is not suitable for use in room where people require high levels of concentration. Such equipment
should be placed in separate rooms because of noise emissions.
744
Document Size Specification
Document Size ADF Width • 105 to 215.9 mm
ADF Length • 147.3 to 355.6 mm
Scanner Glass Width • Maximum 215.9 mm
Scanner Glass Length • (DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW)
Maximum 300 mm
• (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Maximum 355.6 mm
Print Media Specifications
Paper Input Paper Tray
(Standard)
Paper Type • Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin
Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size • A4, Letter, A5, A5(Long Edge), A6, Executive,
Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal
Paper Weight • 60 to 105 g/m2
Maximum Paper
Capacity
• Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper
Multi-Purpose Tray (MP
tray)
Paper Type • Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin
Paper, Thick Paper, Thicker Paper, Recycled
Paper, Bond, Label, Envelope, Env. Thin,
Env.Thick, Glossy Paper
Paper Size • Width:
76.2 to 215.9 mm
• Length:
127 to 355.6 mm
• Envelope:
COM-10, DL, C5, Monarch
Paper Weight • 60 to 163 g/m2
Maximum Paper
Capacity
• Up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper
• Envelope: 10 envelopes up to 10 mm thick
Paper Tray 2, 3, 4
(Optional) 1 2
Paper Type • Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin
Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size • A4, Letter, A5, Executive, Legal, Folio, Mexico
Legal
Paper Weight • 60 to 105 g/m2
Maximum Paper
Capacity
• LT-330CL
Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper
• LT-340CL 3
Up to 500 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper
Paper Output
4
Face Down Output Tray • Up to 150 Sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper (face
down delivery to the face down output paper
tray)
Face Up Output Tray • One sheet (face up delivery to the face up
output tray)
2-sided Automatic 2-sided Printing Paper Type • Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin
Paper, Recycled Paper, Glossy Paper
Paper Size • A4
745
2-sided Automatic 2-sided Printing Paper Weight • 60 to 105 g/m2
1(DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW) Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to three LT-330CL Lower Trays
2(MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW) Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to three LT-330CL Lower Trays or up to two Lower Trays in
any other combinations
3Applicable to MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
4For labels, we recommend removing the printed sheets from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the
possibility of smudging.
Fax Specifications
NOTE
This feature is available for MFC models.
Compatibility • ITU-T Super Group 3
Coding System • MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Modem Speed • 33,600 bps (with Automatic Fallback)
2-sided Print Receiving • Yes
Automatic 2-sided Sending • (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Yes (from ADF)
Scanning Width • Maximum 208 mm
Printing Width • Maximum 208 mm
Greyscale • 8 bit / 256 levels
Resolution Horizontal • 203 dpi
Vertical • Standard: 98 dpi
• Fine: 196 dpi
• Super fine: 392 dpi
• Photo: 196 dpi
Address Book • 300 Locations
Groups • Up to 20
Broadcasting • 350 Locations
Automatic Redial • 3 times at 5 minutes intervals
Memory Transmission • Up to 500 pages 1
Out of Paper Reception • Up to 500 pages 1
1‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).
Copy Specification
Copy Width • Maximum 210 mm
Automatic 2-sided Copy • (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Yes (from ADF)
Sort Copy • Yes
Stack Copy • Up to 999 pages
Enlarge/Reduce • 25 to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Resolution • Maximum 1200 x 600 dpi
First Copy Out Time 1 Monochrome
746
First Copy Out Time 1 • Less than 16 seconds at 23 °C / 230 V
Colour
• Less than 17 seconds at 23 °C / 230 V
1From Ready Mode and standard tray
Scanner Specifications
Colour / Black • Yes / Yes
TWAIN Compliant • Yes
(Windows® 7 / Windows® 8 / Windows® 8.1 / Windows® 10)
(macOS v10.10.5, v10.11.x, v10.12)
WIA Compliant • Yes
(Windows® 7 / Windows® 8 / Windows® 8.1 / Windows® 10)
ICA Compliant • Yes
(macOS v10.10.5, v10.11.x, v10.12)
Colour Depth • 48 bit colour Processing (Input)
• 24 bit colour Processing (Output)
Grey Scale • 16 bit colour Processing (Input)
• 8 bit colour Processing (Output)
Resolution 1 • Up to 19200 x 19200 dpi (interpolated)
• Up to 1200 x 2400 dpi (from Scanner Glass)
• Up to 1200 x 600 dpi (from ADF)
Scanning Width • Maximum 210 mm
Automatic 2-sided Scanning • (MFC-L8690CDW/MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Yes (from ADF)
1Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1 and Windows® 10 (resolution up to
19200 × 19200 dpi can be selected by using the scanner utility)
Printer Specifications
Automatic 2-sided Print • Yes
Emulation • PCL6, BR-Script3, PDF Version 1.7, XPS Version 1.0
Resolution • 600 x 600 dpi, 2,400 dpi class (2400 x 600) quality
Print Speed 1 21-sided print Monochrome
• Up to 33 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 31 pages/minute (A4 size)
Colour
• Up to 33 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 31 pages/minute (A4 size)
2-sided Print Monochrome
• Up to 14 sides/minute (Up to 7 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
Colour
• Up to 14 sides/minute (Up to 7 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
First Print Time 3 Monochrome
• Less than 15 seconds at 23 °C / 230 V
Colour
747
First Print Time 3 • Less than 15 seconds at 23 °C / 230 V
1The print speed may change depending on the type of document you print.
2Print speed may be slower when the machine is connected by wireless LAN.
3From Ready mode and standard tray
Interface Specifications
USB 1 2 • Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no more than 2.0 metres long.
LAN • 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T 3 4
Wireless LAN • IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode)
IEEE 802.11g/n (Wi-Fi Direct®)
NFC 5 • (MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW)
Yes
1Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB 1.1 interface.
2Third party USB ports are not supported.
3Use a straight-through Category 5e (or greater) twisted-pair cable.
4When you connect the machine to a Gigabit Ethernet Network, use network devices complying with the 1000BASE-T specification.
5When you connect an external IC card reader, use a HID class driver supported device.
Direct Print Feature Specifications
Compatibility • PDF version1.7, JPEG, Exif+JPEG, PRN (created by own printer driver), TIFF (scanned by
Brother models), XPS version 1.0
Interface • USB direct interface : Front x 1, Rear x 1(MFC-L9570CDW)
Supported Protocols and Security Features
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode), IEEE 802.11g/n (Wi-Fi Direct)
Protocols (IPv4)
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA(Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver, mDNS, LLMNR
responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, POP3, SMTP Client, IPP/IPPS, FTP Client and Server,
CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, ICMP, Web
Services (Print/Scan), SNTP Client, LDAP, IMAP4
Protocols (IPv6)
NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, POP3,
SMTP Client, FTP Client and Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server,
TFTP client and server, ICMPv6, SNTP Client, LDAP, Web Services (Print/Scan), IMAP4
Network Security (Wired)
APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS, SMTP, POP3, IMAP4), SNMP v3 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-
FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPSec
Network Security (Wireless)
APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS, SMTP, POP3, IMAP4), SNMP v3, 802.1x (LEAP, EAP-FAST,
PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPSec
Wireless Network Security
WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES) 1
748
Wireless Certification
Wi-Fi Certification Mark License (WPA™/WPA2™ - Enterprise, Personal), Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Identifier Mark License, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Wi-Fi Direct
Computer Requirements Specifications
Supported Operating Systems And Software Functions
Computer Platform &
Operating System Version
PC Interface Processor For
Drivers
Hard Disk
Space to
Install
Parallel
(IEEE128
4)
USB 1 10Base-
T/
100Base-
TX/
1000Base
-T
(Ethernet
)
Wireless
802.11b/g
/n
Windows®
Operating
System
Windows® 7 / 8 /
8.1 2 3
N/A Printing
PC Fax 4
Scanning
32 bit (x86)
or 64 bit
(x64)
processor
650 MB 1.2 GB
Windows® 10
Home / 10 Pro /
10 Education / 10
Enterprise 2 3
Windows Server®
2008
N/A Printing 50 MB N/A
Windows Server®
2008 R2
64 bit (x64)
processor
Windows Server®
2012
Windows Server®
2012 R2
Windows Server®
2016
Mac
Operating
System
macOS v10.10.5 Printing
PC-Fax (Send) 4
Scanning
Intel®
Processor
80 MB 400 MB
macOS v10.11.x
macOS v10.12
1Third party USB ports are not supported.
2For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables resolutions up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.
3PaperPort™ 14SE supports Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1 and Windows® 10.
4PC-Fax supports black and white only.
For the latest driver updates, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at
support.brother.com.
All trademarks, brand and product names are the property of their respective companies.
Related Information
•Appendix
1Wi-Fi Direct supports WPA2-PSK (AES) only.
749
Home > Appendix > How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine
How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine
• When you must enter text on your Brother machine, a keyboard appears on the LCD.
• The characters that are available may differ depending on your country.
• The keyboard layout may differ depending on the operation you perform.
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters.
For certain models, press to select letters, numbers, special characters and additional
letters (such as letters with diacritics).
• Press to cycle between lowercase and uppercase letters.
• To move the cursor to the left or right, press d or c.
Inserting spaces
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c.
Making corrections
• If you entered a character incorrectly and want to change it, press d or c to move the cursor to the incorrect
character, and then press . Enter the correct character.
• To insert a character, press d or c to move the cursor to the correct place, and then enter the character.
• Press for each character you want to erase, or press and hold to erase all the characters.
Related Information
•Appendix
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•Set Your Station ID
750
Home > Appendix > Supplies
Supplies
When the time comes to replace supplies, such as the toner or drum, an error message will appear on your
machine's control panel or in the Status Monitor. For more information about the supplies for your machine, visit
www.brother.com/original/index.html or contact your local Brother dealer.
The supply model name will vary depending on your country and region.
Supply Items Supply Model Name Approximate Life
(Page Yield)
Applicable Models
Toner Cartridge Standard Toner:
• Black:
TN-421BK
• Cyan:
TN-421C
• Magenta:
TN-421M
• Yellow:
TN-421Y
• Black:
Approximately 3,000
pages 1 2
• Cyan / Magenta /
Yellow:
Approximately 1,800
pages 1 2
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW
High Yield Toner:
• Black:
TN-423BK
• Cyan:
TN-423C
• Magenta:
TN-423M
• Yellow:
TN-423Y
• Black:
Approximately 6,500
pages 1 2
• Cyan / Magenta /
Yellow:
Approximately 4,000
pages 1 2
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW
Super High Yield Toner:
• Black:
TN-426BK
• Cyan:
TN-426C
• Magenta:
TN-426M
• Yellow:
TN-426Y
• Black:
Approximately 9,000
pages 1 2
• Cyan / Magenta /
Yellow:
Approximately 6,500
pages 1 2
MFC-L8900CDW
Ultra High Yield Toner:
• Black:
TN-910BK
• Cyan:
TN-910C
• Magenta:
TN-910M
• Yellow:
TN-910Y
• Black:
Approximately 9,000
pages 1 2
• Cyan / Magenta /
Yellow:
Approximately 9,000
pages 1 2
MFC-L9570CDW
751
Supply Items Supply Model Name Approximate Life
(Page Yield)
Applicable Models
Inbox Toner:
(Supplied with your machine)
• Black:
Approximately 3,000
pages 1 2
• Cyan / Magenta /
Yellow:
Approximately 1,800
pages 1 2
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW
• Black:
Approximately 6,500
pages 1 2
• Cyan / Magenta /
Yellow:
Approximately 6,500
pages 1 2
MFC-L9570CDW
Drum Unit • DR-421CL • Approximately
30,000 pages 3
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Belt Unit • BU-330CL • Approximately
50,000 pages 4
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
Waste Toner
Box
• WT-320CL • Approximately
50,000 pages 2
DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW
1Approximate cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
2A4 or Letter size 1-sided pages
3Approximately 30,000 pages based on 1 page per job and 50,000 pages based on 3 pages per job [A4/Letter simplex pages]. The
number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
4Approximately 50,000 pages based on 1 page per job and 130,000 pages based on 3 pages per job [A4/Letter simplex pages]. The
number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
Related Information
•Appendix
•Replace Supplies
752
Home > Appendix > Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
Toner Cartridge Life
This product detects the life of the toner cartridges using the following two methods:
• Detection by counting the dots of each colour that are necessary to create an image
• Detection by counting the rotations of the developer roller
This product has a function that will count the dots of each colour used to print every document and the rotations
of each toner cartridge’s developer roller. The print operation will stop when either of the upper limits is reached.
The upper limit is set above the number of dots or rotations that would be required for the cartridge to perform
consistently with its advertised page yield. This function is intended to reduce the risk of poor print quality and
damage to the machine.
There are two messages that indicate when the toner is low or needs replacing: Toner Low and Replace Toner.
Toner Low is displayed on the LCD when the number of dots or rotations of the developer roller nears its
maximum count: Replace Toner is displayed on the LCD when the number of dots or rotations of the developer
roller reaches its maximum count.
Colour Correction
The number of developer roller rotations that are counted may not only be for normal operations, such as printing
and copying, but also for machine adjustments, such as Colour Calibration and Colour Registration.
Colour Calibration (Adjustment of Colour Density)
To obtain stable print quality, the density of each toner cartridge needs to be maintained at a fixed value. If the
density balance between the colours cannot be kept, the tint becomes unstable, and accurate colour
reproduction becomes unavailable. The toner density can change due to chemical changes to the toner that
affect its electrical charge, deterioration of the developer unit, and temperature and humidity levels in the
machine. During calibration, the density level adjustment test patterns are printed on the belt unit.
Calibration is mainly performed at the following times:
• When the user manually selects calibration from the operation panel or the printer driver.
(Please perform calibration if colour density needs to be improved.)
• When a used toner cartridge is replaced with a new one.
• When the machine detects that the ambient temperature and humidity have changed.
• When a specified number of printed pages is reached.
Colour Registration (Correction of Colour Position)
In this machine, the drum unit and developer unit are prepared for black (K), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan
(C), respectively. Four colour images are combined into one image, and therefore colour registration errors (for
example, how the four colour images align) might occur. When registration errors occur, registration correction
test patterns are printed on the belt unit.
Registration is mainly performed at the following times:
• When the user manually selects registration from the operation panel.
(Please perform registration if a colour registration error needs to be corrected.)
• When a specified number of printed pages is reached.
Related Information
•Appendix
753
Home > Appendix > Accessories
Accessories
Availability of accessories may vary depending on your country or region. For more information about the
accessories for your machine, visit www.brother.com/original/index.html or contact your Brother dealer or Brother
customer service.
Model name Items Applicable Models
LT-330CL Lower Tray (250 sheets) • DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW/
MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW 1 2
LT-340CL Lower Tray (500 sheets) • MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW 2
1(DCP-L8410CDW/MFC-L8690CDW) Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to three LT-330CL Lower Trays
2(MFC-L8900CDW/MFC-L9570CDW) Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to three LT-330CL Lower Trays or up to two Lower Trays in
any other combinations
Related Information
•Appendix
754
Home > Appendix > Information Regarding Recycled Paper
Information Regarding Recycled Paper
• Recycled paper is of the same quality as paper made from original forest sources. Standards governing
modern recycled paper ensure that it meets the highest quality requirements for different printing processes.
The imaging equipment supplied by the VA signatories is suitable for using with recycled paper meeting the
EN 12281:2002 standard.
• Purchasing recycled paper saves natural resources and promotes the circular economy. Paper is made using
cellulose fibres from wood. Collecting and recycling paper extends the life of fibres over multiple life cycles,
making the best use of the resources.
• The recycled paper production process is shorter. The fibres have already been processed, so less water and
energy, and fewer chemicals are used.
• Paper recycling has the benefit of saving carbon by diverting paper products from alternative disposal routes
such as landfill and incineration. Landfill waste emits methane gas, which has a powerful greenhouse effect.
Related Information
•Appendix
755
Home > Appendix > Brother Numbers
Brother Numbers
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call Brother Customer Service or your local Brother Dealer.
FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Machine needs. Download the latest software
and utilities and read FAQs and troubleshooting tips to learn how to get the most from your Brother product.
Check here for Brother driver updates, too.
support.brother.com
Customer Service
Visit www.brother.com for contact information on your local Brother office.
Service centre locations
For service centres in Europe, contact your local Brother Office. Contact information for European offices can be
found at www.brother.com and selecting your country.
Internet Addresses
Brother Global Web Site: www.brother.com
For Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), Product Support and Technical Questions, and Driver Updates and
Utilities:
support.brother.com
Related Information
•Appendix
756
Visit us on the World Wide Web
www.brother.com
UK
Version A
… 562 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Brother MFC-L8690CDW at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Brother MFC-L8690CDW in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 15,08 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Brother MFC-L8690CDW

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Installation Guide - English - 2 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Quick start guide - English - 19 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Installation Guide - German - 2 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Quick start guide - German - 21 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW User Manual - German - 785 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Installation Guide - Dutch - 2 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Quick start guide - Dutch - 19 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW User Manual - Dutch - 780 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Installation Guide - French - 2 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW Quick start guide - French - 20 pages

Brother MFC-L8690CDW User Manual - French - 786 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info